ORNL
Operated by
Union Carbide Corporation
for the Department of Energy
Oak Ridge, Tennessee 37830
OR NL-5709
EPA
           United States
           Environmental Protection
           Agency-
Office of Toxic Substances
Washington DC 20460
           Toxic Substances
EPA 560/6-81 004
Jurie 1981
           Ecotoxicological
           Test Systems

           Proceedings of a Series
           of Workshops

-------
     Printed in the United States of America. Available from
             National Technical Information Service
                  U S. Department of Commerce
        5285 Port Royal Road,  Springfield, Virginia 22161
     NTIS price codes-Printed Copy  A15 Microfiche  A01
This report was prepared as an account of work sponsored Dy an agency of the
United States Government Neither the United States Government nor any agency
•hereof nor any of their employees makes any warranty, express or implied, or
assumes ary iega> liability or -esponsib'lity  'or the accuracy completeness, or
usefuTiess of  any information  apparatus  product  or  process disclosed or
rep'ebei'ts that its jse would not infringe privately owned rights Reference herein
to any speC'ficcon.mercia, pro, UK,! ',.<'•( tSii,  or service bv trade name trademaiK,
                 o'herw :,e  jotjs  not  necessan.y  constitute or  imply  ts
                mme'idahO'i 01 ta/onnq  b/ the United States Government :u
         ' *hereot  i he nf-AS anu op'0
-------
                                       ORNL-5709
                                       EPA-560/6-81-004
                                       June  1981
       Contract No. W-7405-eng-26

      ECOTOXICOLOGICAL  TEST SYSTEMS

  PROCEEDINGS OF A SERIES OF WORKSHOPS


                Edited  by

             Anna  S.  Mammons

              Contributors

             J. M. Giddings
             G.  W.  Suter,  II
            L. W.  Barnthouse

     Environmental  Sciences  Division
      Oak  Ridge National  Laboratory
       Oak  Ridge,  Tennessee   37830

        ESD Publication No. 1778

       Date Published:  July  1981

Interagency Agreement No. EPA 78-D-X0387

             Project  Officer

           J. Vincent Nabholz
Health and Environmental  Review Division
       Office of Toxic  Substances
        Washington,  D.C.   20460
              Prepared for

       Office of Toxic Substances
  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
         Washington,  D.C.   20460
     OAK RIDGE  NATIONAL  LABORATORY
      Oak Ridge,  Tennessee   37830
              Operated by
       UNION CARBIDE CORPORATION
                for the
          DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY

-------
                              DISCLAIMER
     This document has  been  reviewed and approved for publication by
the Office of Toxic Substances, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
Approval does not  signify  that the contents  necessarily  reflect the
views and policies of  the  Environmental Protection Agency,  nor  does
the  mention   of  trade  names  or  commercial   products  constitute
endorsement or recommendation for use.

-------
                          FOREWORD
     The scientific disciplines of ecology and environmental
toxicology have not been communicating adequately with each
other, to the detriment of both.  Ecologists are often
falling short when it comes to applying the theory and
findings of their relatively young science in useful practice
to meet society's needs for assessment of the environmental
impacts of toxic pollutants. Environmental toxicologists
are increasingly having difficulty in trying to convince
society's decision makers what the results of their test
methodologies in simple systems really mean in a complex,
highly interactive ecological world.

     These workshops take a step toward marrying some of the
concepts of these two scientific disciplines.  At the request
of the Environmental Protection Agency's Office of Toxic
Substances, the Environmental Sciences Division of Oak Ridge
National Laboratory has convened this series of workshops to
review and evaluate potential techniques for studying ecological
effects of toxic chemicals in systems that transcend the
practicable but oversimplified conditions of most currently
used toxicological test systems.

     EPA intends to use this study, and companion efforts,
to help guide our future attempts to bring about better
synergy between ecology and environmental toxicology in our
implementation of the Toxic Substances Control Act.
                  James J. Reisa, Ph.D.
                  Associate Deputy Assistant Administrator
                    for Toxic Substances
                  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                            m

-------
                               ABSTRACT
     A series  of six  workshops  was conducted  by the  Environmental
Sciences  Division,   Oak  Ridge  National   Laboratory,   to  identify
laboratory methods and  data  evaluation techniques for  predicting the
environmental effects  of  chemical  substances.  Methods  were evaluated
for their potential  for standardization and for use in the ecological
hazard and  risk  assessment  processes  under  the Toxic  Substances
Control  Act.   The  workshops   addressed  assessment   and  policy
requirements of multispecies toxicology test procedures,  mathematical
models  useful   in  hazard  and  risk  assessments,  and   methods  for
measuring effects of chemicals  on terrestrial  and aquatic population
interactions and ecosystem properties.  The  workshops  were primarily
used as a mechanism to gather information about research in progress.
This information was part of  the data base used to prepare a critical
review of laboratory methods for ecological toxicology.

     This report was submitted  in partial fulfillment  of Interagency
Agreement No. EPA 78-D-X0387  between the Department of Energy and the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

-------
                             CONTENTS

                                                                  Page

FOREWORD	111

ABSTRACT 	  v

TABLES	xi

FIGURES	xii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS  	  xiii

1.  INTRODUCTION 	    1

2.  CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS  	    5

    2.1  Introduction  	    5
    2.2  Terrestrial Test Systems  	    6
         2.2.1  Population Interactions  	    6
         2.2.2  Ecosystem Properties 	    6
    2.3  Aquatic Test Systems	    7
         2.3.1  Population Interactions  	    7
         2.3.2  Model Ecosystems 	    8
    2.4  Mathematical Models 	    9

3.  ASSESSMENT AND POLICY REQUIREMENTS OF MULTISPECIES
    TOXICOLOGY TESTING PROCEDURES  	   11

    3.1  Introduction	   13
    3.2  Results and Discussion	   13
    3.3  Conclusions	   15

4.  MATHEMATICAL MODELS USEFUL IN TOXICITY ASSESSMENT   	   19

    4.1  Introduction	   21
    4.2  Results and Discussion	   22
         4.2.1  Terrestrial Simulation Models   	   25
                (1)  Regional Biogeochemical Models  	   29
                (2)  Radiological Cycling and Transport
                     Models	   29
                (3)  Global Biogeochemical Models   	   29
                (4)  Forest Succession Models   	   30
                (5)  Theoretical Ecosystem Model  	   31
         4.2.2  Aquatic Simulation Models  	   31
                (1)  Ecosystem Models  	   31
                (2)  Fate Models	   33
                (3)  Fate-and-Effects Models 	   33
                                VI1

-------
                         CONTENTS  (continued)
         4.2.3  Generalized Multipopulation Models 	   34
         4.2.4  Alternative Methodologies  	   34
                (1)  Loop Analysis	34
                (2)  Time Averaging	36
                (3)  Input-Output Analysis 	   36
                (4)  Natural Selection Models  	   37
    4.3  Conclusions	37
         4.3.1  Criteria for Evaluating and Selecting
                Models	37
         4.3.2  Research Priorities  	   40
    4.4  References	42

5.   METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS ON
    TERRESTRIAL ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES 	   49

    5.1  Introduction	51
    5.2  Results and Discussion	52
         5.2.1  Microbial Processes  	   52
                (1)  Identification and Evaluation of
                     Test Systems	53
                     (a)  Cellulose Decomposition  	   53
                     (b)  Nitrogen Transformation  	   54
                     (c)  Sulfur Transformation  	   54
                     (d)  Other Existing Test Systems  	   55
                     (e)  Proposed Alternate Tests 	   59
                (2)  Protocol Development  	   63
         5.2.2  Identification of Model Ecosystems 	   65
                (1)  Test Description	65
                     (a)  Synthetic Systems  	   65
                     (b)  Excised Systems	65
                (2)  Measurable Parameters 	   66
         5.2.3  Evaluation Model Ecosystems  	   68
                (1)  Synthetic Systems 	   68
                (2)  Excised Systems	69
                (3)  Uncertainties Concerning All
                     Model Ecosystems	69
         5.2.4  Protocol Development for Model Ecosystems  ...   70
    5.3  Conclusions	71
         5.3.1  Microbial Processes  	   71
         5.. 3.2  Model Ecosystems	   72
         5.3.3  General Discussion 	   72
    5.4  References	74

6.   METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS ON AQUATIC
    ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES 	   79

    6.1  Introduction	81
                                vm

-------
                         CONTENTS  (continued)
    6.2  Results and Discussion	83
         6.2.1  Test Descriptions and Measurable
                Ecosystem-Level Properties 	   83
                (1)  Lentic Working Group  	   83
                (2)  Lotic Working Group 	   87
         6.2.2  Evaluation of Test Systems	87
                (1)  Lentic Working Group  	   87
                (2)  Lotic Working Group 	   93
         6.2.3  Protocol Development 	   96
                (1)  Sediment Core Effects Test Procedure  ...   96
                (2)  Pelagic Ecosystem Effects Test
                     Procedure	98
                (3)  Model Stream Effects Test Procedure ....   99
    6.3  Conclusions	100
    6.4  References	101

7.  METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS ON
    TERRESTRIAL POPULATION INTERACTIONS  	  105

    7.1  Introduction	107
    7.2  Results and Discussion - Microbial Populations  ....  109
         7.2.1  Population Interactions  	  109
                (1)  Predation and Parasitism	109
                (2)  Competition	Ill
                (3)  Mutualism	Ill
                     (a)  Lichens	Ill
                     (b)  Methanogenesis	Ill
                (4)  Antagonism	112
                     (a)  Test Procedure	113
                     (b)  Analysis of Results	113
                     (c)  Development Needs  	  115
         7.2.2  Community Properties 	  115
                (1)  Survival Test	115
                (2)  Fungistasis	117
                (3)  Population Levels 	  118
                (4)  Succession	119
                (5)  Diversity	119
    7.3  Results and Discussions - Plant and Microbe
         Populations	120
         7.3.1  Interference	120
         7.3.2  Mycorrhizae - Plant Interactions 	  123
                (1)  Endomycorrhizae - Grass	123
                (2)  Ectomycorrhizae - Conifer 	  124
         7.3.3  Rhizobium - Legume Interaction 	  124
         7.3.4  Wheat - Wheat Rust	125
         7.3.5  Carrot - Crown Gall	125
         7.3.6  Plant - Nematode Interaction 	  125
         7.3.7  Agricultural Soil Microcosm  	  125
                                 IX

-------
                         CONTENTS  (continued)
    7.4  Results and Discussion -  Arthropod Interactions ....  126
         7.4.1  Proposed Test Systems	126
                (1)  Plant - Whitefly - Parasitoid	129
                (2)  Corn - Earworm - Exploiters	129
                (3)  Alfalfa - Aphid - Parasitoid	129
                (4)  Plant - Brown Scale - Exploiters  	  129
                (5)  Housefly - Blowfly - Parasitoid	130
                (6)  Flour Beetle  Competition  	  130
         7.4.2  Promising Systems   	  130
                (1)  Plant - Herbivore - Exploiters	130
                (2)  Predator Competition  	  131
                (3)  Mutualism	131
                (4)  Plant Competition Mediated by Insects .  .  .  131
                (5)  Insect - Pathogen	131
                (6)  Interspecific Competition 	  132
         7.4.3  Protocol Development (Tribolium Competition)  .  .  132
                (1)  Test Description	132
                (2)  Analysis of Results	133
    7.5  Conclusions	134
    7.6  References	136

8.   METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS  OF CHEMICALS ON AQUATIC
    POPULATION INTERACTIONS  	  141

    8.1  Introduction	143
    8.2  Results and Discussion	143
         8.2.1  Evaluations of Test Methods	143
         8.2.2  Group Discussion 	  147
                (1)  Predation Experiments 	  148
                (2)  Competition Experiments and Multi-
                     species Cultures	152
    8.3  Conclusions	155
    8.4  References	157

APPENDICES

    A.   EVALUATIONS OF SELECTED TESTS FOR EFFECTS ON
         AQUATIC POPULATION INTERACTIONS 	  161

    B.   ALPHABETICAL LIST OF PARTICIPANTS	175

-------
                                TABLES

                                                                 Page

4.1  Terrestrial Simulation Models 	  26
4.2  Forest Succession Models  	  30
4.3  Aquatic Simulation Models 	  32
4.4  Examples of Generalized Multipopulation Models  	  35
5.1  Evaluation of Major Test Systems for Evaluating
     Effects of Microbial Processes  	  56
5.2  Characteristics of Proposed Substrates  	  61
5.3  Number of C02 Measurements Per Test	62
5.4  Schedule for Sequential Sampling:   Aerobic System 	  62
5.5  Parameters Measurable in Terrestrial Model Ecosystems ...  67
6.1  Model Ecosystems (Lentic Working Group) 	  84
6.2  Measurable Ecosystem Properties (Lentic Working
     Group)	85
6.3  Evaluation of Model Ecosystems for Measuring
     Ecosystem Properties  	  86
6.4  Model Ecosystems (Lotic Working Group)  	  88
6.5  Measurable Ecosystem Properties (Lotic Working Group) ...  89
6.6  Evaluation of Model Ecosystems for Measuring
     Ecosystem Properties (Lotic Working Group)  	  90
6.7  Evaluation of Test Systems (Lentic Working Group) 	  91
6.8  Evaluation of Test Systems (Lotic Working Group)  	  94
7.1  Rating and Evaluation of Test Systems for Microbial
     Population Interactions 	 110
7.2  Rating and Evaluation of Test Systems for Plant-
     Microbe and Plant-Plant Interactions  	 121
7.3  Ranking and Evaluation of the Proposed Test Systems  .... 127
7.4  Rating of Arthropod Population Interactions 	 128
8.1  Evaluation of Predation Tests 	 144
8.2  Evaluation of Competition Tests 	 145
8.3  Evaluation of Multispecies Culture Systems  	 146
                                 XI

-------
                                FIGURES
4.1  Hypothetical Scheme for Selecting Appropriate
     Models for Use in Hazard Assessments	   39
7.1  Typical Survival Curve 	  116
                                 xi i

-------
                            ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
     We wish to express our appreciation to the workshop participants
who graciously tackled the problems presented to them on a very short
schedule.  We are also grateful to J. Vincent Nabholz, Project Officer,
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), James J. Reisa, Associate Deputy
Assistant Administrator for the Office of Toxic Substances, and
David E. Reichle, Environmental Sciences Division Associate Director,
Oak Ridge National Laboratory, for their advice and continuing support.

     Gratitude is also expressed to members of the Technical Information
Department, Science Applications, Inc., Oak Ridge, for their help in
arranging the workshops and preparing the manuscript for publication.
Donna Reichle, Judy Mason, and Bonnie Winsbro are especially acknowledged.
                                 xm

-------
                                SECTION 1

                              INTRODUCTION
     This series  of six workshops was conducted by the Environmental
Sciences  Division (ESD), Oak  Ridge National Laboratory  (ORNL)  and
sponsored  by the  Office of Toxic  Substances,  U.S.  Environmental
Protection  Agency (EPA).  The  workshops were designed to  identify
laboratory  methods  for  measuring the ecological effects  of chemical
substances  and  to evaluate  those methods for their potential utility
to the  hazard  and risk assessment processes  of the Toxic Substances
Control Act (TSCA).   TSCA is comprehensive legislation that subjects
the chemical  industry in the United  States  to federal  regulation that
broadly protects  human  health  and the environment  from unreasonable
risks resulting from the manufacture, processing, distribution, use,
and disposal  of a chemical  substance.  Under TSCA,  EPA is responsible
for  identifying  and prescribing test  standards  to   be  used in
developing  the  data necessary to predict the risks associated with
exposure to chemical substances.  Responsibility for implementation of
TSCA resides with the Office of Toxic Substances,  EPA.

     Results from  the workshops  were used by ESD  staff in preparing a
critical  review of  Methods for Ecological Toxicology*.   This  review
was prepared to aid EPA in  investigating the  potential for developing
test protocols  that predict the  effects of chemical   substances  on
selected ecological  parameters  that are  indicative of interspecific
interactions,   community  dynamics,   and  ecosystem  functions.
Streamlined protocols are necessary if consistent  results  are  to be
expected among  different laboratories.   The workshops were primarily
used as a mechanism to  collect  information  about  research in  progress
by bringing together investigators  presently working with aquatic or
terrestrial laboratory test systems.

     The  workshops  were  designed  under the  assumption   that  a
tiered-testing  scheme  would be  the basis  for  EPA's  environmental
hazard  assessment process.   Such a scheme  provides  for  different
levels of testing ranging from  simple, inexpensive  screening  tests  to
higher  levels  of   increasingly  complex,  definitive tests.  Positive
results at  one  level of testing indicate the need  to  proceed to the
next higher level.  Participants were asked to identify  tests  for
measuring  the  ecological  effects of  chemical  substances  and to
evaluate  those  tests  in terms  of  their potential usefulness as
predictive  tools   in  hazard  assessment.   In  addition,   one  of the
     *Hammons, A. S.   1981.   Methods for  Ecological  Toxicology.   A
Critical Review of  Laboratory Multispecies Tests.  Oak  Ridge National
Laboratory,  Oak  Ridge, Tennessee.   EPA 560/11-80-026;  ORNL  5708.

-------
workshops addressed the  role  of mathematical modeling  in ecological
hazard assessment and another addressed the  major problems associated
with  assessment and policy  requirements  of  ecological  toxicology
testing under TSCA.

     This report  represents  a  summary of the  results of all six
workshops.  It  is obvious  that  even though  an  attempt  was  made  to
design the  workshops  as  consistently  as possible  considering the
different  topics,  assigned   tasks  were,  nevertheless,  handled
differently by the different groups of participants.  Workshop results
are presented without argument or attempts to include information that
was not actually discussed during the workshops.

     The  criteria that  were  used in evaluating identified tests were
defined as follows:

     Cost Per Test.   The  total  cost of completing a test for  a single
          chemical assuming that the facilities are already available.

     Documentation.   The  extent to  which  the behavior  of a  laboratory
          system (not necessarily toxicological) has been investigated
          and reported.

     Generality.  The  usefulness  of  the test in  predicting the
          responses of  a  variety  of   interspecific  interactions  or
          ecosystems and their major components.

     Rapidity.   The total  amount of time required to complete a test
          assuming that facilities  already exist.

     Realism.   The  ability to unambiguously  interpret  the response of
          the test  system in  terms of responses of real ecosystems.

     Rejection Standards.  Defined  criteria  for rejecting test results
          that  range  from informal or common sense criteria (e.g.,
          many  controls  die)  to a  complete  and well-defined set of
          criteria  (e.g.,  more  than 10% of controls fail to  achieve  a
          weight of 20g).

     Replicability.   The variance  in  response  within  an experiment
          among individual units of a  test system.

     Reproducibility.   The ability  of  a test  to produce common results
          in different laboratories.

     Sensitivity.   The  ability  of  the test to produce measurable
          responses at low doses of test  chemicals.

     Social  Relevance.   The  value  to  society,  direct or indirect, of
          the  response  measured.   The   value  may  be economic,
          aesthetic, or  indirectly  related to human  health.

-------
Standardization.  The definition of conditions and  components  of
     a test  system to  allow different laboratories to  obtain
     similar results from a test.

Statistical Basis.  Accepted  statistical  criteria for detecting
     and interpreting responses of the test system.

Training,  Expertise Requ irements.  The extent to which use of  a
     test may be  limited  by requirements for higher education,
     specialized training, or expertise.

Validity.   The extent to which the responses of a test system  are
     known to reflect responses in the field.

-------
                               SECTION 2

                    CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
2.1  Introduction

     No laboratory systems or mathematical models are presently ready
for use as predictive tools in environmental hazard assessment.
Nevertheless, there are several promising methods that are recommended
for further development.  For example, protocols are suggested for
testing chemical effects on sediment cores, mixed microbial cultures,
model streams, Tribolium (flour beetle) competition, and carbon and
nitrogen mineralizations.   Further experimentation is needed to adapt
many of the systems to chemical testing and to standardize and
validate all of the proposed protocols.

     Selection of appropriate multispecies tests is not easy.  Many
factors must be considered which require further research before
proper choices will be clear.  For example, which types of systems
will yield the most useful, generalizable information when tested?
Which properties are most critical to the functioning of the system
and most sensitive to chemical stress?  What magnitude of effect is
significant?  What are the criteria for validating these systems in
the field?

     Perhaps the major problem to be resolved before interspecific
interactions can be useful in hazard assessment is extrapolation or
generalization of experimental results to predict effects in natural
ecosystems.  The degree to which chemical effects may be distorted by
the necessary simplification of laboratory test systems is not known.
Research is needed to (1) compare the sensitivity of laboratory
systems to that of natural ecosystems, (2) relate the ecological
complexity of laboratory systems (number of taxa or number of
functional groups) to their responses to chemicals, and (3) develop
models or other analytical approaches to link laboratory results to
predictions about chemical effects in nature.

     Although many questions remain unanswered about the proper use of
multispecies tests in hazard assessment, certain generalizations can
be made.  Because these tests generally are more complex than single
species tests and the results are more difficult to interpret, they
probably will be of most practical use in the later stages of a
tiered-testing scheme.   As a result, relatively few chemicals may ever
be tested in these systems.  Chemicals probably will reach the higher
levels of testing only if their economic or commercial potential is
great enough to justify additional expensive tests when a probable
hazard has already been indicated.   A testing sequence should begin
with single-species screening tests.  These tests are needed to (1)
flag potential problems, (2) help select additional tests and test
organisms, and (3) aid in the interpretation of multispecies test

-------
results.   Despite the uncertainties associated with the use of
multispecies tests, they may be necessary to determine ecological
hazards if simpler tests indicate potential problems.   Multispecies
tests will be especially important if the questionable chemical will
be either persistent in the environment or continuously released into
the environment.  The final step of an entire testing scheme should be
field validation.

     The main conclusions from this series of workshops are briefly
outlined in the following sections.

2.2  Terrestrial Test Systems

2.2.1  Population Interactions

     1.   The clover-fescue interference system received the highest
rating among plant and microbe systems because it combines
interactions between plant populations with interactions between plant
and microbial symbionts.

     2.   Other plant microbe test systems proposed for further
development include:  mycorrhizae-plant; Rhizobiurn-1egume; wheat-wheat
rust; carrot-crown gall; plant-nematode; and agricultural soil
microcosm.

     3.   There  is no clear perception that one or a few particular
types of arthropod interactions are superior to the others.

     4.   Tests  for chemical effects on arthropod population
interactions with the greatest potential for use in hazard assessment
are:  plant-white fly-parasitoid;  corn-earworm-exploiters; alfalfa-
aphid-parasitoid; plant-brown scale-exploiters; housefly-blow  fly-
parasitoid; and  flour beetle competition.

     5.   The potential test systems for microbial population
interactions and community properties are  not highly recommended.

2.2.2  Ecosystem Properties

     1.   Tests  for predicting chemical effects on microorganisms
should be as close to the  natural  system as reasonably possible.

     2.   Kinetic  (sequential) testing  should be done.

     3.   Measurements  of  effects  of general metabolic processes
occurring in the whole  population  or community  (e.g., C02  formation,
02  consumption)  are more meaningful than results from more selective
tests  based on  a single enzymatic  criterion (e.g., sulfatase,
phosphotase, amylase).

-------
     4.  A test system is proposed to measure the effects of
chemicals on carbon and nitrogen mineralizations simultaneously using
environmentally relevant high nitrogen substrates and mixed microbe
populations that can be manipulated easily by technicians with minimal
training.

     5.  It is unknown whether microorganisms in the soil are
sensitive indicators of the effects of chemicals.

     6.  No model ecosystem, synthetic or excised, is considered
ready to serve as a test protocol.

     7.  Both defined (gnotobiotic) systems and intermediate-sized
grassland microcosms are recommended for further development.

     8.  The relevance of measured parameters to major ecosystem
processes should be determined.

     9.  Encasement materials should be evaluated in terms of
Teachability, absorptive capacity, optical properties, and durability.

    10.  The effect of variation in the chemical, physical, and
microbiological properties of soil on responses to chemicals should
be determined.

    11.  Round-robin evaluation is needed for all tests.

    12.  Field validation is necessary for all tests.


2.3  Aquatic Test Systems

2.3.1  Population Interactions

     1.  Laboratory systems involving predation, competition, and
multiple population interactions are available for development as
hazard assessment protocols, but few systems have been used for
chemical testing.

     2.  Comparison of simple and complex laboratory systems with
natural systems is a major research priority.

     3.  Many tests require special facilities or skills.

     4.  Reproducibility is virtually unknown for all systems
evaluated.

     5.  Relative sensitivities of different laboratory systems is
an important research problem.

-------
     6.    Few tests are rated highly expensive,  but absolute cost per
test is generally not known.

     7.    Predator-prey tests appear to be more  rapid, more
replicable, more advanced, and more readily standardized than
competition tests or multispecies culture systems.

     8.    Predator-prey systems have been used very little to test
effects of organic chemicals.

     9.    Predator-prey tests are more sensitive to chemicals than
acute single-species bioassays in many cases.

     10.  Multispecies tests are more useful in the intermediate
stages of hazard assessment.

     11.  Criteria that should be used in setting up the optimal
system for testing predator-prey relationships include criteria for
(1) the test organism, (2) the test systems, and (3) the test
protocols themselves.  (These are outlined in Section 8.2.)

2.3.2  Model Ecosystems

     1.   Extrapolating from laboratory tests to natural systems is
the major problem in model ecosystem research.

     2.   Research is needed to identify the responses most sensitive
to chemical stress.

     3.   A predictive or mimicking model ecosystem is probably most
useful in later stages of hazard assessment.

     4.   A generic ecosystem (e.g., mixed-flask culture) is probably
most useful earlier in the testing sequence to screen chemicals for
their ability to disrupt ecosystem processes.

     5.   Smaller systems are more replicable and more easily
standardized among laboratories.

     6.   Statistical analysis of results is easiest with small
systems.

     7.   Standards for rejection are less likely for larger models.

     8.   Interpretation of  chemical effects is more difficult  for
larger systems.

     9.   Systems meeting the operational criteria for a screening
test are  least generalizable to natural ecosystems.

-------
     10.   Protocols were developed for chemical effects on model
streams,  mixed microbial cultures, and sediment cores.

     11.   Each proposed protocol needs extensive refinement and
validation.

2.4  Mathematical Models

     1.    Available mathematical models appear to be best suited for
use as relatively inexpensive and rapid qualitative tools for
preliminary screening to explore the possible effects of chemicals.

     2.    Considerable development and testing will be required before
mathematical models can be reliably used for predicting effects of
chemical  substances on ecosystems.

     3.    An overall strategy for selecting and applying models is
required before models can be used productively in hazard assessment.

-------
   ASSESSMENT AND POLICY REQUIREMENTS OF
MULTISPECIES TOXICOLOGY TESTING PROCEDURES
         November 13 and 14, 1979
            Jeffrey M. Giddings

     Environmental Sciences  Division
      Oak  Ridge  National  Laboratory

-------
                                 12
                             PARTICIPANTS

                       J. M. Giddings, Chairman
                     Oak Ridge National Laboratory


Willard Chappell                  A. S. Mammons
University of Colorado            Oak Ridge National Laboratory

C. F. Cooper                      Eugene Kenaga
San Diego State University        Dow Chemical Company

Sidney Draggan                    J. V. Nabholz
National Science Foundation       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

Farley Fisher                     J. C. Randolph
National Science Foundation       Indiana University

J. W. Gillett                     J. J. Reisa
U.S. Environmental Protection     U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
  Agency

-------
                                 13
                               SECTION 3

                 ASSESSMENT AND POLICY REQUIREMENTS OF
              MULTISPECIES TOXICOLOGY TESTING PROCEDURES

3.1  Introduction

     This  workshop  was designed  to help  establish  guidelines for
evaluation of  laboratory  tests for use in  predicting  the  ecological
effects  of  chemical  substances  above the  population  level  of
biological  organization.  Three main  topics were  selected by  the
Environmental  Sciences Division  (ESD) staff  to be  addressed in
roundtable discussions during the two-day workshop:

     1.   What properties  and  functions of communities  and ecosystems
          should be addressed in evaluating the ecological hazard of a
          chemical?  Consider:    Ecological  significance,  System
          specificity, Natural  variability, Sensitivity to  chemical
          disturbance, Ability to be measured, Ability to be simulated
          in the laboratory.

     2.   How  should  these properties  and functions  be used in a
          hazard  evaluation   process?    Consider:   Utility  in
          preliminary  screening,  Utility  in predictive  modeling,  At
          what stages  particular types of information  are  needed.

     3.   Identify  criteria that are  important in  evaluating the
          usefulness  of  any  test.   Examples  might   include:
          Replicability of  test,  Sensitivity  of test,  Statistical
          basis for interpreting results,  Standards for  rejecting test
          results,  Frequency  of  failure,  Time required,  Cost per
          chemical.

     The  following  sections summarize the  workshop  discussions and
conclusions.    Comments  and suggestions that were  considered by ESD
staff  to  be  most  relevant to the goals of the workshop are included.
No attempt was made to develop a consensus report.

3.2  Results and Discussion

     Much  remains  unknown about the use  of multispecies laboratory
tests  for  predicting  chemical  effects  on  interspecific  interactions
and ecosystems.  The  significance of measurable effects  to  the  health
of these  systems has  generally not  been determined.  For this  reason,
emphasis  was placed  on  the basic  need for  developing generally
accepted hypotheses that would allow the identification of significant
effects on interspecific interactions or ecosystem properties and that
would  enable tests  to be  statistically designed to either  validate or
disprove previously formulated testable  hypotheses.   It is important
to understand perturbed or  stressed systems well enough  to  select  the
most important responses to test.   So that test results can be

-------
                                 14
properly  evaluated,  it  is  equally  important  to  understand the
generalities of the  mechanisms  of processes in non-stressed systems
and the ecological significance of variations in measurements.  Until
such  knowledge  is  available,  the safest objective of  an ecological
hazard evaluation process might be to maintain viable ecosystems close
to their present point of balance.

     Development of  a  data  base on  studies of notable "natural
experiments"--ecosystems that  have  already  been  impacted by toxic
substances released into the environment (e.g.,  smelters or accidental
spills) may be  a way to  help identify appropriate parameters to test.
Such an exercise would  be  particularly useful  if assessment of such
studies  uncovered  patterns  of   "typical"  effects   on  "typical"
ecosytems.

     No single  species,  combination  of species, or any ecosystem can
be representative  of all species  or all ecosystems.  As  a  result, the
choice of species  or systems for a  test  will  necessarily vary and
depend heavily on the uses,  residues, and resulting exposure potential
expected  for  each  chemical under consideration.   Some participants
recommended that the most sensitive and the  most likely  to be exposed
species or systems would be the  best  choices to test.  Obviously,
determining the most sensitive  species or system would not be an  easy
task.   In  addition,  if  an ecosystem that would  likely be exposed  to a
questionable  chemical  contains species  of   particular  economic  or
aesthetic  value,  special attention  must  be given to  the possible
effects on those particular species.   Special  attention  was also
suggested  for multispecies interactions associated with  pathogens and
parasites.   For example,  hosts  weakened  by  exposure  to  toxic
substances  may  be  more  prone  to succumb  to disease or predatory
attack.   There  was a suggestion that species should also  be tested
separately  to  determine  whether  either  might  be  affected
independently.   Participants  cautioned  (1) against  assuming  that
protection  of an ecosystem,  as determined by gross parameters, would
protect all of  the individual  components of the system, (2)  against
substituting  multispecies   tests  for  single-species  tests, and
(3) against excluding "special"  ecosystems  or worst-case systems for
consideration in a hazard evaluation process.

     Several participants speculated that comparatively  few  chemicals
would  ever be tested at the highest  level  in an ecological  hazard
evaluation  scheme  where multispecies  tests would perhaps be most
appropriate.  A chemical will  reach  the higher  levels  of testing  only
if its economical  or commercial potential is great enough to justify
additional  expensive testing  even  after  earlier tests indicate
probable  hazard.  Because tests at this level (i.e.,  most multispecies
tests) will be  used on relatively few chemicals, they can generally be
more  complex,  sophisticated,   time-consuming,  expensive,  system-
specific,  etc., than screening tests.  Except,  perhaps where tests
that  require  purchase  of costly, highly-specialized equipment would
not be acceptable  for limited use.   Although the workshop consensus

-------
                                 15
seemed to  be  that effects  on  interspecific  interactions  and  ecosystem
processes  would  probably be tested only  at the higher  levels of  a
tiered-testing  scheme,  this  does  not prevent  the development  of
multispecies tests for screening purposes.

     There appeared  to  be  some agreement that,  for  purposes of the
Toxic Substances  Control Act  (TSCA),  aquatic ecosystems may prove to
be  generally  more relevant to test  than terrestrial ecosystems.
Aquatic systems,  especially those  lacking sediments,  are likely  to be
more sensitive than  terrestrial  systems,  which are buffered by soil.
Consequently,  results from tests  on terrestrial systems  might cause
the hazard to aquatic species to be underestimated.

     Despite the  numerous  problems and uncertainties associated with
such an  effort,   tests  for chemical  effects  on ecosystems  and/or
interspecific interactions  will  be necessary to determine ecological
hazards if simpler tests  indicate  potential  problems.   These tests
will be  necessary especially  if  the  questionable chemical will be
either persistent in the environment or continuously released into the
environment.   Multispecies tests  should be  used to  enhance our
knowledge and predictive capabilities.

3.3  Conclusions

     What properties and functions of communities and ecosystems
should be addressed in evaluating the ecological hazard of a chemical?

     Integrative  parameters,  such  as diversity  or  total primary
production, were generally considered less useful in hazard assessment
than information  on  the presence or absence of particular species in
the community.   Species composition  and  interspecific  interactions
(competition,  predation, herbivory, and parasitism)  are  probably more
sensitive  to  chemicals  than   gross  ecosystem  functions (primary
production, secondary production,  and decomposition) because changes
in  the  latter functions can  be  compensated by shifts in  community
composition.   On  the  other hand,  changes in species interactions and
community composition are probably more ecosystem-specific (i.e.,  less
generalizable) than effects on gross ecosystem functions.

     Among the  emergent ecosystem  properties,  nutrient  cycling and
resistance to additional stress  were  considered to  be currently the
most useful to hazard assessment.

     The  opinion  of  one   participant was  that  predator-prey
interactions are  easier  to  study  in the laboratory than  in the field,
whereas the reverse is true of plant-herbivore interactions.

     The following comments are  presented as examples of individual
thoughts concerning this question.

-------
                                 16
J.  W. GILLETT:   Only those functions need to be tested that are likely
to be more sensitive than any single-species response.

J.  C. RANDOLPH:   Production  (P),  respiration  (R),  and P/R ratios are
functional attributes that  have  been shown to have  a high level of
ecological "significance."   P/R  data have a certain  level of  system
specificity, mostly between  terrestrial  and aquatic  systems; however,
these characteristics  are not unique to a wide variety of  system
types.  Sensitivity to chemical  disturbance is likely to be extremely
variable.   Although technically  somewhat tedious in  some cases,  there
seem  to be neither conceptual nor  technological constraints  on our
ability to measure community respiration and production.

C.  F. COOPER:  In the development of multispecies protocols,  it may be
advisable  to start  slowly (i.e., to begin with  combinations  of two
species),   perhaps along  an  induced  environmental gradient.  One  could
determine  how the two species  sort  themselves  out along  that gradient
(habitat preference; optimal growth under competition) and then see if
the  equilibrium  is  shifted when  the  system  is challenged with  the
chemical in question.

W.  CHAPPELL:  For the longer term there  are areas where research needs
to be done  to  establish whether meaningful  measurements  could be
developed  for diversity,  connectivity,  competition coefficients, etc.

     How should these properties and functions be used in a hazard
evaluation process?

     Most  of the  information already discussed will  be  of secondary
importance in hazard assessment and need not be tested unless earlier,
simpler tests (such  as  single-species bioassays) indicate potential
problems.    Effects  on  some  interspecific  interactions  might be
predictable  (via mathematical  models)  from  single-species  tests.
Gross ecosystem  function,  nutrient  cycling,  and resistance to stress
could be  tested after the  initial  screening  tests  if the exposure
assessment and  screening tests indicate a need  for  further testing.
If ecosystem functions are more sensitive than selected single-species
parameters,  it  may  be  necessary to  develop suitable screening tests
for  effects  on ecosystems.

     To a  large  extent,  the sequence of tests will  be  determined  by
the  availability  of simple,  inexpensive protocols.   However,  some
aspects of the  sequence  can be  based  on scientific  reasoning.  For
example:

      1.     If a  chemical  is  expected to  persist in  soils or sediments,
           tests on  nutrient cycling and decomposition are warranted.

      2.     If different species on a single  trophic  level  vary  greatly
           in their sensitivity to a chemical,  effects on interspecific
           competition should be  tested.

-------
                                 17
     3.   If  a chemical  affects plants  and animals  differently,
          plant-herbivore interactions should be tested.

     The  final  step of an entire hazard  assessment  scheme  should  be
field  experimentation  to  validate  previous  tests  and  confirm
predictions.

     We agreed  that no tests are ready for use as screening tools in
hazard  assessment.   All  tests  are  presently  too  complex,  too
expensive,  and too difficult  to  interpret, and  none have  been
validated.   The Oak  Ridge  National  Laboratory (ORNL)  soil  core
microcosms  now  being  tested at the Environmental Protection Agency's
(EPA's) Corvallis  laboratory are perhaps closest to  standardization
for  routine use.   Selected individual  comments are  presented below.

J. C. RANDOLPH:    If,  at  the  community/ecosystem  level,  some
predictable  input/output  (or dose-response)  relationship could be
established  between exposures  to hazardous  chemicals and ecosystem
properties  such as production  and respiration, there exists  the
possibility  of using  these  relationships  in routine  preliminary
screening tests.    If we wish to  investigate the mechanisms  of the
ecosystem  responses  to  exposure  to  hazardous chemicals,  much
additional  research is needed.  There seems to be little justification
for  routinely  attempting  to  monitor for  complex ecosystem properties,
such as  nutrient  cycling, when we presently  know  relatively  little
about  the generalities of  the  mechanisms of nutrient cycling in
nonstressed  ecosystems.  There is a  very  wide conceptual  and
technological gap  between single-species  acute and chronic  tests done
under  carefully  controlled  laboratory  conditions  and  truly
process-oriented ecosystem analysis that by its very  nature  must be
within the  particular  ecosystem of  interest.   Thus, it would  seem
desirable to  go to a third-tier level  of hazard  evaluation for
ecosystem   processes   only   after  screening  and   longer-term,
single-species tests have indicated a high probability for some effect
on some specific ecosystem property.

C. F. COOPER:  The  test should  be statistically designed to validate
or disprove previously formulated  testable hypotheses about not just
the  occurrence  but the nature  of an  effect.   Preparation of these
hypotheses,   based  on  knowledge  about  the  behavior  of  similar
compounds,  behaviors  in  single-species  tests, etc., are likely to be
the most important and the most difficult part of the program.

W. CHAPPELL:  If one  could  obtain a field sample  (e.g.,  lake water
and/or sediment) or a suitable  model  and subject it to a dose of the
chemical   of interest,  it might be possible  to identify the most
sensitive species  for later single- and  multispecies testing under
more controlled conditions.   This  may  or may not work, but it  seems
worth a try.

-------
                                 18
F.  FISHER:   The position  of  a test in a screening system must depend
on the difficulty of the  actual test procedure, which is difficult to
assess at this  time.   Field  testing may be appropriate at the higher
tier.

     Identify criteria that are important in evaluating the usefulness
of any test.

     The following  criteria  (in alphabetical  order)  are considered
important in evaluating  the  usefulness of any multispecies test for
hazard assessment:

     Ability to interpret results unequivocally

     Cost of capital equipment

     Cost per chemical

     Existence of standards for rejecting experimental results
     (e.g., death of controls)

     Frequency of rejection of results

     Replicability

     Sensitivity (i.e., effects are seen at low chemical concen-
     trations, compared to single-species tests)

     Skill or expertise required

     Statistical basis for detecting effects

     Time required

     Wide range of  sensitivity to different classes of chemicals
     and a range of sensitivities within classes.

-------
MATHEMATICAL MODELS USEFUL IN TOXICITY ASSESSMENT
              January 8 and 9, 1980
                 L. W. Barnthouse
         Environmental Sciences Division
          Oak Ridge National Laboratory

-------
                                 20
                             PARTICIPANTS

                      L. W.  Barnthouse,  Chairman
                     Oak Ridge National  Laboratory
D. L. DeAngelis
Oak Ridge National Laboratory

W. R. Emanuel
Oak Ridge National Laboratory

R. H. Gardner
Oak Ridge National Laboratory

Daniel Goodman
Scripps Institute of Oceanography

T. G. Hal lam
University of Tennessee

James Hill
U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency

Richard Levins
Harvard School of Public Health

Marc Lorenzen
Tetra Tech, Inc.
R.  J. Mulholland
Oklahoma State University

R.  V. O'Neill
Oak Ridge National Laboratory

Richard Park
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute

J.  E. Richey
University of Washington

B.  W. Rust
Oak Ridge National Laboratory

H.  H. Shugart
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
G. L. Swartzman
University of Washington
                               OBSERVERS
J. V. Nabholz
U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency

A. S. Hammons
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
D. A. Mauriello
U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency

-------
                                 21
                             SECTION  4

          MATHEMATICAL MODELS USEFUL IN TOXICITY ASSESSMENT

4.1  Introduction

     Four and seven years ago, our Father built Him a model,
     And He built it out of the stuff of the computer,
     And He nurtured it with the stuff of His own soul
     And He breathed life into it--and He thought that it was good.
     And He rested.
     And all the models on the face of the earth—they were fruitful
     And they multipled.
     And now—in this great judgement hall we are called
     Together to evaluate these models—for didn't He say that
     There shall come time when the protection agency shall
     Arise among us and the ghosts of dead models shall
     Congregate in the halls of judgement awaiting redemption.
     Yea, all the models, the lame and the sick, even the
     Poorly documented shall come .  .  .
     And they shall be judged.
     Be this our task?  I beg of you LORD, give us strength
     To know the fat from the lean.

                                   —Invocation by Gordon L. Swartzman
                                     January 9, 1980

     The  purpose  of  this  workshop  was  to  identify  specific
mathematical models  and general  modeling techniques  that  could  be
useful for predicting the effects of toxic substances on ecosystems or
multispecies assemblages.  The workshop sessions were organized around
three major topics:

     1.   Identification and documentation of models and modeling
          methods  potentially useful  for prediction  of toxic
          effects.

     2.   Development of criteria for evaluating the usefulness
          of models.

     3.   Identification of research priorities.

     Because of  the  large  number of extant mathematical  models,  the
workshop focused on general types of models, categorized as follows:

     1.   Terrestrial simulation  models

     2.   Aquatic simulation models

-------
                                 22
     3.    Generalized multipopulation models
     4.    Alternative methodologies
     Participants were divided into four groups, one for each of these
categories.  To stimulate discussion, the compositions of the working
groups  were  varied  among the  three  sessions.   The  criteria  and
research priorities proposed by the working groups were then presented
and discussed at general  roundtable sessions.  Group participants are
identified for each session as follows:
          Group 1
         Mulhoi land
         Shugart
         Emanuel
         Gardner
                     SESSION I  (Model Description)
Group 2
Lorenzen
Hill
Lassiter
Park
 Group 3
DeAngelis
Swartzman
Hall am
O'Neill
Group 4
Richey
Levins
Goodman
Rust
                     SESSION II  (Model Evaluation)
          Group 1
         Mulholland
         Gardner
         Swartzman
         Goodman
Group 2
Lassiter
Park
Richey
O'Neill
 Group 3
DeAngelis
Hal lam
Emanuel
Lorenzen
Group 4
Levins
Hill
Shugart
Rust
                   SESSION  III  (Research Priorities)
                            Same as Session I
4.2  Results and Discussion
     We  agreed  that,  although  no  specific model  has  proven  valuable  in
predicting  the  effects of chemical  substances  on ecosystems,  a great
many models have potential value.
     Ten distinct  types of  terrestrial  simulation  models   were
 identified.   These  types  of  models ranged  in  scale from  models  of
 single plants (suitable  for coupling to  more  complex models) to models
of regional  and global biogeochemical  cycling.   The  majority of these
models were developed to  simulate  material  transport and cycling and
are,   therefore,  more   suitable   for   predicting  transport   and
 accumulation  of chemical substances than for predicting their  effects
 on ecosystems.   Most  could, however, be  modified (with  varying degrees
of difficulty)  to incorporate toxic effects.

-------
                                 23
     The many extant aquatic simulation models were divided into three
basic types:  fate,  effects,  and traditional ecosystem models.  The
fate  models  simulate  biotic  and abiotic  transport phenomena;  the
effects and traditional ecosystem models simulate  ecosystem dynamics.
The prediction of  effects  of toxic substances on  ecosystems requires
the coupling of  fate models to ecosystem models;  effects  models are
ecosystem  models  expressly   designed  for  this   purpose.    Like
terrestrial models, aquatic simulation models vary widely in scale and
complexity.  Models  have  been developed  for most  types  of aquatic
ecosystems, including lakes, rivers, estuaries, and seas.

     Generalized  multispecies models  are  much less  complex  than
terrestrial and aquatic simulation models.   They are not site  specific
or  even  ecosystem specific.   The  structures of these models  (i.e.,
identification of  variables,  functional complexity, and environmental
coupling) can be  tailored to suit the objectives of  the modeler.

     The  alternative methodologies  category includes  all  modeling
techniques that  cannot  be  placed into one  of the  other categories.
Four  alternative  methodologies  were  identified,  all  distinctly
different  in approach  and  application than  the  ecosystem  simulation
and generalized  multispecies  models.   These alternative methodologies
can be used  for  such purposes as predicting the effects of stress  on
the  stability  of  systems, predicting the  direction  of change of
arbitrarily defined  variables (e.g.,  population sizes  or  production
rates)  in response  to stress,  predicting  changes  in patterns of
nutrient  cycling,  and  predicting  the  evolution of  populations
subjected  to  stress.   None of  these methodologies  have  yet  been
applied  in  chemical  effects  studies,  but all  have  potential
applications.

     A variety of criteria were proposed for evaluating the usefulness
of models.  Some  are very general and apply to all  model  types.  Among
these criteria are the match between the properties of the model and
the  objectives   of  the  assessment,  the  generality  and  ease  of
validation of the  model,  temporal  scale and  resolution, whether the
model makes  socially  relevant predictions,  and whether the  model
suggests practical  monitoring  protocols.

     Research priorities for  both  model  development and testing were
suggested.   Development  of   "standard"   models  and  "standard"
environments was proposed for both aquatic  and terrestrial simulation
models.   Development  of parameter structure  handbooks  and  flowchart
decision  trees were recommended as  aids in  the development  of new
models and as guides for the selection and use  of  models  in chemical
hazard assessment.   Theoretical  studies  were  also recommended  to
delimit  the  possible  effects of  chemicals  on ecosystems.   More
generally, in addition to  the development  of  specific models, an
overall  strategy for using models as part of hazard assessments should
be developed.   This  strategy  should  include modification of current
laboratory protocols to provide appropriate data for model input, the

-------
                                 24
development  of  evaluation  criteria and  benchmark test  data, and
verification of model predictions  by comparison to field monitoring
data.

     Models  and  modeling  methods  identified  by  the  workshop
participants as being potentially useful  in chemical  hazard assessment
are briefly  described in  the  following sections.  These discussions
focus on  the properties  that  are most relevant for  evaluating the
usefulness of the models in hazard assessment.  Among these are:

     1.    Spatial  and temporal  scale.  Spatial  scale  relates  to  the
          size  of  the  region  being  modeled  (e.g.,  local  site,
          watershed, state, or whole planet).  Temporal scale  relates
          to  the  time period being  modeled  (days,  weeks,  years, or
          decades).   It is  important that  the  spatial and temporal
          scales of  the model be  commensurate  with  the spatial  and
          temporal scales  of the expected impact.

     2.    Trophic complexity.   In most ecosystem models, the hundreds
          or  thousands  of  individual   species  of  organisms  are
          aggregated  into  groups of species with  similar  properties
          (e.g., trophic levels or functional groups).   Alternatively,
          in some models the organisms of interest (e.g.,  tree species
          in  forest succession  models)  are  modeled  as  individual
          species,  and  the remainder  are  aggregated  into  broad
          groupings or  ignored completely.  Clearly, the way in which
          species are  aggregated affects  the  purposes for  which a
          model can be used.

     3.    Mathematical formalism and computer implementation.     What
          kind  of equations are  used (e.g., differential equations or
          finite  difference equations;  deterministic or  stochastic
          equations;   linear   or   non-linear   equations)?    What
          programming language is used to translate the equations into
          a  computer  program?  Is  the  program documented so that it
          can be understood and used by persons other than the program
          developers?  Are  program  modifications  required  to  run the
          program on  different computers?  The mathematical  formalism
          used  in a model  affects the kinds of purposes for which it
          can  be  used  and, secondarily,  the cost and difficulty of
          using it.   In addition, programming considerations can place
          severe constraints  on  the usefulness of complex  simulation
          models.    An  otherwise  suitable  model  can  be  virtually
          useless  if it  can  be understood  and used only  by its
          creators  or  if  it can be  run on only one kind of computer.
          The  ideal simulation model should  be documented in a user's
          manual that describes  the  computer program and explains how
          to  use  it.  The program should be written in a programming
          language,  such  as  FORTRAN,  that  is  available  on  most
          computers.

-------
                                 25
     4.   Kinds of effects predicted.   These  can  include changes  in
          the abundance of  populations  or of groups of  populations,
          changes  in yield of  economically important  species  or
          changes in the stability of ecosystems.

     5.   Validation.  All models are  abstractions and  simplifications
          of reality.  Therefore, it  is  necessary to investigate the
          correspondence  between the  properties  of the model and the
          properties of  the real system being modeled.  Validation
          must  not  be   confused  with   verification  (i.e.,   the
          demonstration that the computer  program  is  an  accurate
          translation of  the model's  equations) or calibration  (i.e.,
          the adjustment of model parameters so that the output of the
          model  matches   a   data  set).    Comparisons  between model
          predictions  and  empirical  data  (especially  experimental
          data) are  particularly  valuable for assessing the validity
          of models to be  used in chemical hazard assessment.

     6.   Original purpose of the model.    The purpose  for  which a
          model is  developed inevitably  affects  the structure  of the
          model and  constrains the ways  that  it can be used.  A model
          specifically designed  for  predicting effects  of chemical
          substances will  generally be more useful for chemical  hazard
          assessment than will a similar model designed for some other
          purpose.

     7.   Modifications needed to predict effects of chemical
          substances.  Models  developed  for  purposes other  than  the
          prediction of  effects of chemical  substances may  require
          substantial modification  to be  useful  in chemical  hazard
          assessment.  For  example,  models  designed  to predict  the
          bioaccumulation  of pesticides  or  radionuclides  generally
          employ  extremely  simplistic representations  of  biological
          interactions that must be  made more  realistic to predict
          biological effects of chemical  stress.

4.2.1  Terrestrial Simulation Models

     The working group on terrestrial  simulation models identified ten
types  of  such models  and prepared a table  (Table 4.1)  presenting
summary descriptions of each type.   In  addition,  the group developed
more detailed descriptions of the five types with which they were most
familiar and evaluated each one of these with respect to the criteria
presented in Section 4.4.1.  These descriptions, along with citations
to  specific  examples of  each  type  of  model, are presented  below.
Readers who are unfamiliar with the principles of simulation modeling
and the somewhat  specialized language used by modelers  may  wish to
consult the excellent non-technical  discussion of modeling written by
Walters (1971).

-------
26
































2
Lbl
O

o

Jj

1
vo
_J
I/}
UJ
ce
o:
UJ
h-

i-H
UJ
1



































m
re •—
m re
o> u
m »^-
3 w


|S
c -o
QJ 01
CL OJ
C





in

5
m
u


I





C
.^

re
•o

s




IA
at
i
re
X
UJ


re
u o
•— L.


11
+* *J



re

o
t»
QJ QJ


•— u


S C - O -3
•— E^i"Oi" *— C in

X: Oi — » i- i- ro re >
oca> . o e u "c m c
3>^ 'f— ^) »— «•- £ O ~~
i— c w in a* *^ *D OJ **—
*>x: 3 e x: re > — o
u +j — o -CUE re
— •— re E • u u T3
at -^ - aj ID — ^ *•••» aj
u m o>a> a> X) x: -^- o_ in c
Ou'— O O)^ *J 5 * —
ro »— s- -u z: x: c

*>uu'— o 3 t- a> in

TD *-» \ C OX: 3 CTO O -^
a* re ^"- *^- t- m O" o •»— -
S ^ u "O re ^*« u *re m — "TO
*- *^ a* in c *j oj * •
xt o 3 o o •— at o o
t_s **- x> Q. o u •£ x: a> o (o CT
— -o
'ai -> ai
•O U in
g-i- ^-3
•D O
a> o c -
c o i- c a> a>
O —> Cv*»- 0) in
t. "o *o m at u
10 O> C •— i- V)
o m ro a> at *D 4->
3 > x: x: i-
•— in O> O. 3
re O) */> ^"~ u> *•— o
x» c at o a> u
O •*- in w E "O
»- 01 w O •*•* O C
u xi re o re E *^-

c **- ex:
01 W Q. C O O --'
^J-gM*-°**'|*S5J.5
re D> C tn*o re c in" S * ji lo ^ in

f— -o . "5 E a> S"u S 2! "S £ c -2

§re o *re *J -o a. t. o.— *> >> >
"O U C i- O>in3OU(OX)L.
^ ^ h~ 0) c *t~ in E *D O tn a> ^ tn
oreo u aix: a» *J a> MMX:CX>




re i— •—
re re

* •s t
"D iH CO CO
o r*^ re co re co
^ r-t UJ i-l UJ f-l
I I — l-l 1 C
•1i *i*lg-ls §
in s- at -*j — r re «^-
a> rei-^-c ^-»-cu*J


ID at -^- *^- m a> re ^-> >> 3 re
^- E -J ••- c -D x: o. c re u a>
X) U T- 4.) U *•- O
re . >>•--> u in . at in u
in a. QJ i- re at E >,•*- c CL
re o 3 c CT QJ at re — ••- o at
o


V)
at
•o
re


\.S
»— s.
fO 3

O C
U U

_
i re
•— O U in
re at •*- *—
XI Ol E 0)
o o a> "o
•— •*- x: o
U X) U E
0 U

o w E
C re O
•o >j
-- ^- X)
re re E
> at
in
^ -o c
a> e re
•o re
o c
E — —
-D



U •—
^ E S!
re o 3
c w-o .
o a» a)
O)^ O TO
at at u •.->
ce jt Q. w
at
OJ • (
*A —•* 3 1
O ro D .
a> *-* > u w
(/> rH -^- 4->
re .. >, t- u
U ^ »— D) 3
T*- u re -o
*^ •-< ro o
L. i— S» I-
3 0) 3 O O.
O L) (J 1-
U C— t—
(u ^-* a> ro
t— •«- s- — i-
O U (0 X) 3
O l/> Q_ (0 *•>
1
*U t in E S-
0) 3 1 3 U 1 O
roc c o c o o ID in .


E^- at u TO — x: re re o

a> u o *» ~D o a>
f— •— ••- o)atoo"-ec»—
tu ro o o *^ to CJ>*— xt
r— *j L. a> DIX: -tJ o
UJ i-> £ U i« O-*-> — X>i«*^'o)




re o> *—

0) O •*->
0)
C T3
O C ^"
Ift 10 •—
i_ o 4-> ^- a* CM
i- r* ** f*» z r*.
I rH Z i-* O »-l
a>
i
in

OJ ro
U A
C 0
ro •—
2 i- "i?
o •—
in **- OJ
in "O
ro in o


01

ro o in
in c* ro
<*^*t- OJ OJ
in c >,
r- 10 O
ro ja v,»-
c <~ o
o t- QJ
— OJ E m
Ol > O C
a, — — QJ
OC S- £> *J

r^ f^.
§1 1C
O u in
O OJ •*- *—
— 01 E QJ
Ol O OJ "O
QJ — .e o
ce j3 o E
01 C C
I- 1- — O

C O QJ in --> OJ
"- — C in ^ u » i

3 *^ OJ E QJ C CJ

ro S . it. > c >,
U -f- O D. U C
C ro +J t~ E • 1. OJ

•— •— O QJ O U
•— TO ••- *J TJ in —
rO U U • OJ *-


C 3 ••- D. in
OJ X QJ in U QJ  ro u 3 c -D
— t— in u >i E OJ
4J *J •— O 1- in 1.
rorcl-QJ O^COJ
I- "ol Oj O O f .1- — -i-
U in
ce i ->
Z 1 3 C
c — 01 ro
O>'»- D) OJ *—
c c i- a.
— -O OJ
*J C -O fc-
*J ro • c OJ
ai 01 ro s
in in c O
•O "- - Q.
cs-D.cn
— ro o c 01
•o •— i- c
•O C QJ i- —
OJ ro > QJ *J
in *J OJ QJ ro
3 in -a c —
OJ
— i -D
*j xi e en
C S- l~ C Q)
"" fc -g S. I o.
Ol U ••- OJ E
ro ro in c u o
i. C 0 3 U
15 •*•» O m
oj cj £ ro c
*J OJ U Ol OJ
ro Q. u E OJ
•a o • ro a
«- u fO OJ I-
*— o -4J in OJ m
ro in 1C OJ *J ro
> "- T3 1- OJ i
I-
» in i — a>
O "- ro *>
§OJ U m
O '5l • T3 OJ
UI E O C C 1C %
t— — ro ro f-
s- o 6 en -o
» OJ ••- £ t-( C
uj j= •? e 01 ro
u^ 4^ re 4-> 3 -
§o u o x QJ
OJ •— 1C TO ID
•o s- ui p- *: -t- r~
*— i c o o f-u rerji
ro i
C OJ 1
— I. - U
•— OJ in OJ 3
**- C t. U
OJ •*- «*- O O *»
*j o •— •— E m
re -o *>
*J in re QJ QJ
m c >, 3 E *J
i o t- o~ o re
>,— Q QJ m i.
•o <-> c o •
re 3 •*- *— .c A QJ
QJ •— "o re -4J re t-
4J O 1- — f- — 3
i/) in o *J 2 OJ **

O 1
w • s-
in •-•
N E re
J5 -
i in in

O in QJ
— 0 .C
Ol u m ^
OJ OJ &. in
t. N— OJ TJ
.0 *J OJ
3 re re .c:
v« Z > in
"re -0
u c
Ol £-
O O! O
•— C Q. in
O— m —
— — C 01
•o u re -o
re >, s- o
cr o — ' E













































re

QJ
Is
x: en
 v-H





























-------
27



































•o
Ol
3
C

C
O
U
rH
UJ
—I

tn —
3 <•-

re o
c -o
01 01
o o>
.Lg





IA
C
o


re
u
"o.







c
o


re
13


re



i/i
01


X
UJ




"re
U Ol
^> s
11
f «-


*io
u
o
Is


X. TO
TO in


TO
Q.
LO

^_
OJ OI
*O Q.



I I
O QJ
a.— 4->
ro 3 re
X in tn
0) =•

o u
w . u
*/> re
4^ £ GJ
15 4J Z
L> in i.
•*• tft O)
**- C
•o ro 4->
O> TO

^ O E
TO 4J £
u o •
Q) QJ «*- in
C 4»* O)
5m c —
.— •»- O)


•O
C C 14-
.*. o> O
*- .J in
3 C
**- U O
QJ 0 —
in <<- 4->
3 U
.Q.Z .,- (J
*» -O TO
X v> C.
TO QJ t. E
Z -*-> 0 —


O>
c

tn tn
O> 01 >>
4J in &
-£*
re <-> oi
U O 4-> .

Q. O) 0)
E »- = .C
UJ O ift •»•>

re
ic "»J
r^ o> CO
en ID
t-4 IA ert


f— 01 in
— 01 C
oi cm —
ai en 01
O O rH —1
t- C
Q 01
Ol I- •
C Ol W
— •*- C
— 1- O
c "° ID
>,£>§•
•— re oi
F— c
3 -5 're
in s- —
r> o *>










^
z
re i i—
U E 3 01
— JU 1 -0
O) in 3 E
I. >> U
0 in >•,
01 O T3 <->
JC U C —
>- oi re c
1 "-
4J U *J
re 01 01
c c: re js 4-> 01
(C — S- E fC £_ •
> O — .C "D O IA
01 IA w- c c E *J
£ l"g^.£ll 1
TO in QJ 4-> QJ ro •*->
>,^ O i- U i-
^— O)^ 4J C Q.
TO - • C QJ TO E
••- . *— . TO U. "O O
O • ^- C QJ OJ
M 0> Oi O> >>Z > U
^^ £i o> —
tn >, o r- 4J>
•^ in c in O
U 4-> I- — OJ O» E —
•D QJ X) ro LJ C *J ro
GJ >— E C QJ «t) in
£ *£ 3 * S"^ 5»* c
i
tn o
OJ -J

u in
>, O. in 4J
TD in c in
3 O QJ -
*J i*- Q. i- in
in o w O E
Oj t*_ QJ
O tn L. 4->
4J 4-> C in
U •— O >»
"^ QJ QJ in
QJ **- > XO
in **- QJ o U
13 O> ^- (/) O>
TO

TO £ O 1
"O O! QJ QJ W

*•> ^ OJ TO t C O — •
C t-C O*t-*~TOTO
*f-4->TOOW U O **4-> C
O!C *J QJ t- C O *D TJ
TO 4J t- re >» o«-
in QJ ^ QJ -^- 4-> 4-» in
"O QJ £ s- o -M 4J ro cm
QJ £ 4^ 3 o re u J-> QJ ro
in t- -•»- U Oi C O
H- O O D.CNJ U in > Q..Q
rH in in
Q) Q)
^- in ^
c a* c c
W fO i— 1 4-) TO TO

S- 4J 4^ 4J
c a> w c t. t.
O) JS «O -^ TO TO
4J (X> U O) •*: D)V£> OlO
4jr*w 1.3 *J sr** 3co

Q. i— 1 ^(/> 00 CO rH tr> rH

c.
3 •
c
t-> O
— at •—
TO in 4^
U -r- TO
•-- b. 4-> in »—
*» TO C C 3
in QJ oj O E
10 c c. f- •£
£ -r- QJ 4J in
U •— l^- TO
0 C ••- 3 S-
4-> O -r- O" O
l/» C ^ 0> **-




o

in
£.2
TO I-
0> 3
*^1r
jo a>
c
o
in
4^ in in
in QJ r-
QJ O QJ
S- U "O
O 3 O
u. in E
O1 m
5 i c
c c E (^
>> O I O — • X *• —
in i_ u O in — ai i-
C Q; — in a. jC 4-*
O O 4J >i«-> OJ O.4-J 3

*J .— OJ S- — S- *O
~O ro > ^ 3 O *- JJ

>.^=JZS-4->SlnJ.-S
£ *" E o "- -r- ^ O
•OT5O .«*-E*r.3 >>
J£C -"SS*"^ u STO
r- rein TOO —En
TO *J QJ »O 4J QJ X O -r-
CtOJintn ^ O •*" Oi
U ft) o • •— "D U
C QJ U ••- X QJ *— ^ C O
•r-fsjO4->O>^ 3 4^ ro
t.'»- fc- U — '~ O*r-^ I/)
C^ in O. TO CL— X » ** TO

1 4->
OJ L. in i c i
IA JZ TO CJ C Qj TO

O — tr> CL U n
n- TJ I- **- CJ E — —
3 OJ O U O **- r-

QJ in •.- QJ (- 3 U JD •
in in U O. E w V
3*DCC OJ t-COJ
O> O fO*-*^*^- O TO^-
Olr- U*' «J Ift-r-W (J^
^ — l_ r- >, E

c 4^ ro Q. u *J 4-> o m
TO CJ£ E-r-S- C TO"- m
CJ"O4->'r-4-» O 01^4-* TO
1 1
— s. oi
t. O T3
TO W C
> •— '
•o -o
QJ QJ OJ i-n
4^ 4-) in . *J
in TO 3 C in
QJ 4^ O O)
§-J C
«-> 0

•— C in jQ O* S
§«— fl) •*> TD o
re — — c S
in oi.fi ID 01 c
=> re re u o. 3



CVJ
en
r-i
V)
"c
c

£- >)
re i —
c u re •— a> c
•*~ o 3 re oi o
•o er t t- •-
u. ^- o) ft* re *->
o re c *— re
S- *^ U CJ Hi 3
re c c ID e
Ol 0> 01 — *
c t- L. • Q. in in
••- 01 01 W 3 r—
r— s- >*- C 01 Ol
c w s- o «•> -o -o
o — — — oi o o
X "O -a •*•> m o E
.


3 I. u re
•^ - >.
•> "O *i— >^
C OJ L> »- O
O 4J QJ *r- 4J
•r- TO O- f
O) 1- tn T3 >.
QJ A i X. *-
W *^ QJ TO lAff
3 TO ••- TO QJ
l/> U i/i "O ?

O)
•2 m
CO »—
QJ
ft. "O
CO O
TO 1
E 13 TO
QJ C 4-> .
•— 5 C in
^ v- OJ U
O w —
I- TO CJ E

O Q. =
4-> QJ >,
OJ £ *" "°
w inr- c
3 f- TO O
C (J *r-
r- m— -J
TO £ t ro

e i to.
01 01 O
o c >,
•o •— o
-> -o ro
re re -4-1 c
£c o
in oi —
U *^ E 4-*

— 1/1


re 3 Ci &^-> 01
_> C O m f
Ol f— — •— Ol U
j-j - .* o> a. m
m u re >
*> •»- E oi -o ->
in •_ "O 0) C
oi c -J ai
c re o o re E
— — *J u Ol

•D re — -o oi re
01 U U 01 ^ C
IA O Ol IA C ID
= ^ -o r> — E














en
en
CO rH
en tsi


U 4->
re 3
X CJ)


1 1A
m § o?
U CC Q£
•*- <
tn in •
re c in
u .* ai c
o c -o o
*j a> o —
i« -S E w
^

c
3
a>

"o.
i
V)

Q.^
O QJ
i. 0)
O J
o>
TO- tn
4-) QJ
in a. in

*•> cx ai
"s i- o
£ U E

-------
28













































•o
QJ
3
C

•£
O
u
1— (
LU
OD

















































in
•o c
c o
TO •»-

m re
O> LJ
in *f
3 V-

re o
4J
c -o


O OJ

c




in
C
O



u

o.
•S-





c
o


re
•o


ro
>





in
OJ

i
TO
X
LU







TO
U 0>
4-> 3
re *-»
E U
OJ 3
.C U

TO in
E


're
o
Is


\ TO
»— U
TO in
re
D.
LO


'flJ OJ
•D D.
O >»





>> re
c IE re ""


O) -T *—
7i QJ U 1


TO i- C
:>> — TO
"- in n.^
— — £ u
TO fti ft) ft)
— -O E •
U O C TO
O S O «- 0)
in O t.
4J TO
V) . C C
*•>  *-

ftj v- CfO O
t, M— ft) "O i-
a. at -o < CL
j -o
>> oJ 'o>


U) -D -
GJ cn-o
s- o c c
o 4J ••- re
*- u
>> ? S.4J
^O j-> m in
in ft>
•D 3 ft) >
QJ -D C U
=>•- E £




4-> re

c re

ro
cn aj
TO 4->
re
•o s-
•4-> ja in
m re •*•»

t— 'ftJ «

LO


rH C\J

r— r-H
o>
^ >»
U OJ

— L.
E <

U 1
OJ 3
•*-«/)£
**- C "-
— O »n
*O •<••
O 4-> U
•^ j- ro o
*J TO 3 **-
in ft) CT
TO C ftt D. C
JT -^ 3 O
U — 0» ••-
O C U -4-> *>
-j o c 0) re
iy> c oi in -—


o


^
TO C
fti o
^1*^
»H ro

TO O
X- ^
+>
>> 1
4^ QJ in
tn O>'~
O> TO OJ
I- C T3
o ro o
lZ £ £


"c
re


,_
QJ




TO

U
0



u •*->

"O OJ
ft) *»-
Q. ft)

w- .. i/T QJ

o» •»- t-


U 0) >>X1 —
OJ -J -C O OJ
*— re c 4J TD
«*- t. - ro o
in c ft)
i_ ._ ^ ft)
QJ D, U - Q.—
>*- O TO U 3 TO
^H u m ft) u m
t t
TO •—
> u

4-» O' D.
ID in X
c JD a1 -
"- o ro
re "04-1
O) a> c ro
re 4-> re "O
re
13 t, — r-
ft) o re TO
*j .a c ->
in re o c

H- *OJ •*-» £




TO

O)


O 00
x r*-

O i-H
C
QJ

QJ in ro
u- c o
w- O —

^ 4J 4->
TO U
>> 3 ft) .
fc- O"— in
re ft) ft) O)
= O
•i- •— O »—
"O ro in CQ
fc- — •— C
O *•* cu ro


\ t.
4J ro
c o>

,_
CL o
QJ
*— in
CJ5 i-
C 3
•»- O
LO ^

1
QJ in
*Dl C QJ
C TO T3

Wl Q. E
in
"i
•— OJ
O:
in t.
— re




•D

o 5
QJ X in
t- 4J C
3 i- O
10 ••- 4->
c ja re

u u t.


to CL. i-
LO « CL





c
o


JE ^


U *J
«C 01



o

in b.
C I- O -
•*• W **- C
TO r- O

ro E aj 4J
— in re
-O v> 3 t.
0> J3
4J TO 4J -F-
l/> *J TO •—
O) re ^ re
H- "D 4J 0
CO
en


OJ >t
.- i?
ro £
E U

Q> ^

-*J T3
OJ C
— 1 (D



re
u
a< .
en u

n E
re
(- C
ns >>
g?

-J C
o

TO
£ O

in
•0 in

j= fti
in QJ •>—
t- 5 re
0) "*v 3
*•> 0-J C
re E c
^ ^ re
i in
+j — •
0 •§
1 O
— ' E
3


« CL

-------
                                 29
     (1)  Regional bi'ogeochemical models.   These models were developed
for use  In  legal  proceedings related to the regulation of  DDT.  They
are regional  in  scale,  with all  biotic  components aggregated  into
trophic  levels.   All  components  of  the  ecosystem,   from  abiotic
compartments through  top carnivores,  are  included.  The models are
formulated  as  differential  equations describing  mass balance; the
number of state  variables can vary between  3  and about 15.  All are
coded in  FORTRAN.  No user's manuals  exist.  Examples of these models
can be found in Harrison et al.  (1970)  and Hett and O'Neill  (1974).

     Regional  biogeochemical  models  have  been  used to  predict
accumulation  of  DDT in biotic  compartments,  especially  in  top
carnivores.   They can also predict toxic effects  of DDT.  Although it
would be difficult to  modify these  models  to predict  effects of
chemical  substances  other than  DDT,  the  same  principles  and  ideas
could  be useful  in  formulating new  models  for  those  substances.
Regional DDT cycling models  are  relatively low  in  generality, require
relatively  large amounts of data for calibration,  and are difficult to
validate.   However,  they are  comparatively  easy  to  use,   and  their
temporal scales match the temporal impact scale (years to decades) for
chemical substances.

     (2)    Radiological  cycling and transport models.    These  models
were developed  as hazard assessment tools  for  isotope  releases.  They
are airshed models  for  food chains and are  used to predict the food
chain transport  of isotopes  from airborne  dispersion from a  point
source.   As a result, the probable dose to  humans can be  predicted.
Chemical  effects  could   not  be predicted  without substantial  model
modifications.

     Large  amounts of  data  are required.   If  sufficient  data  are
available,  they  can  be  readily  validated.    Socially  relevant
predictions  are  made,  such  as the dose  to man  resulting from the
release  of  a chemical substance from  a point  source.   However, the
time scales of these models do not match basic  impact scales for toxic
substances.   The  models are  multiplicative  chain models.   State
variables are concentration ratios, rates of release,  and decay rates.
FORTRAN  is   the  programming  language  used.   User's  manuals  and
interactive codes  are available and descriptions  of the  models have
been published  in the  open  literature (e.g.,  Hoffman et al.  1977;
Killough and McKay 1976;  Schaeffer et al. 1978).

     (3)  Global biogeochemical models.  These  models were designed to
predict  the C02  concentration  in  the atmosphere resulting  from
combustion  of  fossil fuels.   Some have been  adapted  for  modeling
global  cycling of DDT (Woodwell et al.  1971).

     The models  used  coupled differential  equations that are usually
linear,   but have selected nonlinear  terms.   FORTRAN  is usually the
programming  language  used;  however,  a  few models are in  simulation
languages such  as CSMP  (e.g.,  Gowdy et al. 1975).  In  most cases,

-------
                                 30
documentation  is  sketchy,  although all  are  described  in  journal
articles (e.g., Killough  1980;  Emanuel  et al. 1980a  and  b;  Gowdy et
al.  1975; Bacastow  and  Kealing 1975; Bjakstrom 1979).  These  models
are modified frequently.

     Extensive modification  would be  required to handle cycling of
toxicants.   The cycle  must  be  analagous to  that  of  major chemical
elements material  inputs.   They cannot  predict the effects of chemical
substances nor do  they  predict socially relevant  impacts.   Moderate
amounts of data are required.  Validation is relatively easy.
     (4)  Forest
succession
                 succession models.
           over long  time  scales.
vegetation and predict the effects
deletion  on  forest succession.   These
research aid to understanding ecosystems;
of stochastic  nonlinear difference equations  and  are coded in ANSI
Standard FORTRAN.   Most of  the  succession models cited  in  Table  4.2
are documented in the open literature.
  All these models simulate forest
 They model soil compartments  and
of S02,  climate change, and species
     models were  developed as  a
       they are formulated in terms
                  TABLE 4.2  FOREST SUCCESSION MODELS
      Name
                       Forest type
                   Citation
    JABOWA      Northern Hardwood Forest

    FORET       Southern Hardwood Forest

    BRIND       Australian Eucalypt Forest

    FORMIS      Floodplain Forest

    SELVA       Puerto Rican Rain Forest

    FORAR       Mixed Oak-Pine Forest

    KIAMBRAM    Complex Notophyll Vine
                Forest
                                              Botkin et al. 1972

                                              Shugart and West 1976

                                              Shugart and Noble 1980

                                              Tharp 1978

                                              Dolye et al. 1981

                                              Mielke et al. 1978

                                              Shugart et al. 1980
     No  model  modifications  are  required to predict the  effects  of
chemical  substances.  The  temporal  scales modeled are  applicable  for
either   long-lived  chemicals  or for continual release  of  short-lived
chemicals.   The  predictions,  such  as  changes in  timber  production,
made by these models are obviously socially relevant.

-------
                                 31
     (5)   Theoretical  ecosystem model.    DeAngelis   et  al.   (1975)
developed  a generalized  model   for  use  in  theoretical studies  of
ecosystem  structure  and function.   The model can be  applied to any
type of  ecosystem.  Nonlinear algebraic equations are  used;  these can
also be  used  as  terms  in differential equations (O'Neill 1976).  The
functions  are completely  documented in  the  journal   article  cited
above.   No programming  is required for steady-state  analysis of simple
models.  Analysis  by numerical   simulation  would require writing a
program.

     This  model  has never  been used to  predict effects of toxic
substances  on  a  real  ecosystem  and  would  require  extensive
modification  to  predict such effects.  This model  cannot be  easily
validated,  does  not  make socially relevant predictions, and does not
suggest  a  monitoring protocol.   Like the  similar models described in
Section  4.2.3,  this  model  appears  to  be  useful   primarily in
formulating research strategies  and in initial screening studies.

4.2.2  Aquatic Simulation Models

     The working  group on  aquatic simulation models  identified three
types  of   such   models:   ecosystem  models,  fate  models,   and
fate-and-effects  models.   Ecosystem  models focus  on  biological
processes,  such  as  primary  production,  grazing,   predation, and
decomposition.   Physical and  chemical  interactions   and transport
phenomena  are either  ignored or  treated superficially.  Ecosystem
models can  predict the biological effects of chemical  substances, but
cannot predict the  movement and fate of  chemicals.  Conversely, fate
models  emphasize physical  and  chemical  interactions  and transport
phenomena  at  the  expense  of biological  realism.   Fate models can
predict  the movement,  chemical  transformations, and  fate  (including
bioaccumulation) of chemical substances, but cannot predict  biological
effects.  Recently, efforts have  been made to develop hybrid  models,
here called fate-and-effects  models,  that can predict both  the fate
and biological effects  of chemical substances in  aquatic ecosystems.

     (1)  Ecosystem models.  Aquatic  ecosystem models  exist  for entire
lakes,  streams, estuaries, or open seas (see Table 4.3).  The original
purposes for  developing  these models are varied.  For example, some
were constructed for  research   purposes,  some  for  predicting the
effects of eutrophication (e.g., Chen and Orlob 1975), and one (Tetra
Tech, Inc.  1979) for predicting the effects of power plants.  Although
none of  these  models  have  been used  to predict  the  effects of toxic
substances  on  ecosystems,  all are detailed enough for the effects of
toxic  substances on organismal physiology  to  be  extrapolated  to
population and ecosystem effects.

     The  level  of  aggregation   for  these models varies;  some are
aggregated  into  trophic  levels,  and  some  into two or more functional
groups  within  trophic  levels.   In  general,  the  lower  trophic  levels
are modeled in the  greatest  detail, although  most  models  include
levels  through piscivorous fish.

-------
32




































_l
UJ
o
i
i

«
g

in
l—
if



m

UJ

9












































1§
re-
in re
CJ U
in -^-
3 w
<— *5
re o

C T3
^g •§
O 0)
c





o

re
u


cu

<"





0

TO
•o
re








a*


x
LD





re
U CU
•«- i-
•*•* 3
re +J
fy
3
JZ U
*> 4->
i"


p_
re
o
Is
*-> *—

•— o
re v>

re
D.


ft) CU
•o o.

 i. o
l/> U ~ r— TO **-
j-> .P- .hj a) cu a;
*J .C • U > Wl i/> >>
c CL in ™ a? o di •—
*— o Q.-CJ — a* az .c «—
v- u 3 a> .0 --> TO
cu *j o t. u •<-
S- Q."- — > • C U
d_) C O"' ^  *^"- O •
uo o a. 3 »— CL in
•— •— -»oscuci/> —
•3 m re J- -c o cu cu
j-uocj ^£-j *ai
o. c "~ *^ t. 4 re ^3 ^~
re *•* ••*• o) cu o> Q/
o *J u 3 5 J-* re *c u
5 5 *"•—.£:»•- & S IE
-D z; 4- i- tn uca.

3 U O -» U — *J
•~ QJ in C "O O
.O O f— U ^-t-^CU
c > 01 *^- re 3 "o CD
s- u
O 1 GJ



c  •r-
3 i_ -_> 4-> W (/)
TO u re — >
--> a> *D ^ u c

o i) tr> w ^ t—
E J- 3 0- CL CL


•f- 'o c D ey
*n **-•»— Tp in
3 •»-» c
4-> If) -F- (O

o to *-* c to
•+-* re >i
re *J JD *J *J
i. re me
.D "O "D C 0)
•^ 0) » re c
re c o o» a>
w o •— re a.
*> *


t. i-H
^ U.
re
- I re
tu re

re cu cu

re r^ a> r*» t.

re i
II

c
o •—
c re

,>>•£

re t- •
^ ai in
ai »*- c
C*- 0

in
i.
f— re
gre c 01
-*•> 01 >>
in j£ re o o
>> re o *>
in t— u -
O o in
0 • • C >>
"8?-5
ai o; re .— ~-.
— t. 3 01 •—
o f *> f re
§m IA a. ai
^ 01 3 in

o>
*>


IA
o
u
UJ




E
O>

i/)


O
cu

o
1
s-
5

Ol •
J3 m
in -o
ii
CU
4J-D
re c
JJ •*- TO
U
•^ T3 «/l
•D C CU V)
Ci TO T3 ^~
t- *r- TO
D.*J U *->
I_— CU
O O — » E
4-> o. m
w cu >,
TJ C CL >
cu TO re
tn u >*- cu
=>*J 0 J=
C £
CU i in
O> "O ui O
* «- 0> i- U
-_> O *j -O E O
CU U O U
J3 C "- -O (- U
o 13 cy •*- •—
C — CU > E
O 4-» U i- C
w> 3 CL cu O s-
•»- J3 u> -^- O
t- -1- U J2 4->
re t- cu o 3 -o •
t-j u ,n«— re
m re "o •«- cu *j
-»- i- c s- — re



en -D
r^- c
•o cr> re
r— C i-H
re re Gc f
c or^
— > c cu i- en
O> O *n +J f-n
IA C (A


E en o o re in
irt f-H ac *^ u- ^

£-, ,
i re *^- TO
C C— 3


t. o m »—
o ^-*- re

u w u *> .
TO re re c in
eu cu CL cu c
c c i- o




CU (A
+J U
(A TO
>> CU

o
u o
cu •»-»
cu */>
— t-
11





Ol
re
01 ai -a

—i O S- Ol
u s ai
•t- I/) W- C O
•3 «J in
Oi u .C in ^~
*- 01 u ••- re

s- e 01 ai
(-01 C !-
o 4-> •'- re
i— -a 3 *>
c J3 in in
^ re 01 01
3 -4-> l«
i*- - in re
01 Ol 01 *D J3
in .*> u c
s re c re re
•4- re -t>
>, +* +* re
r— - in C -O
"m HI'S E-a
•F- o in Q. 01 •
4J Q. <3 > "O
C in u *— O 01
01 C ••- Ol t ^
*J re x > p. 01
O >- O 01 E U
a. ^> «< -o» c



c
01
01
J3

ai

re -o
f ai

Ol •—
C D.
o a.
•X. re


' in
in i/> *J *J .
re »— w o ~o
E 01 01 C Ol
in 01 ^ •*- *-»
•o *> o n- 01 to
O in E 01 > -a
j= >, re —
*» m ai our F—
01 o <-> c n
E u TJ-— in >
ai u- •>->•—
ai in ai c
E I- TJ — T3 Ol
03 0 C X O 01
i/> n- re uJ & ja
X
ai


3

I
TO
O
y U3

U- rH

L*
01 C
1- O

•o re

t- cr
re ai


•f- re
o e



i
*J IA
in u
in ai
0 X
u
01 O
01
^ in
It
1



1 U
cu cu
*4 «*.
re *-
u. cu

-------
                                 33
     Most  of  these models  use nonlinear differential or  difference
equations  describing  mass  balance.   FORTRAN is the program  language
used most  frequently.   Machine dependency varies.   In general, model
documentation is very good (e.g., Scavia et al. 1976; Steel and Frost
1977; Anderson and Ursin 1977).  User's manuals are available for most
models listed.

     As would be  expected,  model validation was considered easier to
achieve  for lower trophic  levels  and abiotic compartments than  for
fish.

     (2)   Fate models.  Fate models are available  for lakes, streams,
and  estuaries (Table  4.3).   These  models were constructed to predict
the  transport  and fate of  pesticides or other chemical  substances.
Bioaccumulation is also included.   The level of aggregation  in  fate
models  usually  includes  abiotic campartments plus  trophic levels,
although a few,  such  as PEST  (Park et al., unpublished draft), model
functional groups within trophic levels.  The abiotic compartments are
usually  modeled  in   detail.   Biotic  compartments include  primary
producers  such   as phytoplankton  and/or  macrophytes  and  primary
consumers  such as  zooplankton  and/or  benthos.  Fish may or may not be
included.

     These  models use  nonlinear or  linear differential  equations.
Sometimes  partial  differential  equations  are  used  to  simulate
two-dimensional  hydrodynamics.   As with  ecosystem  models,  the program
language most frequently  used  is FORTRAN.  In general, documentation
of these models  is not as good as that for ecosystem models, although
the  EXAMS  (Lassiter et al.  1978) and PEST  (Park  et al.,  unpublished
draft) models are  reasonably well  documented.  Documentation for the
European models  (Fagerstrom and Asell 1973; Mogenson and Jorgensen
1979) is not known.

     These models cannot predict the  effects of chemical substances on
ecosystems, but  must  be  coupled  to  ecosystem  models.  PEST,  for
example, is compatible with CLEANER (Park et al. 1974).

     (3)   Fate-and-effects models.   Efforts  are  now being  made to
develop models that predict the tranport, fate,  and effects of toxic
substances in aquatic ecosystems. For example, Falco and Mulkey (1976)
have described a  pesticide  fate-and-effects model.  Falco and Mulkey
coupled a one-dimensional  fate model  (used to predict the movement and
transformation of  Malathion®  in a  river)  to a simple dose-response
model that predicts  reductions  in  standing crop  of  fish caused by
exposure to Malathion®.  The model  consists of linear and  nonlinear
ordinary and partial  differential equations, and is coded in FORTRAN.
No user's  manual  is available.  Although fate-and-effects models are
specifically designed  to predict the effects of chemical substances on
aquatic biota, none have been used in practical applications to date.

-------
                                 34
4.2.3  Generalized Multipopulation Models

     Ecosystem  simulation  models  are  intended  to  be  realistic
representations  of  particular  ecosystem types.  Modifying  them to
model  a  different  ecosystem  can be  time-consuming and  expensive.
Alternately, it  is  possible  to construct simple, highly  generalized
multipopulation models that can be rapidly and inexpensively tailored
to fit any system of interacting populations, aquatic or terrestrial.
Using  this  modeling strategy,  no  attempt is  made  to  model  every
component  of an  ecosystem;   only  those  processes  believed  to be
critically  important  are modeled.   Transport  phenomena are   not
incorporated in these models.   Thus,  the models can  be used to predict
the  effects  of  chemical  substances  on systems, but  not the  fate of
those  substances.  These models are not thought to be appropriate for
detailed chemical and  site-specific assessments; however, they can be
used in the early stages of a hazard assessment to rapidly explore the
possible effects of chemical  substances.  Results of such studies can
aid  in determining  whether  a  more  detailed  (i.e., expensive  and
time-consuming) modeling effort is warranted.

     Four  categories  of  generalized multipopulation  models  were
identified.  In order of increasing complexity,  these are:

     Functionally simple, not environmentally coupled.
     Functionally simple, environmentally coupled.
     Functionally complex, not environmentally coupled.
     Functionally complex, environmentally coupled.

     Within  each category, models can  be  either spatially homogeneous
or spatially complex and either age-dependent or not.  Table  4.4 lists
some  examples  of most of the  categories.   Although many of these
examples were  developed with particular systems of populations in
mind, the principles employed  can be applied to  other systems as well.

4.2.4  Alternative Methodologies

     For the purposes of  this  workshop,  "alternative methodologies"
were  defined as any modeling technique that does not fit into one of
the  other  three categories.   Four  such  techniques  were  identified.
Two  of these, loop analysis and time-series averaging,  are methods of
analyzing  the qualitative  behavior of systems  of  coupled  differential
equations.    They could  be   applied  to  many   of  the  generalized
multipopulation  models  discussed  in  Section   4.2.3.   Input-output
analysis is  a  method of econometric  analysis  that  has been  modified
for  use  in  analyzing  material  budgets  in  ecosystems.   Natural
selection models are applications of  population genetics theory  to the
problem  of predicting  the  evolutionary  response of populations to
toxic substances.

      (1)   Loop analysis.   This  modeling technique  is  designed to
analyze  partially  specified  systems,  i.e.,   systems  in which  the

-------
                                  35
      TABLE 4.4  EXAMPLES OF GENERALIZED MULTIPOPULATION MODELS
              Age   .     Spatial  fa
  Type     structure     structure              Reference
                                     DeAngelis et al. 1975;
                                     Canale 1970;
                                     Rescigno and Richardson 1957
1
1 +
2
3
3 +
4
4 +
4 +
+ Levins 1974
Hassell and Comins 1976;
Pennycuick et al. 1968
Emanuel and Mul noil and 1975
Hsu et al. 1977
Travis et al. 1980
Craig et al. 1979
Eggers 1975
+ Andersen and Ursin 1977

1 = Functionally simple, not environmentally coupled.
2 = Functionally simple, environmentally coupled.
3 = Functionally complex, not environmentally coupled.
4 = Functionally complex, environmentally coupled.

- = Age structure (or spatial structure) absent.
+ = Age structure (or spatial structure) present.

-------
                                 36
patterns of  interaction  among  the component variables are known, but
parameter values and  functional  forms are not (Levins 1974;  Lane and
Levins 1977).  The  level  of aggregation and trophic levels modeled are
arbitrary.   This type of  analysis can predict effects such  as  local
stability,  direction  of  change of  variables  in response to altered
parameter values (e.g., input of  chemical substance) and correlations
among variables responding to different inputs (Levins 1974; Lane and
Levins 1977).

     Coupled  differential  or  difference equations  are  used.   The
analysis can be  validated by comparing the predicted  response  of a
system  to  a parameter change  against  the actual  response of  a
perturbed system.  This type of analysis has not been used to predict
the effect of chemicals.   Loop  analysis can be used to (a) predict the
response of   a  multipopulation system to  an  applied  stress,   (b)
identify critical parameters that should be measured, and (c) identify
system  properties  that enhance  or reduce  impacts.   It  may not  be
applicable to systems  that are far from equilibrium.

     (2)  Time averaging.  Time  averaging  can  be used to model  any
system of interacting populations or aggregates of populations (Levins
1979).  This  methodology, which is complementary to loop analysis, was
developed to extend ecological theory to  nonequilibrium  systems.  The
kinds of effects predicted are changes in  variances  and covariances
among variables as  affected by parameter change.

     Coupled  differential  equations  are  used.   Analysis focuses  on
statistical  moments of variables, especially  second-order statistics.
Validation can be  accomplished   by comparing  predicted  changes  in
variances  and covariances against  actual  responses  of  a perturbed
system  by  using  pre-  and post-perturbation time  series.  This method
has not been  used to predict the effects of chemical substances.

     Time averaging is potentially useful  for analyzing  time-varying
systems that are far  from equilibrium.  Time averaging can be used to
(a) characterize microcosms  before addition  of  chemical  substances,
(b) distinguish populations  that  are  directly affected by a chemical
substance  from those that  are indirectly affected, and  (c) provide
warning  about   possible   structural   change   caused  by  chemical
substances.

     (3)  Input-output analysis.   Input-output analysis  has  been used
to  compare material  cycling patterns in different  ecosystems  (Finn
1976;  Hannon  1973;   Lettenmaier  and  Richey  1978).   It  has  been
hypothesized that  structure  and  cycling  indices  derived  from
input-output analysis  might  also  be  useful  as  indicators  of
environmental  stress.  These indices  can  be computed from a matrix of
material flow coefficients using  a computer program written in FORTRAN
IV.  This program can be coupled  to "process" models that compute the
flow coefficients.

-------
                                 37
     The  analysis  can be  applied either to whole  ecosystems  or to
subsystems within  ecosystems.   The  indices  are now useful  primarily
for  descriptive purposes  and as indicators  of system  dysfunction
caused  by stress.   In theory, input-output analysis  can be used to
predict changes in material flow patterns in response to stress to the
biota,  but  further development and testing are required before it is
known whether this  is  feasible in practice.

     (4)  Natural  selection models.   Population biologists have used a
variety of models to  study the evolution of populations and systems of
interacting populations  in response to changes in  their  environments
(Levins 1968; Kimura  and Ohta 1971).  All of these models relate rates
of  changes  in  gene or  phenotype frequencies to selective  pressure,
heritability, and  genetic  variance  within populations.  They  can be
used to predict adaptive responses  of species to chemical  substances
and  to  predict the  effects of  those  responses  on  population size,
location, behavior, and  interactions with other species.

     Natural  selection models can be validated by comparing predicted
changes  in  gene   frequencies  to actual  changes  in   a  population
experimentally exposed to stress.  Although they have not been used to
predict the  effects  of  chemical substances on  populations, they are
potentially valuable  for this purpose because populations  in  nature
frequently  evolve  in response  to  exposure  to toxic  substances.
Pesticide tolerance in insects  and antibiotic  resistance  in pathogens
are  notorious  examples.   Practical  applications   would  require
experimental work to  measure the genetic variances  in tolerance within
and  between  populations  for  species  of  interest  and  to  estimate
selection intensities in  the field.

4.3  Conclusions

     We recognize  that  few,  if any, existing models of any kind have
been demonstrated to  be useful for predicting the effects of chemical
substances on ecosystems.   Ecosystem  simulation models are the  only
type  to  have  had significant  applications  to date,  but  their
complexity  makes   their  use comparatively  difficult  and expensive.
Generally, available  mathematical models appear to be better  suited
for  use as relatively  inexpensive  and  rapid  qualitative  tools for
preliminary  screening to explore the  possible effects of  chemicals
than  for  use  as  detailed  chemical  and  site-specific  hazard
assessments.

4.3.1 Criteria  for Evaluating and Selecting Models

     No single  model  or  model type can  fulfill  all needs associated
with environmental  hazard assessment.   For  this  reason, one  of the
workshop tasks was to develop criteria that could be used to evaluate
the  usefulness  of existing  models, modified  versions of  existing
models,   and  new   models.   These  criteria  include  not  only  the
properties of the  models  themselves but also  the match  between the

-------
                                 38
capabilities and  deficiencies of  the  models and  hazard assessment
objectives.

     Nine criteria  for  evaluating the  usefulness  of  models  were
developed:

     I.   The degree of modification required for handling toxic
          material inputs.  Can chemical inputs  be modeled directly?
          Are the  physical  and  chemical  processes  that  govern the
          transport and  fate  of  chemical  substances included  in  the
          model?  Are  the biological  processes  directly  affected by
          toxic materials included in the model?

     2.   Data requirements.   Is  the  amount of  data  required for
          parameterizing  the  model  consistent  with the  available
          resources (i.e., time and money)?

     3.   Generality.   Can  the model  be used for  only  one geographic
          region  or  ecosystem type  or can  it be  easily applied to
          others?

     4.   Ease of validation.   Has  the model  been validated against
          baseline data?  Are  the output  variables  (i.e., those  that
          must  be measured to  test the model's predictions)  easily
          measurable?  Do modifications required for handling chemical
          substances  invalidate  the  model?  Can  the model be  tested
          with microcosm systems  as well as with field data?

     5.   Social relevance.   Is   the   model   output relevant  to
          regulatory needs?

     6.   Relevance to monitoring.  Does the model suggest an environ-
          mental  monitoring protocol?  For  example,  does it suggest
          indicator variables that are  easily measureable  and that
          could be used as early warnings of environmental effects?

     7.   Spatial/temporal  scales.  Do the spatial and temporal scales
          of the model match the basic impact scale?

     8.   Ease of use.   Is  the  model  documentation comprehensible,
          consistent,  and  complete?   Is  the  computer  code  readily
          available?   How much modification is required  to  implement
          the code on  a different computer  system?

     9.   Acceptance  by  the scientific  community,  especially the
          ecological  community.   Are  these models based on biological
          ideas  and mathematical procedures accepted by  most  of the
          ecological community?

     Figure  4.1 presents  a scheme that  could be  used to  identify
 specific  models  for use  in hazard assessments;  it was  prepared using

-------
                                         39
                                                         (IDENTIFICATION)
    IDENTIFY SPECIFIC
   REQUIREMENTS AND
     OBJECTIVES, !.».,
     Law and/or Social
       Ralavancy
    "CONSIDERATIONS"

    1.  SCREENING: SIMPLER
       MODELS ADEQUATE
    2.  DISPUTED RULINGS:
       MORE COMPLEX
    3.  POLITICAL AND LEGAL
       CONSTRAINTS
"ALTERNATIVES"
                                                      FATE
                                                     MODELS
                                                      I
                                            ECOSYSTEM
                                             MODELS
                                               I
                           CRITERIA FOR IDENTIFICATION
                           AND DEVELOPMENT

                           1.  INCORPORATE BIOLOGIC PROCESS
                              LEVELS
                           2.  - ALL TROPHIC LEVELS
                           3.  PORTABLE
                           4.  DOCUMENTED (ESPECIALLY PEER
                              LITERATURE)
                           5.  CAPABLE OF "TRADITIONAL" +
                              FATE = EFFECTS
                                     _  E. G. CLEANER
                                         HYDROCOMP
                                         TETRATECH

                                          EFFECTS
                                           EXAMS
                                            PEST
              MODEL SELECTION

1.  BASED ON BENCHMARK DATA SET
   FROM EITHER "FIELD" OR "MANUFACTURED
   TEST' DATA

2.  BY AN INDEPENDENT PANEL (EPA SELECTION)
                            IDENTIFICATION OF SPECIFIC MODEL
                                   FOR SPECIFIC TASK
     Figure  4.1.   Hypothetical  scheme for selecting appropriate models
                     for use  in hazard  assessments.

-------
                                 40
aquatic simulation models  as  examples,  but it could apply equally to
any type of  model.  The  scheme highlights nonmodeling decisions that
must  be  made  before  appropriate  models  can  be  selected for  an
assessment problem.  These  include  formulating  the specific legal or
social questions  that  the model  will   be  expected to  answer  and
specifying whether the purpose of the assessment is the screening of
many  chemical  substances  for potential  effects  or  the  detailed
evaluation  of  particular  substances  in  connection with regulatory
actions.

4.3.2  Research Priorities

     The workshop  participants identified several  kinds  of research
and development activities  that are needed to increase the  usefulness
of mathematical models for  predicting the effects of toxic  substances
on ecosystems.

     Further development and testing of ecosystem simulation models is
necessary.   Improvements are  needed in  the models themselves and  in
the data bases used  to parameterize and  test them.  Standard models,
specially  tailored for  the prediction of toxic effects,  and standard
data  sets  are needed for representative  terrestrial  and aquatic
environments.  As  an  aid  to  future model development, we  recommend
that an ecosystem parameter handbook be compiled.  This handbook would
include  definitions  and standard  notations for parameters that are
used  in  ecosystem models.   The  handbook  would  also   include  a
codification of properties of ecosystems relevant to modeling (e.g.,
numbers of trophic levels  and  functional groups in different ecosystem
types,  relationships  between  primary  and secondary production,  and
average numbers of prey species fed on by various predators).  We also
recommend  that selected  aquatic ecosystem and fate models  be coupled
to form  effects  models.   The coupled models should then be verified
using  benchmark data  sets.   In addition,  new methodologies  are needed
to solve two problems related to  fate modeling.  First, regional mass
balance  models are  needed  to quantify  the movement  of  chemical
substances between aquatic  ecosystems.  Second, specific methodologies
are needed to project  loadings of important substances.

     Theoretical studies  using generalized multipopulation models  and
alternative  methodologies  should be performed to  define  the possible
responses  of systems to chemical  substances.  Examples of the kinds of
results  that could be obtained are  the  identification of  (a) system
properties  that confer  resilience or vulnerability to  chemical  sub-
stances,  and  (b)  conditions  under which  sublethal   exposures  to
chemical   substances  can  cause  destabilization  of competitive  or
predator-prey  systems.    Results  of such   studies,  which  can  be
conducted  relatively  rapidly and  inexpensively,  would  suggest
processes  that should be   incorporated  in  more complex  models  and
hypotheses  that  should  be  tested  using  ecosystem simulation models,
microcosm  studies, and field studies.

-------
                                 41
     Regardless of how many and what kinds of models are available, an
overall strategy for selecting and applying models will be required to
use models  productively as  part  of the  hazard assessment process.
This  strategy  should  include  the  development  of  flow  chart
decision-trees  for  selecting  the  best  model(s)  for  any  given
assessment problem.  It should also  include modifications of current
laboratory  protocols to  provide  appropriate  input  data and  the
systematic testing of models using microcosm and field data.

-------
                                 42
4.4  References

Andersen, K. P., and E. Ursin.  1977.  A multispecies extension to the
     Beverton  and Holt theory of  fishing, with  accounts  of phosphorus
     circulation and  primary production.  Medd.  fra.  Danmarks Fisk.
     Havunders.  7:313-435.

Arney,  J.  D.   1972.   Computer  Simulation  of Douglas-fir  tree and
     standard  growth.   Ph.D.  dissertation,  Oregon State  University
     Corvallis.  88 pp.

Bacastow, R.  B.,  and  C.  D. Kealing.   1977.   Models to predict  future
     atmospheric  C02  concentrations.   In:    Workshop  on the  Global
     Effects  of Carbon  Dioxide  from  Fossil  Fuels.   Miami  Beach,
     Florida.

Bjakstrom,  A.  1979.  A model of  C02 interactions between atmosphere,
     oceans,  and land biota,   pp.  403-451.  In:  The Global  Carbon
     Cycle—Scope 13, B. Bolin, E. T.  Degens, S.  Kempe,  and P.  Ketner,
     eds.  John Wiley and Sons, New York.

Botkin, D.  B., J. F. Janak, and J. R.  Wallace.  1972.  Some ecological
     consequences  of  a computer  model of  forest growth.   J.  Ecol.
     60:849-872.

Canale,  R.  P.   1970.   An  analysis of  models  describing  predator-prey
     interactions.  Biotechnol.  Bioeng.  12:353.

Chen,  C.  W.,  and G. T.  Orlob.   1975.   Ecologic  simulation for  aquatic
     environments,  pp. 475-588.  In:  Systems Analysis and Simulation
     in Ecology, B.  C.  Patten, ed.  Academic Press, New York.

Craig,  R.   B. , D.  L.  DeAngelis,  and  K.  R.  Dixon.  1979.  Long- and
     short-term  dynamic optimization  models  with application  to  the
     feeding strategy of the loggerhead strike.  Am. Nat.  113:31-51.

DeAngelis,  D.  L.,  R. A. Goldstein, and R. V.  O'Neill.  1975.  A model
     for trophic interaction.  Ecology 56:881-892.

Dixon,  K.   R. ,  R.  J.  Luxmore,  and C.  L. Begovick.   1978.   Ceres--A
     model  of  forest  stand biomass dynamics  for  predicting  trace
     contaminant,  nutrient,  and water effects.   I. Model description.
     II. Model Application.  Ecol. Model.  5:17-38, 93-114.

Doyle,  T.  W. , H.  H.  Shugart,  and  D.  C.  West.  1981.   A forest
     succession  of the  lower  montanes  rain  forest  in  Puerto Rico.
     ORNL/TM-7709.  Oak   Ridge   National  Laboratory,  Oak  Ridge,
     Tennessee.

Eggers,  D.  M.   1975.   A Synthesis of  the Feeding Behavior and Growth
     of  Juvenile Sockeye Salmon  in  the Limnetic Environment.   Ph.D.
     Dissertation.  University of Washington.

-------
                                 43
Emanuel, W.  R.,  and J.  R.  Mulholland.   1975.   Energy based dynamic
     model   for  Lago  Pond,  Georgia.   IEEE  Trans.   Auto.  Control
     AC-20:98-101.
Emanuel, W.  R. ,  and J.  S.  Olson, and G.
     expanded use  of  fossil  fuels by the
     dioxide problem.   J. Environ. Manage.
                         G. Killough.
                         U.S.  and  the
                         10:37-49.
 1980a.   The
global carbon
Emanuel,   W.  R. ,
     Calibration
     pp.  642-649.
     Cybernetics
     Electronics,
G.  G.  KiHough,  and H.  H.  Shugart,  Jr.   1980b.
and testing  of models of  the  global carbon cycle.
  In:  Proceedings of the International  Conference  on
and  Society.   The  Institute   of   Electrical  and
Inc., New York.
Fagerstrom, T. ,  and  B.  Asell.  1973.
     an  aquatic  food chain:   A model
     planning. Ambio 2:164-171.
                     Methyl  mercury accumulation in
                     and  implications for research
Falco,  J.  W. ,  and  L.  A.  Mulkey.   1976.   Modeling  the effect  of
     pesticide   loading   on  riverine  ecosystems.    pp.  156-160.
     Proceedings Conference on  Environmental  Modeling and Simulation.
     ORD, DPM, USEPA, Washington, D.C.  EPA-600/9-76-016.

Finn,  J.  T.   1976.   Measures of  ecosystem structure  and function
     derived from analysis of flows.   J.  Theor.  Biol.  56:363-380.

Gowdy,  C. M.,  R.  J.  Mulholland, and  W.  R.  Emanuel.  1975.  Modeling
     the global carbon cycle.   Int. J. Sys.  Sci. 6:965-976.

Gutierrez,  L.  T. , and  W.  R. Fey.   1975.   Simulation  of secondary
     autogenic  succession  in  the  shortgrass  prairie  ecosystem.
     Simulation Councils, Inc.

Hacker, C.  S.   1978.   Autoregressive  and transfer  function  models of
     mosquito populations.  In:   Time Series and Ecological Processes,
     H. H. Shugart, ed.   SIAM Publications,  Philadelphia.
Hannon,  B.   1973,
     41:535-546.
  The  structure of  ecosystems.    J.  Theor.  Biol.
Harrison, H.  L.,  0.  L.  Loucks, J. W. Mitchell,  D.  T.  Parkhurst,  C.  R
     Tracy, D.  G. Watts,  and V.  J.  Yannacone, Jr.   1970.   Systems
     studies of DDT transport.  Science 170:503-508.

Hassell, M. P., and H. N. Comins.  1976.   Discrete time models for two
     species competition.  Theor. Pop. Biol. 9:202-221.

Hett, J. M., and  R. V. O'Neill.  1974.  Systems analysis of the Aleut
     ecosystems. Arct. Anthropol.  11(1):31-40.

-------
Hoffman, F. 0.,  C.  W.  Miller, D.  L.  Shaeffer,  and C. T. Garten, Jr.
     1977.   Computer  codes   for  the  assessment  of  radionuclides
     released to the environment.  Nucl. Saf. 18(3):343-354.

Hsu, S. B.  , S.  Hubbell,  and  P. Waltman.  1977. A mathematical  theory
     of  single  nutrient  competition  in  continuous  cultures  of
     microorganisms.  SIAM J.  of Appl. Math.  32:366-383.

Innis,  G.  S.   1972.   Simulation Models  of Grasslands  and Grazing
     Lands.   Preprint No.  41,  Grassland  Biome,  Natural  Resource
     Ecology  Laboratory,   Colorado  State University, Fort  Collins,
     Colorado.

Kercher, J.  R. , and  H.  H. Shugart,  Jr.  1975.  Trophic structure,
     effective trophic position,  and connectivity in food  webs.  Am.
     Nat. 109(966):191-206.

Killough,  G.   G.,   and L.  R.  McKay.   1976.   A  methodology  for
     calculating radiation doses from  radioactivity released to the
     environment.  ORNL 4992.

Killough,  G.  G.  1980.  A  dynamic model  for  estimating radiation dose
     to the world  population  from release  of  14C  to  the atmosphere.
     Health Phys. 38:296-300.

Kimura,  M.,  and T.  Ohta.   1971.  Theoretical  aspects of population
     genetics.   Monographs   in  Population  Biology   4,  Princeton
     University Press, Princeton, New Jersey.

Lane,  P.  A. ,  and   R.  Levins.   1977.   The dynamics of  aquatic
     ecosystems,  2. The  effects  of  nutrient  enrichment  on model
     plankton communities.  Limnol. Oceanogr. 22(3):454-471.

Lassiter,  R.  R. , G.  L.  Baughman, and  L. A.  Burns.   1978.   Fate of
     toxic  organic  substances  in  the  aquatic  environment.   pp.
     219-246.  In:   State  of the Art  in Ecological Modelling,  Vol.  7.
     Proceedings of the  Conference  on  Ecological  Modeling,  S.  E.
     Jorgensen,  ed. International  Society  for Ecological  Modelling,
     Copenhagen, Denmark.

Lettenmaier,  D.  P., and J. E.  Richey.   1978.   Ecosystem Modeling:   A
     Structural  Approach.  J.  Environ.  Eng.   Div.,   Proc.   A.S.C.E.
     104:1015-1021.

Levins, S.  A.  1974.  Dispersion and population interaction.  Am. Nat.
     108:207-228.

Levins,  R.  1968.   Evolution  in Changing Environments.  Monographs in
     Populations  Biology   2.   Princeton University Press,  Princeton,
     N.J.  120 pp.

-------
                                 45
Levins,  R.   1979.   Coexistence in a variable  environment.   Am.  Nat.
     114:765-783.

Levins,  R.   1974.   The qualitative  analysis  of  partially specified
     systems.  Ann.  N.Y. Acad.  Sci. 231:123-138.

Mielke,  D.  L.,  H.  H. Shugart, Jr.,  and D. C. West.   1978.   A stand
     model  for  upland  forests  of  Southern   Arkansas.   Oak  Ridge
     National Laboratory.    ORNL/TM-6225.

Mitchell, K.  J.  1975.  Dynamics and Simulated Yield  of Douglas-fir.
     Forest Sci. Monograph 17:1-39.

Mogenson, B.,  and  S. E.  Jorgensen.   1979.   Modelling the distribution
     of  chromium  in the  Danish Firth.   In:   First  International
     Conference  on  the  State  of  the Art  in Ecological Modelling,   S.
     E. Jorgensen,  ed.   Copenhagen, Denmark.

O'Neill,  R.  V.   1976.   Ecosystem  persistence  and  heterotrophic
     regulation. Ecology 57:1244-1253.

O'Neill, R.  V.,  R.  A. Goldstein,  H. H.  Shugart, Jr., and J.  B. Mankin.
     1972. Terrestrial ecosystem energy model.  EDFB-MR-72-19.  38pp.

Park, R. A.,  L.  S.  Clesceri, C.  I. Connolly, H. F.  Herbrandson,  J.  R.
     Loehe,  S.  Ross, D.  D.  Sharma,  and W.  W.  Shuster.  Documentation
     of  PEST:  A model for  evaluating the  fate of toxic  substances  in
     aquatic  environments.   Unpublished draft.  Available from  R.  A.
     Park,  Center   for  Ecological  Modeling,   Rensselaer Polytechnic
     Institute, Troy, New York.

Park, R.  A.,  R. V.  O'Neill, J.  A.  Bloomfield, H.  H.  Shugart, R.  S.
     Booth,  R.  A.  Goldstein,  J.   B.  Mankin,  J. F.  Koonce, D.  Scavia,
     M. S.  Adams,  L. S.  Clesceri,  E.   M.   Coloni, E.  H.  Dettman, J.
     Hoopes, D.  D.  Huff, S.  Katz, J. F. Kitchell,  R. C.  Kohberger,  E.
     J.  La  Row,  D.  C.  McNaught, J.  Peterson,  J.  Titus,  P. R.  Weiler,
     J.  W.  Wilkinson, and C. S.  Zahorcak.   1974.   A generalized  model
     for simulating lake ecosystems.  Simulation 22:33-50.

Pennycuick,  C.   J.  ,  R.  M.  Compton,  and   L.  Beckingham.  1968.  A
     computer model  for  simulating the growth of a population or two
     interacting populations.  J.  Theor. Biol.  18:316-329.

Rescigno, A., and I. W.  Richardson.  1957.  The struggle for life.   I.
     Two species.  Bull. Math.  Biophys.   29:377-388.

Scavia, D.,  B. J. Eadie, and A. Robertson.  1976.   An ecological model
     for  the  Great  Lakes,   pp.  629-633.    In:  Proc.  Conf.  Environ.
     Modeling and Simulations,  U.S. EPA.  EPA 600/9-76-016.

-------
                                 46
Shaeffer,  D.   L.,  C.  W.  Miller,  and  C.   T.  Garter,  Jr.   1978.
     Proceedings of  a  Workshop on the Evaluation  of  Models Used for
     the   Environmental   Assessment   of   Radionuclide  Releases,
     CONF-770901.   Oak  Ridge   National   Laboratory,   Oak   Ridge,
     Tennessee.  131  pp.

Shugart, H. H. ,  and  I. R.  Noble.  1980 (in press).  A computer model
     of  succession and fire  response of the high  altitude  eucalyptus
     forests of  the  Brindabella Range, Australian  Capital  Territory,
     Australia.  J.  Ecol.

Shugart, H. H.,  and  D.  C.  West.  1976.  Development of  an Appalachian
     deciduous  forest  succession  model  and   its application   to
     assessment  of  the  impact  of the chestnut  blight.  J.  Environ.
     Manage.  5:161-179.

Shugart, H.  H., and D.  C.  West.   1980.   Forest succession models.
     Bioscience 30:308-313.

Shugart, H.  H.,  M.   S. Hopkins,  I.  P.  Burgess,  and A.  T.  Mortlock.
     1980  (in press).   The  development of  a  succession model  for
     subtropical rain  forest and its application to assess  the effects
     of  timber harvest  at Wiangaree State Forest, New South  Wales.
     J. Environ.  Manage.

Smith, J.  H. ,  W.  R.  Mabey,  N.  Bohonos,  B. R.  Holt, S.  S.  Lee, T. W.
     Chou,  D.  C.  Bomberger,  and  T.  Mill.   1977.   Environmental
     pathways  of selected chemicals  in freshwater systems,  Part I.
     EPA 600/7-77-113.

Steele,  J.  H. ,  and  B. W.  Frost.   1977.   The  structure of  plankton
     communities.    Philos.   Trans.   R.   Soc.   London,  Ser.   B.
     280:485-534.

Tetra  Tech,  Inc.   1979.  Methodology for evaluation of  multiple  power
     plant  cooling  system effects.   VOL.  I-IV.   EPRI Report  No.
     EA-IIII.   Electric   Power  Research   Institute,   Palo  Alto,
     California.

Tharp, M.  L.   1978.   Modeling major perturbations  on a forest.   M.S.
     Thesis.  Univeristy of Tennessee,  Knoxville, Tennessee.  52pp.

Travis,  C.  C., W. M.  Post,  and D.  L.  DeAngelis.   1980 (in press).
     Analysis  of  compensatory  Leslie matrix  models  for  competing
     species.  Theor. Pop.  Biol.

Waide, J. B.,  and J.  R.  Webster.  1976.  Engineering systems analysis;
     applicability to  ecosystems,  pp. 329-371.  In:  Systems Analysis
     and Simulation  in  Ecology,  Vol. 4,  B.C.  Patten,  ed.   Academic
     Press, New York.

-------
                                 47
Walters,  C.  J.   1971.   Systems  ecology:   The  systems approach  and
     mathematical models in ecology,   pp. 276-292.  In:  Fundamentals
     of Ecology,  E.  P. Odum, ed.   W.B.  Saunders,  Philadephia.

Woodwell, G. M.,  P.  P.  Craig, and  H.  A.  Johnson.  1971.  DDT  in  the
     biosphere:  Where does it go?  Science 174:1101-1107.

-------
       METHODS FOR MEASURING
EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS ON TERRESTRIAL
       ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES
      January 15 and 16, 1980
        Glenn W.  Suter, II
             Chairman

  Environmental  Sciences  Division
   Oak Ridge National Laboratory

-------
                                 50


                             PARTICIPANTS

                      G.  W.  Suter, II, Chairman
               WORKING GROUP A - EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS ON
             MICROBIAL PROCESSES IN THE TERRESTRIAL SYSTEM
R.  T.  Belly (Group Leader)         B. P. Spalding
Eastman Kodak Company              Oak Ridge National Laboratory

D.  A.  Klein                        R. F. Strayer
Colorado State University          Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                  WORKING GROUP B - MODEL ECOSYSTEMS
Peter Van Voris (Group Leader)     J. D. Gile
Battelle Columbus Laboratories     U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

R. V. Anderson                     D. R. Jackson
Western Illinois University        Battelle Columbus Laboratories

N. T. Edwards                      D. W. Johnson
Oak Ridge National Laboratory      Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                               OBSERVERS
J. V. Nabholz                      A. S. Hammons
U.S. Environmental Protection      Oak Ridge National  Laboratory
  Agency

-------
                                 51
                               SECTION 5

                   METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF
             CHEMICALS ON TERRESTRIAL ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES
5.1  Introduction

     This  workshop considered  the  availability and  utility of
multispecies laboratory systems to display the responses of ecosystem
level properties to toxic chemicals.  The workshop was divided  into
two working groups.  Working group A discussed soil-microbe laboratory
systems  and  microbial  processes.   Working  group B discussed model
ecosystems (i.e.,  systems that contain multiple  trophic  levels  and
some diversity  in  physical  structure).   Three tasks were assigned to
each working group:

     1.   Identify laboratory microbial systems  or model ecosys-
          tems  that display community  and ecosystem  level
          properties and  organize them into categories.  These
          categories should  be  sufficiently distinct to permit
          generalization  about their potential  utility  in
          toxicity testing.

     2.   Evaluate the  test systems  in terms of the following
          criteria:

               Replicability

               Standardization  (potential  for  interlaboratory
               transfer)

               Sensitivity

               Generality (to what range  of ecosystems can the
               results  be applied?)

               Equivocality of results

               Statistical bases for interpreting results

               Standards for rejecting results

               Frequency of failure

               Level  of training and expertise required

               Time required

-------
                                 52


               Cost per chemical

               Appropriate positive  controls

               Other

     3.    Consider  how  these systems  could be developed  and
          applied to toxicity testing.   For example,

               What test  systems  are  sufficiently developed to
               serve as test protocols?

               What test  systems require  further  development?

               What types of development are needed:  Development
               of  techniques,   interlaboratory round  robins
               (validation), field verification,  etc.?

               What types  of modeling or  analysis  would be
               necessary  to relate  test  results  to the  real
               world,  to generalize the  results  to a variety of
               environments or to relate the parameters measured
               to socially significant parameters?

               What simpler tests could  be confirmed by  the
               results of  this  multispecies test?   What more
               complex test  might confirm  the results of  this
               multispecies test?


     The following sections present  the results and discussions of the
     working qroups.   Although these  sections are based primarily on
  The  following  sections present  the  results  and  discussions  of  th
 working groups.  Although these  sections  are based primarily on
tten  material  produced during the workshop by participants,  they
» been  exnanded on the hasis nf notes and rernrdinas from  the
two
written
have been  expanded on  the  basis of notes and  recordings  from the
discussions.
5.2  Results and Discussion

5.2.1  Microbial Processes

     Working  group  A  reviewed laboratory  testing  and evaluation
procedures for assessing effects of chemicals on terrestrial microbial
processes.  Basic  microbial  processes such  as  carbon,  nitrogen,  and
sulfur transformations  are common  to  the  nutrient  cycles of all
ecosystems.   Disruption  or promotion of  these processes  may have
ecologically and socially significant impacts.

     These  discussions  emphasized development  of a  balance between
proposing  test  methods that are practical to perform and ecologically
meaningful.  The  degree  of environmental  testing required  to assess
the hazard of any chemical depends on  its  production,  distribution,

-------
                                 53


use,  disposal,  and fate in  the  environment.   Because of the  large
number  of chemicals  produced and the requirement  of the Toxic
Substances Control  Act (TSCA) for cost effective  testing,  a tiered
system  involving different  levels of testing complexity  may be
required.  Likewise,  it  is difficult to develop one  test method to
accommodate  the  wide  range  of physical  and chemical properties of
chemicals that need to be  tested in the terrestrial environment.  For
example,  insoluble  compounds may  require  a different  set  of test
conditions than  their water soluble counterparts.   In  addition, the
binding behavior  of chemicals in soil may  play an important  role in
determining  observed  toxic effects. Effects may not be  observed  until
the binding  capacity of  a soil   is exceeded or the bound  chemical is
released  into  solution by exchange processes.  An  understanding of
various physical  and chemical properties of a chemical, as well as its
binding properties,  is crucial  to determining possible toxic effects
in the environment.

      (1)  Identification and  evaluation of test systems.  The  general
criteria  discussed  in Section 5.1 were used to evaluate  the methods
currently proposed  by the  EPA  for measuring  effects on cellulose
decomposition and nitrogen and sulfur transformations under TSCA (U.S.
EPA 1979).   Other existing test  systems were also evaluated  and an
alternate test was proposed by workshop participants.   These tests are
discussed in the following sections.

      (a)  Cellulose decomposition.  The cellulose  decomposition test
proposed  by  the  EPA employs the measurement of C02 formation from an
axenic culture of Trichoderma longibrachiatum growing on  cellulose as
a  test  substrate  to determine  effects  on  microbial   carbon
mineralization.    Because  this test uses a  pure  culture and a well
defined substrate under  controlled laboratory  conditions, there are
apparent  advantages  in the potential  reproducibility of  this  method
from  laboratory to laboratory.  In addition, such techniques have been
well  studied.

     Some disadvantages of the proposed cellulose decomposition test
are:

     1.   With an insoluble  powdered  substrate,  degradation of
          the substrate  may  be  limited by surface  area and
          mixing.

     2.   The  appropriateness  of  cellulose   as  a  model
          carbonaceous substrate is  quite  dubious.   Although
          cellulose is a  major component of both  plant litter and
          soil  organic matter, it  normally occurs  in a "masked"
          form as an  intimate physical and chemical  association
          with lignin.

          This  lignocellulose complex is much  less  susceptible to
          microbial  metabolism than  purified  cellulose itself.

-------
                                54
     3.    Trichoderma may  or may  not be the  major organism
          performing cellulose degradation in soil.

     4.    Although a single  organism  test may be very sensitive
          to specific chemicals,  its  sensitivity  or responses
          would probably  not be representative  of  the general
          microbial community.

     (b)   Nitrogen transformation.   The  EPA proposed  method  for
testing the effects of new chemicals on nitrogen transformation in the
soil  measures   the production  of  ammonia  from  the microbial
decomposition of  urea.  The  advantages of this test  are that natural,
multispecies soil  communities are  used,  instead of pure cultures, as
recommended  in  the cellulose  decomposition  and sulfate  reduction
tests.  However,  we believe  that  urea is not  an  ideal  choice of
organic N  substrate.  Extracellular soil urease  activity can be quite
high and can persist  in soils in which microbial  activity has been
eliminated.  Thus, ammonification of urea can continue after ureolytic
microorganisms  have  been  inhibited by a toxic  substance.   In other
words, the  production of  ammonia from urea  is  not  a growth-related
process and, thus,  may  be unaffected by a toxic chemical.  A  second
criticism is that an enrichment for ureolytic microorganisms may occur
with time  and  these microorganisms may differ  in their tolerance to
the test substances when compared to the indigenous microflora in soil
not amended with urea.

     Furthermore,  ammonia  may be  oxidized  to  nitrite  or nitrate,
making interpretation of  results,  based solely on the measurement of
ammonia, impossible.

     (c)   Sulfur  transformation.   The  method proposed by the EPA for
determining  possible  effects on microorganisms  in  the sulfur cycle
involves a semi-quantitative measure  of  H2S production  by a pure
culture of Desulfovibrio  desulfuricans  in the presence and absence  of
a  test  substance.  Sulfate  reduction is a  major process  only  in
anaerobic  zones of flooded soils and sediments.   In most soil systems,
sulfate  reduction has  only  minimal  effects  on  plant productivity
(Brock 1966; Russel and Russel 1950).

     The  proposed  method  for  measuring  sulfate  reduction  is
non-quantitative   and   is   based   on  a  single   enzymatic
oxidation-reduction activity in a single microorganism.  This method
largely  ignores the complex interactions  and diversity that can occur
in  natural  microbial populations.   It is  doubtful  that the results  of
this  technique can  possibly be extrapolated  to the  environment.
Furthermore, some  microorganisms can convert organic sulfur to  sulfate
directly without  the intermediate  production of H2S (Alexander 1961).

     Although  more expensive and  time consuming,  a more  accurate
approach would be to use  35S to determine possible effects  on the
major  steps of  the S  cycle.   Such  radioisotope methods  have  been

-------
                                 55
applied to both  the soil  and sediment system  (for review see Brock
1966).

     (d)  Other  existing test systems.   Many experimental techniques
are used to measure specific or general  microbial  activities  in  soils
and sediments.   A  summary of the  advantages  and disadvantages  of many
of these methods is provided in Table 5.1.   A  numerical  forced-choice
rating system  (0 to 4) was employed to estimate various  attributes  of
each test.   At present  there  appear to be no protocols available for
testing effects  on microbial  processes.  In estimating the utility of
each  potential  test,  generality,  nearness  to validation,  and
simplicity were  emphasized.   Less emphasis was placed on sensitivity
because this  property is generally unknown  for any broad range of
chemicals.   Similarly,  suitable  positive controls  are  generally
lacking for all  tests; their development will  be the  best approach  to
estimating the sensitivity of a test.

     Test systems  that  directly  or  indirectly measure  carbon and
nitrogen mineralization  were  carefully  evaluated  because of  their
importance in  most ecosystems.  Direct carbon  cycle tests include the
evolution of  C02 from soil  with and without amendment of substrates.
Direct  nitrogen  mineralization  tests include the production of
inorganic  nitrogen  from  indigenous  organic  matter   or amended
nitrogeneous  substrate.   Most of  the  direct tests have been shown to
be valid measures   of ecosystem microbial  processes.   Rates of  C02
evolution and nitrogen  mineralization in  laboratory  tests  are well
correlated with  field processes  (e.g.,  Bunnel et  al.  1977; Stanford
and Smith 1972). We believe  that responses  to toxic  chemicals could
also be validated.

     Oxygen uptake  methods using  Warburg techniques are  commonly used
to measure microbial activity in soil  (for description of methodology,
see Parkinson  et al.  1971).  As pointed  out  by Stotzky (1965), carbon
dioxide evolution  is more appropriate than oxygen  uptake as a  measure
of microbial  respiration  in  soil.  Among  the  limitations of  oxygen
uptake methods are:   (1)  gases  other than C02  may be evolved as a
result of microbial activity  and may interfere with  the manometric
measurement;  (2) for oxygen  uptake to be  an accurate reflection of
soil   respiratory activity,  the soil environment must be completely
aerobic; (3)  under anaerobic conditions,  carbon dioxide is evolved
without oxgyen uptake, and  non-biological  factors may interfere; and
(4) chemicals  acting as  uncouplers of oxidative phosphorylation may
produce erroneous results.

     Problems   also  occur when  C02 evolution measurements are  used as
indicators  of  microbial activity.   These include the  non-biological
production  of  C02 through chemical decarboxylation, cell-free  enzymes,
or from free  carbonates  in  soil.   Phototrophic C02 fixation  can be
minimized by  incubating samples  in the dark,  although in some soils
chemoautotrophic C02 fixation may pose a problem.

-------
                                                       56
                     TABLE 5.1.  EVALUATION OF MAJOR TEST SYSTEMS FOR EVALUATING EFFECTS OF MICROBIAL PROCESSES3
Assay test
I. Aerobic & General
1. 02 consumption
2. Dehydrogenase assay
3. Glucose l*C mineralization
4. Enzymatic activities
a. Protease
b. Cellulose
c. Amylase
d. Phosphatase
e. Arylsulfatase
5. Soil /substrate
Additive - C02
a. Glucose
b. Cellulose
c. Starch
d. Protein
e. Plant material
f. Soil humic material
6. Heat evolution
7. Microbial biomass
a. Counts
b. Chlorophyll
c. ATP
8. Nitrification
9. Anmonification
a. Urea
b. Protein
c. Plant material
10. Nitrogen fixation
II. Anaerobic
1. Sulfate reduction with
Desulfovibrio
2. Gas-generation (CH4)
Biogeochemical cycle
CHO N P S
X
X
X

X X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
XX X
XX X
XX X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
Comments
Too complex and difficult to measure
Possible toxicity, interpretation problems
Cost and apparent operator qualifications

Possible lack of sensitivity
Possible difficulty in establishing
Unknown validity
Unknown validity
Unknown validity

Unknown validity/enrichment
Unknown validity/enrichment
Unknown validity/enrichment
Unknown validity/enrichment
Probable validity
Poor sources commercially
Too complex/costly

No meaning
Surface soils only (no generality)
Cost and apparent operator qualifications
Too sensitive/secondary microbial process

Poor generality/validity
More validity
Most validity
Good validity

Minor biogeochemical importance
Cumbersome and space consuming
"Higher numbers indicate generally desirable attributes and lower numbers  indicate disadvantageous attributes.
 High values for time,  operator skill,  and cost were taken to be advantageous  (i.e., short-time, low skill or low cost).

-------
                                                  57
                                               TABLE 5.1  (continued)
Assay test Repllcability
Standard-
ization
Sensitivity
Generality
Equivo-
cality
Statistical
I. Aerobic & General
1.
2.
3.
4.





5.







6.
7.



8.
9.



10.
02 consumption
Oehydrogenase assay
Glucose 14C mineralization
Enzymatic activities
a. Protease
b. Cellulose
c. Amulase
d. Phosphatase
3. Arylsulfatase
Soil /substrate
Additive - C02
a. Glucose
b. Cellulose
c. Starch
d. Protein
e. Plant material
f. Soil humic material
Heat evolution
Mlcrobial biomass
a. Counts
b. Chlorophyll
c. ATP
Nitrification
Ammonifi cation
a. Urea
b. Protein
c. Plant material
Nitrogen fixation
2
2
4

1
1
1
1
1


2
2
2
2
2
2
1

1
2
2
3

3
3
2
4
1
3
3

2
2
2
2
2


3
3
3
3
2
2
1

1
2
1
2

3
3
2
3
3
0
3

0
0
0
0
0


2
2
2
2
1
1
0

1
0
0
4

2
2
2
3
3
2
3

1
1
1
1
1


3
3
3
3
3
2
3

1
0
2
1

1
2
3
2
2
1
3

2
2
2
2
2


2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1
1
1
2

2
2
2
2
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0


0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
II. Anaerobic
1.   Sulfate reduction with
    Desulfovibrio
2.   Gas-generation  (CH4)

-------
    58
TABLE 5.1  (continued)
Assay test
I. Aerobic & General
1. O2 consumption
2. Dehydrogenase assay
3. Glucose 14C mineralization
4. Enzymatic activities
a. Protease
b. Cellulose
c. Amylase
d. Phosphatase
e. Arylsulfatase
5. Soil /substrate
additive - C02
a. Glucose
b. Cellulose
c. Starch
d. Protein
e. Plant material
f. Soil humic material
6. Heat evolution
7. Microbial biomass
a. Counts
b. Chlorophyll
c. ATP
8. Nitrification
9. Ammonifi cation
a. Urea
b. Protein
c. Plant material
10. Nitrogen fixation
II. Anaerobic
1. Sulfate reduction with
2. Gas-generation (CH.)
Rejection
standards
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

0

0
0
Failure
frequency
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
Training
expertise
requirement
2
2
1

2
2
2
2
2

3
3
3
3
3
3
1

2
2
1
3

3
3
3
2

2
2
Time
requirement
3
2
3

2
2
2
3
3

3
3
3
3
2
2
2

1
3
2
1

2
2
2
2

1
1
Cost per
test
2
3
1

2
2
2
2
2

3
3
3
3
3
3
1

1
3
1
2

2
2
2
2

2
2
Positive
controls
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0

-------
                                59
     Indirect tests include various enzymatic assays, ATP assays, heat
production, and  estimations of microbial populations.   Most  of the
indirect tests have not yet been shown to be generally valid measures
of microbial processes  or  generalizable  to different ecosystems.  As
pointed out by Parkinson et al.  (1971), the use of  the  dehydrogenase
assay  has  not been  considered a  useful  quantitative method  for
assessing metabolic activity  of  microorganisms in soil  because it is
reputed to  have  less  than  5% of  the  efficiency of oxygen uptake
measurements.  However,  some workers  have provided data that indicate
this method  can  provide rough  comparative estimates  of microbial
activity.   Other tests  based  on  enzymatic activity  (e.g., protease,
cellulase,  amylase  phosphatase,  and arylsulfatase  - see Table 5.1)
have limitations  because  many extracellular enzymes can persist in
soil in which  microbial  activity is inhibited;  these tests  are not
based on growth  related processes.   Because of these limitations, we
concluded that such tests  would  have dubious  value  as indicators of
effects of chemicals in the natural environment.

     Tests  that  include radioisotopic methods (e.g., glucose 14C
mineralization) are considered to have  limited use because of cost and
training requirements  associated with use of a radioactive substrate.
Likewise,  the  usefulness of  tests  based  on heat evolution is limited
because  they  are  time-consuming  and  difficult  to  perform.
Measurements based on  microbial  biomass (counts,  chlorophyll,  ATP) are
difficult to perform and interpret.

     To summarize  discussions on  currently available methods,  it
appears that the measurement  of  C02 evolution is the most practical
and  meaningful  test  for  measuring  the  effects  of chemicals on
microorganisms involved in  the carbon cycle.

     (e)  Proposed alternate tests.   Group A proposed a test system to
measure  the  effects   of  chemicals  on   carbon   and nitrogen
mineralizations simultaneously using environmentally relevant,  high
nitrogen substrates  and mixed  microbe  populations  that can be
manipulated easily  by technicians with minimal  training.   The test
uses a  soil  system and can  be modified  for  aerobic or  anaerobic
testing.

     The basic test design  involves  the  use of either a  standardized
protein (Pharmamedia or a similar product) or ground alfalfa meal as a
substrate  amendment and measurement of the following  parameters at
appropriate time  intervals  under  aerobic  or  anaerobic  conditions:

               Assay                   Aerobic       Anaerobic

            C02 evolution                  *              *
            NH4                           *              *
            N02 and N03                   *

-------
                                60
     For this set  of  assays the following matrix of treatments would
be used:

                              Substrate
               Test chemical
                               a     b

                               c     d
     The characteristics of the proposed substrates are summarized in
Table 5.2.   Flasks or  small  specimen bottles,  up to 500-800  mL
capacity, were suggested for use in the assay.   Approximately 30 to 40
g of wet soil could be used in each test flask.   The soil  should be at
approximately 60 to 70% of water holding capacity  in a layer not more
than 10  mm  in  depth  to assure that  oxygen  diffusion  will not be
limited  in the  nominally aerobic system.  The jar  should be set up to
contain  a  small vial  of alkali that can be exchanged at desired assay
times if the same  jar will be used for sequential  assays.  Sequential
sampling of  soil  from the same flask  should be avoided because it
interferes with C02 measurement.

     For anaerobic systems, the  30 to 40 g  of  soil  per test sample
could be placed in appropriate  screw-cap top 30 x 70-mm test tubes
with sufficient water to  water-log the samples and assure that the
systems  will become  anaerobic through  normal  oxygen depletion
processes.    In  addition,  the  soil-water mixture could be purged with
nitrogen to  remove most of the dissolved oxygen.

-------
                                 61
          TABLE 5.2.  CHARACTERISTICS OF PROPOSED SUBSTRATES
                         Standardized Protein
          Advantages
             Disadvantages
Can be purchased to standard
specifications - easily
reproducible.

Easily soluble, and no
subsequent direct mixing
problems.
Within limits, N and S levels
can be specified.
Responses are due to a limited
part of the microbial population.
Microbial responses may be too
rapid to allow usefulness in
detecting differences due to the
test chemicals.
                                Alfalfa
          Advantages

Plant materials are represented
in an environmentally relevant
form.

C, N, and S cycling can be
monitored.
             Disadvantages
Insolubility may lead to inhomo-
geneous dispersion.
Grinding and mixing may influence
rates of activity and make inter-
pretation difficult.

Reproducibility of materials from
different sources may be difficult
to assure.
     Any  soil   falling  in  the  range  of  properties  listed  in
Section A-3.5 (d)(i) (U.S. EPA, 1979 p.  162F) would be appropriate for
the proposed  microbial  functions test.   The soil  should be either
moistened or  dried to  60 to  70%  of the  water holding capacity.
Increments of the  test substance should be added to  the  soil as water
solutions and mixed thoroughly with the soil  to yield the desired soil
concentrations.   If the  test substance  does  not have  adequate water
solubility,  it can be dissolved in an appropriate organic solvent that
can then  be added  to the soil.   Residual  solvent would be evaporated.
When this approach is  used,  all controls should  be  treated with
equivalent volumes of the solvent alone.   Soil water content should be
checked  after  solvent  evaporation  and  readjusted  if necessary.
Another strategy that  can be used is to  add the test chemical  plus

-------
                                 62
solvent to  perhaps 10 to  25%  of the test soil  and,  after solvent
evaporation, to mix this treated soil with a larger volume of regular
soil, using appropriate solvent controls.

     As a screen,  a single C02  assay can be performed at perhaps day 3
or 4  for the substrate-amended system, and days  7 to  11 for the plain
soil  systems.   This  will  require  a total  of  24 flasks  per  test
chemical (Table 5.3).  For kinetic  studies a schedule similar to that
shown in Table  5.4 that  allows the C02 assays  to  be completed with
incubation in 12 days (2  work weeks) could be used.   With this type of
schedule, a series of  sequential  tests could be conducted biweekly.
Per assay day,  12  or 24 assays would have to be  completed.  Inorganic
N or  other  mineral  nutrient  determinations would be made on two soil
samples at  day 0  and  on all test  soil after  the  last C02 assay.
Additional  replicates would be required if a positive control  is used.
           TABLE 5.3.  NUMBER OF C02 MEASUREMENTS PER TEST
                                                      Assay
                                            Sequential
                                       Unamended    Amended
Single
Assay times
Replications
Substrate amendment
Test substrate concentrations

3
2
1
6
36
6
2
1
6
72
1
2
2
6
24

     TABLE 5.4.  SCHEDULE FOR SEQUENTIAL SAMPLING:  AEROBIC SYSTEM



Day
Substrate
amended

M
0
Setup


T
1
X


W
2
X


T
3
X


F
4
X

Time
S S M
567
X


T W T F
8 9 10 11
X

Substrate   Setup
not amended
     Alternate tests  proposed  by Working Group A employ natural soil
microflora, composed  of many species, and  substrate  amendments that

-------
                                63
range from  those  that are easily decomposed  (protein)  to  those  that
are more  persistent  (plant materials  and  soil  organic matter).   Major
ecosystem processes  that  are monitored include carbon, nitrogen, and
possibly  sulfur  mineralization and  nitrification.   Tests that  are
simpler than  our  test system include pure  and mixed culture  systems
with similar  or probably  less complex substrates.  Our  proposed  tests
should confirm most negative results from simpler tests.

     If a test chemical has no effect on C02 production from a variety
of substrates by a pure culture, the same result will nearly always be
obtained  in  a complex soil system.  However,  simpler systems  may give
positive  results  that are not confirmed by the proposed test system.
In  the  simpler,  pure  culture  systems,  absorption  and/or other
physico-chemical   fates  of the  test substances are minimal.  However,
in a more complex soil system, absorption  of the test substance on
organic matter or inorganic  soil components may effectively lower the
concentration of  potential  toxicants  to  levels  that are  no  longer
inhibitory.   Futhermore,  in  multispecies  systems,  succession  or
adaptation to the potential  toxicant may occur,  resulting in little
noticeable changes in the levels  of C or N mineralization.  However,
it is possible that a microbial culture would partially degrade a test
substance  into a  more toxic form.   Because this  is  more  likely to
occur in  a  mixed  culture, this system  could  be  more sensitive than
single species cultures in a few cases.

     Tests that involve  use  of a ground plant material and soil  with
its  natural  microbial   community,   sacrifice some  potential
reproducibility for  clearer  validity  in extrapolating test results to
actual  microbial  processes.   The use of  positive controls in such
tests would facilitate comparisons between different laboratories that
use different soils or plant material.

     (2)   Protocol development.   Development   can  be  considered in
terms of  standardization  and validation.   Considerable work has been
done on   the  laboratory  measurement  of  microbial  processes  for
agronomic  and ecological  investigations and  to a lesser  extent  for
studies  of pesticides  and  other  toxic substances.   Despite  this
considerable  experience,  none of these  systems have been standardized
and shown  to  give comparable results among laboratories when used to
test the  effects  of  chemical substances.   Such standardization  must
occur before  any  protocol  is adopted.  Validation studies are needed
for all  of the proposed  tests.   Various  definitions of validation
should be considered  in  development  of these research strategies.

     As noted in  previous discussions and in  Table  5.1,  the  use of
protein or ground alfalfa decomposition in  a  soil environment appears
to be well  suited for use in evaluating the possible effects of test
materials on  terrestrial  microbial  processes.  This  is based on the
ability to measure both carbon and nitrogen mineralization in the same
system and to evaluate the release of carbon and nitrogen from natural
substrates  (protein  and alfalfa) and from  the native soil organic

-------
                                 64


matter, processes  that  involve the functioning of  varied  groups of
soil microorganisms.

     In addition to  this  test, as noted  in Table 5.1, several other
assays are  considered  to  be potentially  useful.  These  include  14C
glucose mineralization, nitrification, and C02 evolution from a series
of  general  substrates,  including  glucose and cellulose.   The 14C
glucose mineralization assay,  in  spite of its known sensitivity, will
probably not  be useful because  of its  high  cost,  the  needs for
specialized equipment and radioactivity control requirements,  and the
needs for specialized training and clearances  for technicians.  Carbon
dioxide evolution  from glucose could  be  considered; this  involves  a
soluble substrate, but a major concern with this substrate  is  that  it
would only allow evaluation of carbon processing performed by a narrow
range  of  soil microorganisms.   Cellulose,  as noted earlier,  is a
difficult substrate  because  of its insolubility and difficulties in
mixing it  into  test  systems.   In addition, pure cellulose is not a
common material in soil systems.

     Assuming that the test  systems proposed by Working  Group  A  might
be  considered for  use  in hazard  evaluations, the following factors
will require further development:

    I.   Optimization of soil-substrate and soil-test  substances
         ratios.

    2.   Establishment  of  minimum  amounts  of  C  and  N
         mineralization needed to complete assay.

    3.   Optimization  of  incubation  time  for  control  and
         substrate-amended systems.

    4.   Establishment of experimental variability  and number  of
         replicates  required.

    5.   Use of known toxic agents to evaluate sensitivity of the
         assays.

    6.   Development and testing of a sampling schedule  that will
         be useful under a wide range of  conditions.

    7.   Selection of  a  test incubation  vessel  of  minimum cost
         and  simplifying the procedures  of the test as  much  as
         possible.

    8.   Evaluation  of the  utility of sequential versus single
         assay  analysis  for the  evaluation of C02 evolution,
         ammonification, and nitrification.

    9.   Selection of  the best measurement  procedure for evolved
         C02, ammonium, and combined  nitrite and nitrate.

-------
                                 65
5.2.2  Identification of Model Ecosystems


     (1)  Test descriptions.   Model  ecosystems were divided into two
categories,  those that are synthesized  in  the laboratory and those
that  are  excised  from  natural systems.  A reference and a  brief
description  of each system considered are provided below.  The order
in which they are  listed does  not represent a  ranking.

     (a)  Synthetic systems.

Coleman and Anderson.  A  50-mL Erlenmeyer flask with 20  g of  seived
sterilized  soil   and  a defined  (gnotobiotic)  community  including
species of  bacteria,  protozoa, and nematodes  (Anderson et al. 1978).

H. T. Odum.   A 16-cm  diameter desiccator with  soil,  litter, one
transplanted  bromeliad,   fern,  lichen,  moss,  and  algal clump
(Odum 1970).

Lichtenstein.  A 86-mm diameter,  1-L plastic cylinder  containing
layers of  treated and untreated  soil  and corn  seedlings.   Leachate  is
collected (Lichtenstein et al.  1977).

Lighthart and Bond.   A plastic lined, No. 300 can  or 600-mL beaker
with  150-g  homogenized soil  and  15-g sifted  litter (Lighthart and
Bond 1976).

MeteaIf and Cole.  A 19-L, wide-mouth jar containing vermiculite,  corn
seedlings, earthworms, isopods,  slugs,  saltmarsh caterpillars, and a
vole (Cole et al. 1976).

Nash and Beall.   150-cm-long,  115-cnrhigh,  and 50-cm-wide,  closed
glass box with a  15-cm layer  of  seived  soil  and  crop plants.   Air and
leachate are monitored (Nash et al.  1977).

Rosswall.   A  plastic  pot  with sterilized forest soil  and litter,  a
defined soil biota, and a pine seedling (Rosswall et al.  1978).

TMC.   The terrestrial microcosm chamber consists of a glass box (1 m x
0.75 m x 0.61 m)   with  20  cm of  synthetic  soil, alfalfa, ryegrass,
nematodes,  earthworms,  enchytraeid  worms,  isopods,  mealworms,
crickets,  snails, and a pregnant vole.  Air and leachate  are monitored
(Gile and Gillett 1979).

     (b)  Excised systems.

Grassland Core.    A 15- or 30-cm diameter  intact  soil  core  with
vegetation retained,  encased  in  heat shrunk plastic (Jackson  et al.
1979; Van Voris et al. 1978).

-------
                                 66


Outcrop.   90- x 90-cm  sections  excised from communities that develop
in depressions in granite or sandstone outcrops arranged in 1- x 6.5-m
concrete simulated outcrops (McCormick and Platt 1962).

Soil Core.   A 5-cnrdiameter by 5 to 10-cm-deep, intact  soil core with
vegetation clipped  at  ground  level,  encased in heat  shrunk plastic
(Jackson et al.  1977).

Treecosm.   An approximately 2-m-tall sapling in 45 cm x 45 cm x 25 cm
excised block of  forest  soil,  sealed at the sides and contained in a
plywood box (Jackson et al. 1978).

     (2)  Measurable parameters.  Table  5.5  shows the community and
ecosystem responses that have  been or can be measured in each of these
systems.   Net primary productivity is the only one of these parameters
that has  direct social  relevance.   This parameter may be  slow to
respond, however,  if  it  is mediated by changes in reproduction, soil
fertility,  or other intermediate factors.

     A second category of  parameters  was considered relevant because
of their relation to primary production and because they are likely to
be worth measuring in model ecosystems.  The first of these is loss of
mineral nutrients  (total N, N03-N,  NH3-N, Ca,  P,  K, S) and dissolved
organic carbon.  The  utility  of this parameter as an early indicator
of ecosystem stress was hypothesized by O'Neill et al.  (1977).  It has
been partially  confirmed  by  a  series  of  microcosm experiments
conducted at Oak  Ridge National  Laboratory (ORNL)  (Harris 1980) and
Corvallis Environmental Research Laboratory (CERL) (Gile et al.  1979).
A  number  of  field studies  indicate  that  nutrient dynamics are
sensitive to both  perturbations  and  internal successional processes
(Jackson  and Watson  1977; Likens  et  al.  1970;  Richardson  and
Lund 1975;  Best and Monk 1975; and Vitousek et al. 1979).

     Respiration  is  another  potentially important  and  readily
measurable attribute of  model ecosystems.  The more common methods of
measuring respiration  in terms of C02  output have technical problems.
Static  absorption of  C02  in KOH  solution is  inefficient unless
respiration  rates  are low; static absorption  on  soda lime is  more
efficient but can  cause  drying of the  soil.   Use of a flow-through
system can increase the efficiency of KOH absorption and eliminate the
drying problem  with  soda lime,  but both  absorptive methods can have
low precision because  of errors in titration  or  weighing.  Infrared
gas analysis  is  precise  and efficient,  but  has a high  initial  cost.
The  problems associated with  measuring  ecosystem  respiration  are
discussed in more  detail  in the following references:  Eckardt 1968;
Monteith 1968;  Woodwell  and  Botkin 1970; Odum 1970;  Edwards  and
Soil ins 1973; Minderman  and Vulto 1973;  and Van  Voris et al. 1978.

     The  ratio  of  carbon  to  major  mineral   nutrients  was also
considered  to  be  a  potentially important  indicator  of system
disruption.  Rates of nitrification and  the mineralization of nitrogen

-------
                                     67
      TABLE 5.5.   PARAMETERS MEASURABLE IN TERRESTRIAL MODEL ECOSYSTEMS

Test Systems


0)
r—
O C
O •!-
0)
+ +>
U)
>*- c
i— 01
TO -t->
Parameters and £ "5
Attributes* z 5
Diversity
Succession
Trophic level
interaction
Competition
Net primary
productivity Y Y
Nutrient
retention P P
Respiration Y
C/Nutrient
ratio P P
c
0
i.
0>
•a
c
^c

^
^~
C r—
TO TO
£ X
J=.  O r— U)
TO Z O 0
•z *— u ce.
P P



P Y Y P

Y Y Y Y

P P Y Y
P P P

P P Y P







+•>  -P
a> 3
o

u at

£ 
-------
                                68


and other mineral nutrients are tied to carbon dynamics (Cairns 1963;
Johnson  and  Edwards 1979;  and Johnson and  Edwards 1980).   Thus,
simultaneous measurement of C02  production and mineral nutrients may
supply a more  sensitive  and explanatory indicator of  toxic response
than  either  parameter  alone.   Mineral  nutrients may be measured in
leachate or in soil  subsamples.

     A third  category  of parameters consisted  of  those that could
possibly be  measured in model ecosystems  but were not recommended
because they present technical problems and are not necessary for the
understanding  of  ecosystem response.   ATP and enzyme assays are
technically difficult,  and the results are not easily interpreted.
Community characteristics such as diversity and succession could only
be measured with microbes or micro-invertebrates because of space and
time  limitations.   These groups present severe taxonomic problems and
the analysis  would  be  difficult  and time consuming.   Interactions
between  specific  species,  such as  competition and predation,  are
limited to the same groups of  organisms and present the same problems
unless simple gnotobiotic  systems  such as Coleman  and Anderson's are
used.

5.2.3  Evaluation of Model  Ecosystems

      (1)  Synthetic systems.

Coleman and Anderson.  This system is  rated  good for  replicability,
standardization,  and cost  of  maintenance.   It is  rated low for level
of training  and  frequency of  failure  because of  the  difficulty of
maintaining gnotobiotic  conditions.    Its  ability  to  represent real
ecosystems is  questionable.    It  may have potential  for  assessing
effects on specific microorganismic couplings.

Lichtenstein.  This  system  is  rated  very good for testing effects on
primary  productivity;  it has  good potential  for testing  effects of
nutrient loss  from  soil.   Its rating  is  good for replicability,
standardization,  cost,  and level  of training.

Lighthart.    This  system  is  rated  good  for  replicability,
standardization,  level  of  training,  and cost.  It  is  rated  low for
applicability to testing ecosystem effects.

Metcalf and Cole.   The  utility of this system is limited in terms of
substrate realism and  validity of productivity measurements.   It  is
not well designed for determination of effects on ecosystem processes.
It is rated  good  for replicability,  standardization,  cost, and level
of training required.

Nash.  This  system  is  good for measuring  productivity.   It  has  good
replicability and standardization.   It is rated low in terms of cost
and  size.   It is not applicable  in  its current design for  testing
ecological effects.

-------
                                 69


H. T. Odum.  This  system is rated  moderate  for replicability.  The
level of  training required  is low,  and  it is  low in cost.  Its
applicability to toxicants  is  good.   It has  a  relatively high  failure
rate because of transplantation.

Rosswall.    This  system  is  rated  good  for  replicability  and
standardization.   It  is limited  in  terms  of  small  size  and
productivity.   It  is rated good in  level  of training  required  and
cost.

TMC.  This system is rated good for testing effects on competition and
productivity, and potential  for revealing effects on soil processes.
It  is  limited by cost and  size,  and to some  extent by level of
training  required.    It  is  rated  good  for  replicability  and
standardization.

     In general, artificial  soil substrates may increase replicability
and  standardization  at  the  expense of application to testing effects
on processes in real ecosystems.

     Homogenized soil  systems  are  most  applicable to  agricultural
ecosystems and  less  applicable to  uncultivated ecosystems.  They are
also  more replicable  and more easily  standardized  than intact
microcosms.

     (2)   Excised systems.  Grassland microcosms are considered more
desirable  than  forest systems for testing purposes because  of less
restriction on  size.   However, size may be  most limited by  the  need
for  expensive  environmental  control   systems  and  labor  costs in
excision.   Minimum sizes suggested were 10 to 20 cm in diameter and no
less than 15 cm in depth.

     In  excised  systems,  replicability  and  standardization  are
difficult  problems   that  need  additional  study before  definitive
recommendations can be made.   In general,  replicability should improve
as size increases.

     The measurements of ecosystem processes in these systems can be
standardized, but the test  systems  themselves  are defined  by the
ecosystems from which they are excised.

     (3)  Uncertainties concerning all model  ecosystems.

Size.  Despite  some  work on the effects of  size  on the  responses of
soil cores (Harris 1980), the  effects of system  size on most  system
types and parameters is unknown.

Soil Types.  The physical and  chemical properties of  soils profoundly
affect the fate  and  toxicity of chemicals.  It  is  not clear that a
sufficiently limited number of regionally representative soil types
can be defined.

-------
                                 70
Boundary Effects.  It  is  not  clear whether the boundaries of a model
ecosystem, which contrast with  the continuity of natural ecosystems,
affect the responses observed.

Construction.  The container for the model ecosystem can affect system
response  by  adsorption,  channelization,  and  release  of constituent
chemicals into the soil.

Variance.  The  trade-offs involved  in  reducing variance  by using
larger systems or artificial substrates have not been defined.

Field Verification.   While the utility of model ecosystems for studies
of the  fate  of  chemicals  has  been  field validated,  almost  no  work has
been done to field-verify toxic responses observed in model ecosystems
(Jackson et al.   1979).

Equivocality.   The  relationship  of the parameters measured  in model
ecosystems such as C02  and nutrient output  to socially  relevant
parameters such as primary production is not well defined.

5.2.4  Protocol  Development for Model Ecosystems

     None of  the test systems are sufficiently developed to  serve as
test protocols.  Nevertheless,  the following test systems are worthy
of further development:

Coleman  and Anderson.  These  defined (gnotobiotic) systems  are  more
likely  to have  explainable  results than the  undefined systems.   Level
of training  and rate  of  failure  resulting from gnotobiotic technology
are  impediments to  their use in routine  testing.   These systems may
have the  potential for overcoming  the disadvantages of the homogenized
and excised systems as they are currently conceived.

Intermediate-si zed grassland microcosms.   Homogenized  and  excised
microcosms of this  type  come close  to  meeting many of  the criteria
(size, cost,  level of  training, replicability, etc.) addressed at this
workshop.   However, further  developments are  needed  in  terms  of
round-robin  analysis,  field validation,  and  replicability.   In
addition,  C02  analysis  should  be refined  further.   Large excised
systems  such  as the excised  tree  microcosms and rare systems such as
McCormick's  outcrop  microcosms  may serve as excellent research  tools
for  ecosystem  processes.   However,  the  size  and  expense of these
systems  may  limit their  usefulness for testing chemicals.

     The small  microcosms  (5x5  cm)  offer  advantages in  screening
chemicals on  the basis of the number of units  that  can be  examined per
unit cost.   However, their  inability to sustain primary  production and
the  small volume of soil involved seriously limits the interpretation
of results.

-------
                                71


5.3  Conclusions

5.3.1  Microbial Processes

     Any  test  for  predicting  terrestrial  ecosystem  effects on
microorganisms  should be  as close to the natural system as reasonably
possible.  Certain pure culture systems could be developed that are
more sensitive  to toxic  effects  than  the  whole soil population.
However, these  pure  culture  systems ignore the  complex interactions
occuring in soil  and the  genetic variability and diverse  nature  of
soil microbial  populations.  Therefore, it  is extremely difficult,  if
not impossible to extrapolate the results  of such pure culture systems
to the natural situation.

     Tests using  natural  soils  were considered more meaningful than
tests using soil  suspensions that disturb the soil structure  and sub-
structure.   Furthermore,  soil  slurry systems are very sensitive  to
oxygen  transfer effects.   Therefore,  tests based on  soil slurry
systems may be difficult to standardize.

     The natural  system is not static  but  rather  a  dynamic  system
undergoing constant  change.  With the exception  of nitrification, all
microbial processes  in  the carbon,  nitrogen, and sulfur  cycles  are
performed by  a diverse group  of microorganisms.  Because of this
genetic diversity and the ability of microbial populations to adapt to
the presence of a chemical, effects  may be only temporary.   Therefore,
to mimic the natural  system,  kinetic (sequential) testing,  rather than
static testing, should be  employed.   This is  not to say that  a single
measurement may not  be useful  as an initial screen  for  detecting
possible  inhibitory  effects  to microorganisms.   However,  to
extrapolate the meaning of this single measurement to  the  environment,
kinetic studies are required.   Preferably,  these kinetic studies  would
initially be  performed in the laboratory  and  followed by  field
studies.

     In  addition  to  using natural soil microorganisms  and the  soil
matrix as a test  system,  we concluded that measurement of effects of
general  metabolic  processes  occurring  in  the whole  population  or
community (e.g.,  C02  formation,  02  consumption)  would  be  more
meaningful  than results from  more selective tests based on a single
enzymatic criterion  (e.g., sulfatase, phosphotase, amylase).  Because
many of  these  extracellular  enzymes can function in soil  even after
cell death, the results  of these tests are  difficult  to  interpret.

     Considerable effort  has been directed  at studying the ability  of
microorganisms  to transform chemicals in the  terrestrial environment.
In  contrast,  there are  only a  few  studies  defining  the effects of
chemicals on the microorganisms involved in the  carbon, nitrogen, and
sulfur cycles.  Because of the genetic diversity of microorganisms,
their ability to  detoxify or polymerize certain pollutants,  and the
binding  of  pollutants  to  soil,  it  remains to be determined whether

-------
                                 72
microorganisms in the terrestrial environment are sensitive indicators
of the effects  of  chemicals.   The development of suitable techniques
for evaluating  the  effects  of chemicals on microorganisms and their
use to test compounds such as pesticides and polychlorinated biphenyls
that have well  established  toxicity to other forms of life will  lead
to an answer  to this question by providing a  basis  for comparison.

5.3.2  Model Ecosystems

     No model ecosystem,  synthetic  or excised, is considered ready to
serve as  a test protocol.   Nevertheless, defined systems  such  as
Coleman and Anderson's and intermediate-sized grassland microcosms are
recommended  for further  development.   In addition,   the  following
research activities are recommended:

     1.    Evaluation  of  encasement materials  in terms  of
          leachabiltiy, adsorptive  capacity, optical  properties,
          and durability.

     2.    Round-robin evaluation in all  cases.

     3.    Field validation in all cases.

     4.    Determination of the  relevance  of measured parameters
          (nutrient loss) to major ecosystem processes.

5.3.3  General Discussion

     During  the general  discussion  that  concluded the workshop, a
number of  common concerns were  raised.  One was the degree of realism
required in  a test system.   Although we agreed that a minimum degree
of realism  is necessary,  increasing realism involves  greater cost and
technical difficulty.   The  larger number of physical  and biological
elements  in more  realistic  systems tends to reduce  replicability.
They also  reduce sensitivity  by increasing absorption and degradation
of the test substance and by increasing the functional redundancy in
the system.   Finally, the presence of multiple biological  elements can
interfere with the interpretation of results in terms of the processes
involved.   For example,  the presence  of plants  creates a more
realistic  environment for soil  microbes, but  plant  respiration  and
nutrient uptake  interfere with  the measurement of mineralization and
microbial respiration.

     Therefore,  it is  necessary to determine whether  a  particular
simplification  of  the test  system will  cause  a qualitative difference
in  response.    Brian  Spalding  suggested  that the many years of
experience  in  agronomic  microbiology  indicate  that  sieved soil
adequately  represents  the dynamics of major nutrients  in the field.
However, the  toxicant responses of whole natural ecosystems have not
been  well  studied.   Peter  Van  Voris suggested that  the  ecological
importance  of interactions  between microbes, animals,  plants, soil,
and litter makes them worth considering in a testing  scheme.

-------
                                 73


     A second major issue is the effect of variation in the chemical,
physical, and  microbiological  properties of  soil  on  responses to
chemicals.   We agreed that,  while this problem is difficult and highly
significant, the direct approach of providing a  standard test soil is
impractical.  The  best alternative is  to set limits  on the  major
physical  and  chemical  properties of  test soils and  then to  use
positive control substances to  determine  the relative sensitivity of
each  test  soil.   One  must  also recognize  that  variation  in soil
properties can affect the choice of response parameters.   For example,
nitrate loss was found to be a good indicator of  toxicant response for
soil cores  from  Oak  Ridge  but not for cores from Corvallis (Gile et
al.  1979).

     Finally, the problem of dose delivery and scheduling was briefly
considered.   Because TSCA  controlled  substances, unlike pesticides,
are usually not deliberately released  into the environment,  the proper
mode of  delivery is  not  obvious.  Test substances  could be delivered
in  sprays,  irrigation water,  organic solvents,  particulates,  or
vapors.

     Substances  could  be delivered in  a single acute dose or in
continuous or episodic chronic  doses.   The  mode  of dose delivery can
significantly affect the outcome of a test and, therefore, must  be
carefully considered in the development of a hazard assessment scheme.

-------
                                 74


5.4  References

Alexander, M.  1961.   Introduction to Soil Microbiology.   John Wiley
     and Sons, New York.

Anderson, R. V.,  E.  T.  Elliot,  J.  F.  McClellan, D. C. Coleman, C. V.
     Cole, and H. W.  Hunt.   1978.   Trophic interactions  in  soils as
     they  affect  energy  and  nutrient  dynamics.    Ill  Biotic
     interactions of  bacteria,  amoebae,  and  nematodes.   Microb.  Ecol.
     4:361-371.

Best, G. R., and C.  C. Monk.  1973.  Cation flux in hardwood and  white
     pine watersheds,  pp. 847-861.  In:  Mineral Cycling in Temperate
     Forest Ecosystems,  F.  G.  Howel, J.  B.  Gentry,  and M.  H.  Smith,
     eds.  CONF-740513.    National   Technical  Information  Service,
     Springfield, Virginia.

Brock, T. D.   1966.   Principles of  Microbial  Ecology.   Prentice Hall,
     Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey.

Cairns,  R.  R.   1963.   Nitrogen mineralization  in  solonetzic  soil
     samples  and some  influencing  factors.    Can.  J.  Soil  Sci.
     43:387-392.

Cole,  L. K.,  R.  L. Metcalf,  and J.  R.  Sanborn.  1976.  Environmental
     fate of insecticides in terrestrial  model  ecosystems.  Intern.  J.
     Environ. Stud.  10:7-14.

Eckardt, F. E.  1968.   Techniques  de mesure  de la  phtosynthese sur la
     terrain  basees  sur  1'emploi  d1enceintes  climatisees.    pp.
     289-319.   In:    Functioning  of Terrestrial Ecosystems  at the
     Primary Production  Level,  F.  E.  Eckardt,  ed.   Proceedings UNESCO
     Copenhagen Symposium.  UNESCO, Copenhagen.

Edwards,  N.  T. ,  and  P.  Sollins.  1973.   Continuous measurement  of
     carbon  dioxide  evolution  from  partitioned  forest  floor
     components.   Ecology 54:406-412.

Gile,  J. D.,  J.  C.  Collins,  and J.  W.  Gillett.  1979.  The soil  core
     microcosm  - a  potential  screening tool.   EPA-600/3-79-089.
     Corvallis Environmental  Research  Laboratory,  Corvallis,  Oregon.

Gile,  J. D.,  and J.  W.  Gillett.   1979.   Terrestrial  microcosm chamber
     evaluations  of  substitute  chemicals.   pp.    75-85.    In:
     Terrestrial  Microcosms and Environmental  Chemistry,  J.  M. Witt
     and J. W. Gillett, eds.  National Science  Foundation, Washington,
     D.C.

Harris,  W.  F.   1980.   Microcosms  as potential  screening  tools for
     evaluating  transport and  effects  of toxic substances:   Final
     report.   ORNL/EPA-4.   Environmental Sciences  Division, Oak Ridge
     National  Laboratory, Oak Ridge, Tennessee.

-------
                                 75
Jackson,  D.  R.,  B.  S.   Ausmus,  and M. Levine.   1979.   Effects of
     arsenic on  nutrient  dynamics of grassland  microcosms  and field
     plots.  Water Soil Air Pollut.  11:13-21.

Jackson,  D.  R.,  J. J.  Selvidge,  and B.  S.  Ausmus.   1978.   Behavior of
     heavy  metals  in  forest  microcosms:   I.   Transport and
     distribution among components.  Water Soil  Air Pollut.  10:3-11.

Jackson,  D.  R.,  C. D.  Washburne,  and B.  S.  Ausmus.   1977.   Loss of Ca
     and  N03-N from  terrestrial microcosms  as  an indicator of soil
     pollution.  Water Soil Air Pollut.  8:279-284.

Jackson,  D. R., and A.  P.  Watson.  1977.   Disruption of nutrient pools
     and  transport of heavy metals in a forested watershed  near a  lead
     smelter.  J. Environ.  Qual.  6:331-338.

Johnson,  D.  W. ,  and  N.  T. Edwards.   1979.   The effects  of  stem
     girdling on biogeochemical cycles within a mixed deciduous forest
     in  eastern Tennessee  II.   Soil  nitorgen mineralization and
     nitrification rates.   Oecologia 40:259-271.

Johnson,  D.  W. ,  and  N. T. Edwards.  1980.   Nitrogen mineralization,
     immobilization and nitrification  following urea fertilization of
     a  forest  soil  under field and  laboratory conditions.   J. Soil
     Sci. Soc. Am.  44:610-616.

Lichenstein, E.  P., K. R.  Schultz,  and T. T. Liang.  1977.  Fate  of
     fresh and aged soil  residues of the  insecticide (14C)-N-2596  in a
     soil-corn-water ecosystem.  J. Econ.  Entom.   70:169-175.

Lighthart,  B.,  and  H.  Bond.   1976.  Design and preliminary results
     from  soil/litter  microcosms.   Int.  J.  Environ. Stud.  10:51-58.

Likens, G.  E.,  F. H. Bormann, N.  M. Johnson, D. W. Fisher, and R. S.
     Pierce.  1970.   Effects of forest cutting and  herbicide treatment
     on  nutrient budgets   in  the  Hubbard Brook watershed-ecosystem.
     Ecol.  Mono.  40:23-47.

McCormick,  J.  F., and R. B.   Platt.   1962.    Effects  of  ionized
     radiation on a natural plant community.   Radiat.  Bot.  2:161-188.

Minderman, G.,  and J.  C.  Vulto.  1973.  Comparison of techniques  for
     the  measurement  of   carbon   dioxide  evolution  from  soil.
     Pedobiologia 13:73-80.

Monteith, J. L.  1968.   Analysis of the photosynthesis and  respiration
     of  field  crops   from vertical  fluxes  of  carbon  dioxide.
     pp. 349-358.  In:   Functioning of Terrestrial Ecosystems at  the
     Primary Production Level.  F. E. Eckardt, ed.  Proceedings of the
     UNESCO Copenhagen Symposium, UNESCO,  Copenhagen.

-------
                                 76
Nash, R. G., M. L. Beall, Jr., and W. G. Harris.  1977.  Toxaphene  and
     1, 1, 1  trichloro-2,2-bis (p-chlorophenyl) ethane  (DDT)  losses
     from  cotton  in  an agroecosystem chamber.  J.  Agric.  Food Chem.
     25:336-341.

O'Neill, R. V.,  B.  S.  Ausmus, D.  R.  Jackson,  R.  I.  Van Hook,  P.  Van
     Voris, C.  Washburne,  and  A.  P.  Watson.   1977.    Monitoring
     terrestrial ecosystems by analysis of nutrient export.  Water  Air
     Soil Pollut. 8:271-277.

Odum,  H.   T. ,  and A.  Lugo.   1970.   Metabolism  of forest-floor
     microcosms,  pp.  1-35  to 1-56.   In:   A  Tropical  Rain  Forest.  H.
     T. Odum,  ed.  U.S. Atomic  Energy  Commission,  Washington, D.C.

Parkinson, D.,  T. R. G.  Gray, and S.  T. Williams.   1971.  Methods for
     studying the ecology of  soil microorganisms, IBP  handbook no.  19.
     Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford and Edinburgh.

Richardson, C.  J, and  J. A.  Lund.   1975.   Effects of clear-cutting on
     nutrient losses in aspen forests on three soil types  in Michigan.
     pp. 673-686.   In:   Mineral  Cycling  in  Temperate  Forest
     Ecosystems.  F. G.  Howe 11,  J. B.  Gentry,  and  M.  H. Smith, eds.
     CONF-74513.  Technical Information Center, U.S. ERDA.

Rosswall,  T.,  E.  U.  Lohm,  and B.  Sohbnius.   1978.   Development d'un
     Microcosme pour L1etude  de  la Mineralisation et  de L'absorption
     Radiculaire  de  L'asote  dans  L1humus d'un  Foret de  Coniferes
     (Pinus sylvestris  L.)  Lejeunia Rev.  Botanique,  Novelle  Serie No.
     84. 26 pp.

Russell, E. J. ,  and E. W.  Russell.   1950.  Soil Conditions and Plant
     Growth, 8th ed. Longmans, Green  and Co.,  London.

Stotzky,  G.    1965.   Microbial  respiration.   pp. 1550-1572.   In:
     Methods  of  Soil  Analysis,   Part  2,  Chemical  and  Microbial
     Properties.  C.  A. Black,  ed.   American Society of  Agronomy,
     Inc., Madison, Wisconsin.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.   1979.   Toxic Substances Control
     Act   premanufacture  testing  of  new  chemical   substances
     (OTS-050003; FRL-1069-1) Fed. Regist. 44(53):16240-16292.

Van Voris, P., R. V. O'Neill, H.   H. Shugart, and W. R.  Emanuel.   1978.
     Functional  complexity  and ecosystem stability:   An experimental
     approach.   ORNL/TM-6199.  Oak  Ridge  National   Laboratory, Oak
     Ridge, Tennessee.

Vitousek,  P.   M.,  J.  R. Gosz, C.  C.  Brier,  J.  M.  Melillo, W. A.
     Reiners,  and R.  L.  Todd.  1979.   Nitrate losses  from disturbed
     ecosystems.  Science 204:469-474.

-------
                                 77
Woodwell, G. M.,  and D.  B. Botkin.  1970.  Metabolism of terrestrial
     ecosystems by  gas exchange  techniques:   The Brookhaven approach.
     pp. 73-85.   In:  Analysis of Temperate  Forest Ecosystems.   D.  E.
     Reichle, ed.   Springer-Verlag, Berlin-Heidelberg-New York.

-------
METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS



      ON AQUATIC ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES
          February 5 and 6, 1980
            Jeffrey M.  Giddings





      Environmental Sciences Division



      Oak Ridge National Laboratory

-------
                                 80
                             PARTICIPANTS

                       J.  M.  Giddings, Chairman
                     Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                    GROUP A (LENTIC WORKING GROUP)
S. M. Adams                       Allen Medine
Oak Ridge National Laboratory     University of Connecticut

B. G. Blaylock                    P. J. Mulholland
Oak Ridge National Laboratory     Oak Ridge National Laboratory

J. W. Leffler                     Hap Pritchard
Ferrum College                    U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

Donald Levy                       J. B. Waide
University of California          Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                     GROUP B (LOTIC WORKING GROUP)
John Bowling                      J. D. Newbold
Savannah River Ecology Lab.       Oak Ridge National Laboratory

J. W. Elwood                      John Rogers
Oak Ridge National Laboratory     North Texas State University

Alan Maki                         F. S. Sanders
Proctor and Gamble                Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                               OBSERVERS
A. S. Mammons                     J. V. Nabholz
Oak Ridge National Laboratory     U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency

-------
                                 81
                               SECTION 6

              METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS
                    ON AQUATIC ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES
6.1  Introduction

     This  workshop  explored  the potential  uses  of laboratory
experimental  ecosystems  for assessing  the effects of chemicals  on
aquatic  ecosystem  structure and  function.   The workshop objectives
were:

 1.   To produce as  complete a list as possible of laboratory
      experimental systems that have been (or could be) used to
      measure  effects  of chemicals  on  aquatic  ecosystem
      properties.

 2.   To evaluate  the  capabilities of each  model  ecosystem  for
      measuring system-level properties.

 3.   To evaluate  each model ecosystem as  a  tool  for routine
      screening of chemicals.

 4.   To outline  logical test  protocols  for three different
      types of model ecosystems.

     The workshop  participants  were  divided into two  working groups
designated the  Lentic  Working  Group  (Group A)  and  the Lotic Working
Group  (Group  B).   The  Lentic  Working  Group  considered nonflowing
freshwater model  ecosystems and  various  marine systems; the Lotic
Working  Group discussed model   stream research.   Each working group
addressed  the following three  general  topics  in  a series of three
working sessions:

Working Session I:    Identification and Description  of Test Systems

     1.   Identify model  aquatic  ecosystems (Group A:   lentic;
          Group  B:   lotic)  that  display  community  and
          ecosystem-level properties.   If  possible,   organize
          these model   ecosystems into  categories that  are
          sufficiently  well  defined to permit generalization
          about their  potential  utility  in hazard assessment
          requirements  of the  Toxic Substances  Control Act
          (TSCA).

     2.   List  community  and   ecosystem-level  properties
          measurable in these model  ecosystems.

-------
                                 82
     3.   Construct a matrix with test  systems on the  horizontal
          axis and measurable  properties  on the vertical axis.
          For  each  intersection  in the  matrix, assess the
          feasibility of measuring  that property on that model
          ecosystem.

Working Session II:   Evaluation of Test Systems

     1.   Construct a matrix with test  systems on the  horizontal
          axis and experimental  criteria  on the vertical axis.
          For each intersection in the matrix, evaluate that test
          system in terms  of  that criterion.  The criteria are:

               Replicability
               Potential for interlaboratory transfer
               Sensitivity to chemical stress
               Generalizability to other aquatic ecosystems
               Unequivocality of results
               Statistical  basis for interpreting results
               Existence of standards for rejecting results
                  (test failure)
               Frequency of test failure
               Level  of training and expertise required
               Time required
               Cost per chemical
               Others

Working Session III:   Protocol Development

     1.   Write  a first-approximation  protocol  for  testing
          chemicals for effects on  ecosystem properties.   Of
          course, many  questions would  remain to be  resolved
          before  these protocols  could  be  adopted  by  the
          Environmental Protection  Agency  (EPA)—these questions
          should be identified as they arise  in the protocols.
          An outline for a protocol could be as follows:

            I. Hypotheses to be tested by this protocol

           II. System design

                    Size
                    Abiotic and biotic components
                    Light, temperature controls
                    Strategies for maximizing  replicability

          III. Test Procedure

                    Controls
Controls
Replicates per treatment; treatments per chemical

-------
                                 83
                    Introduction of test chemical into system
                    Measurement of effects
           IV. Analysis of Results
                    Statistical basis for identifying effects
                    Criteria for rejection of test results
                    Interpretation of results
                    Generalization to other aquatic ecosystems
            V. Development Needs

                    How to validate the test
                    Major questions that need to be resolved
                    before finalizing protocol

6.2  Results and Discussion

6.2.1  Test  Descriptions and  Measurable  Ecosystem-Level  Properties

     (1)  Lentic Working Group.   Seventeen  model  ecosystems or model
ecosystem types within  the  scope of this workshop were listed (Table
6.1).  Various approaches to organizing the  list  into general classes
were suggested.  Classification  schemes based on  distinctions between
open and  closed  systems, between static  and flow-through  systems,
between  synthesized (gnotobiotic)  and naturally-derived  systems,
between  systems  with and without sediments, and between large and
small  systems were  all rejected because  the  variety of  model
ecosystems makes such categorizations  unworkable.  The list of 17 was
later condensed to 9 representative systems [Section 6.2.2(1)].

     A detailed  list of measurable ecosystem properties was then
compiled  (Table  6.2).   Because  some  of  these  properties  were
operationally defined,  the  list  did not clearly  distinguish between
system-level parameters  per se and  methods that are commonly used for
measurements.  For  the  purposes  of  constructing an evaluation matrix,
each property  or method on  the  list  was  considered  individually.

     The model ecosystems in Table 6.1 were then evaluated in terms of
their suitability for measuring the properties in Table 6.2.  A simple
3-level rating system was  used,  with a rating of 1 indicating that a
parameter was  easy to  measure in a given  system;  a  rating of 3,
difficult; and a rating of  2,  intermediate.   The full  matrix is
presented in Table 6.3.

     In general,  Group  A thought that nearly all  the  ecosystem-level
parameters could be measured in  any of the model  ecosystems, but that
some measurements  were  more  difficult than others.   Destructive
sampling  over  time  is  difficult  in smaller  systems;  therefore,  the
number of measurements  that can  be made on a single experimental unit
is limited.   Sampling of larger, more complex systems is  complicated

-------
                           84
                TABLE 6.1.  MODEL ECOSYSTEMS
                   (Lentic Working Group)
1.   Gnotobiotic mixed flask culture (Nixon 1969; Taub 1969)
2    Derived mixed flask culture, closed (Corden et al. 1969)
3.   Derived mixed flask culture, open (Leffler 1977; Neil! 1975;
     Thomas 1978)
4.   Carboy microcosm (McConnell 1962)
5.   Pelagic community (Harte et al. 1978)
6.   Pond community (Brockway et al. 1979; Giddings and Eddlemon
     1979)
7.   Artificial food chain, aquatic (Isensee et al. 1973)
8.   Artificial food chain, terrestrial/aquatic (Metcalf et al.
     1971)
9.   Salt marsh box core (Kitchens 1979)
10.  Marine pelagic, 150 L (Perez et al. 1977)
11.  Marine littoral, benthic (Henderson et al. 1976)
12.  Estuary, compartmentalized (Cooper and Copeland 1973)
13.  Marine sediment core (Pritchard et al. 1979)
14.  Freshwater sediment core (Medine et al. 1980)
15.  Sediment-water systems, general (Neame and Goldman 1980)
16.  Narragansett Bay, 13 m3 (Pilson et al. 1980)
17.  Marine plankton, deep tank (Strickland et al. 1969)

-------
                                 85
              TABLE 6.2.  MEASURABLE ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES
                        (Lentic Working Group)
A.  Chemical matrix (Eh, pH, etc.)     L.
B.  Electrical potential               M.
C.  Nutrient levels (mass balance)
                                       N.
D.  Nutrient flux
E.  Dissolved organic carbon           0.
F.  Biomass                            P.
G.  Chlorophyll                        Q.
H.  Fluorescence                       R.
I.  Turbidity                          S.
J.  ATP                                T.
K.  Size spectrum of particles
Taxonomic description
Primary production,
respiration, P/R
Oxygen dynamics (input-
output)
Heterotrophic activity
Dehydrogenase activity
Enzyme systems
Grazing rate
Colonization rate
Spatial/temporal patterns

-------
86




Q
iy^
LU
P
oc
LU
a.
of
S
h™
W>
S
LU

5
QC
3
^g
z
oe
o
LU
X
LU
r-

O
U
LU
_j
LU
o
S
Z
U_
0
o
*—
i
3
5
LU


fO

10

a
I







^^
rH
3
.
LA
r-t
.
S
.
I-H

.
CM
rH
.
rH
rH

.
If
in .
s?0"
a
u
UJ .
00
r—
01
•o
o .
*"*'



t^O
.
tf)

.
^f



ro





^




































1-4 f-Hi-H .-ir-iro.-icsjevjr-ioom^-en


i-lrH (*> iH^-ti-li-1r-*f-ICMrHCMe>J^'rOfO^-^






i-^f— (r— 4COr— (r-*rHrHi-HrHrHC\li-11t>
u>
^-
5
c
•r-
01
J3
to
£
w

01

3 O
in c
a
i- e O

u» >> o o>
(O *J *» r-
O r- U
*>'|^ Or^
u?'5'«E §•
..« -t-
U) HI HI T3 4->
O1 i * o
C >. TO >> C
*> at ~o at >>
a > ai > *?
QE -r- S f- S.

s- to a) nj a.
O r— *> •— O
Ol C 0) 1.
c ae i— i ae o.
o
+J u II u u
C rH 04 « *
"a.
LU

^
*fl»
>
*>
S
&
in
in
01
i.
at
2
a.
"S
a
in

^
U>
>>
(A
01
0)
•a
§
M-
O
C
O
-t—

ia
u
t-

c
di
•S


t-
o
t-
CM
VO
^J
c
ia
rH
IA

in
0)

a
i—

at
ai
CO
10




-------
                                 87
by the  difficulty  of spatial heterogeneity within each system, which
necessitates a stratified sampling regime.

     Chemical and  physical  parameters  are relatively easy to measure
in the  model ecosystems  considered.   Autotrophic activity is  also
easily  determined  (except,  of course,  in systems lacking autotrophic
components).  Heterotrophic  activity  is  more difficult to measure
because of  the  methods now available.   Nutrient  levels  are  easy to
measure,  but large numbers  of  samples may be required to overcome
spatial and  temporal  variability.   (Measurement of nutrient flux, as
opposed  to  instantaneous  concentrations,  is  more  difficult;
radioisotopes are  generally  needed).   Finally,  taxonomic descriptions
are  difficult  and time  consuming  in  all  but the  simplest  model
ecosystems.

     (2)   Lotic Working  Group.   Three  major  classes  of  lotic model
ecosystems  were  recognized:   (a)  closed  (completely  recirculating)
systems,  (b) partially  recirculating  systems,  and (c) open  (once-
through flow) systems.  Each class was  further broken down as shown in
Table 6.4.   These  system types  generally fall  along  a gradient from
small,  completely  recirculating laboratory  devices  to large-scale,
outdoor streams.   Examples of each type are given in Table 6.4.

     Measurable system-level parameters were identified and classified
as structural or  functional  (Table 6.5).   "Transport"  in  this list
refers  to  all downstream (or upstream) movement  of organisms  and of
dissolved and particulate  matter,  rather  than toxicant transport in
the  usual  sense;  "fate"  refers  to the  chemical fate of the toxicant.
Except for transport, fate, and behavior,  the properties listed by the
Lotic Working Group correspond closely  with those listed by the Lentic
Working Group.

     The Lotic Working Group used a three-level rating system, similar
to that of  the Lentic Working  Group  to  assess  the  feasibility of
measuring particular  properties  in each model ecosystem category.  By
and  large,  all properties  are measurable  in  all  systems.  The  major
exception  to this generalization  is the  closed  recirculating  tube
system, which  is  too  small  and ecologically  incomplete  for  some
measurements.  The matrix of model  ecosystems vs. ecosystem properties
is presented in Table 6.6.

6.2.2  Evaluation  of Test Systems

     (1)   Lentic Working Group.   Of  the  original  list of 17  model
ecosystems,  nine  were evaluated as  TSCA  testing  protocols.   This
condensation was  achieved  by grouping similar systems into  one
category,  and by  including  only those  experimental systems that were
considered to have the most potential.  The condensed list forms the
vertical axis of Table 6.7.

-------
                           88

                TABLE 6.4.   MODEL ECOSYSTEMS
                    (Lotic Working Group)
                       Closed systems
Closed recirculating tubs (e.g., Gushing and Rose 1970)
In-Situ (e.g., Bott et al.  1978)
Recirculating trough (e.g., Kevern and Ball 1965)
Laboratory channel (e.g., Kehde and Wilhm 1972)

               Partially recirculating systems
Boxes, tubes, etc. (e.g., Mclntire et al. 1964)
Laboratory channel (e.g., Brocksen et al. 1968)

                        Open systems
Wood or concrete channels (e.g., Maki and Johnson 1976)
Stream-side flume (e.g., Armitage 1980)
In-stream flume (e.g., Manuel and Marshall 1980)
Large-scale outdoor stream (e.g., Kania et al. 1976)

-------
                       89
    TABLE 6.5.   MEASURABLE ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES
               (Lotic Working Group)
                    Functional
Primary production            Biochemical measurements
Community production          Functional group diversity
Community respiration         Transport
Secondary production          Behavior
Nutrient dynamics             Fate

                    Structural
Standing stock
Diversity - equitability
Colonization (recolonization)
Physical properties (pH, DO, DOC, etc.)

-------
                                          90
                          TABLE 6.6.   EVALUATION OF MODEL ECOSYSTEMS
                              FOR MEASURING  ECOSYSTEM PROPERTIES
                                     (Lotic  Working Group)
Ecosystem
properties


£
u
01
Closed
systems
c
o
•^
•w
IO
Partially
recirculating
(A
01
.Q
3

concrete
Open
systems
3

01
Functional:



Conun. Respiration
2° Production

Biochemical
Functional Group Diversity
Transport*
Behavioral
Fate
u
01
s.
•o
4) M
IA 0)
5-8
u *»



N

N
N
Y
3
10
e



Y

Y
N
Y
•w
IO
"3 <—
O "*TJ v
(- DI e
•^3 C
«2 -85
ce +J — J u



Y Y

Y Y
N M
Y Y
^
3
"»
10 C
01 • C
X U J3 10
o *> m .c
oa o> — i o



Y Y

Y Y
M M
Y Y
u -o
ic'aJ 6 u
c a o> *> 01
•o c 01 s MB
O JZ *> r— C i—
3 u «/> *• 1-1 1-



Y Y Y

Y Y Y
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
SL
§o
S
10 3
—1 O

v

Y

Y
Y
Y
Structural:
Standing stock
Di versi ty-equi tabi 1 1 ty
Colom'z. , Recol.
Physical prop. (pH, 00,
DOC, etc.)
"Dissension expressed
Y
Y
N
Y


Y
Y
N
Y


Y
Y
N
Y


Y
Y
N
Y


Y
Y
M
Y


Y
Y
M
Y


Y
Y
Y
Y


Y
Y
Y
Y


Y
Y
Y
Y


Y
Y
Y
Y


Explanation of Ratings:
     Y = YES; N = NO; M = MAYBE

-------
                                 91


                 TABLE 6.7.   EVALUATION OF TEST SYSTEMS

                         (Lentic Working Group)












a
Model ecosystem type
(1)
(2), (3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(10), (11)
(13)
(14)

JK
+>
•r"
r—
•i—
.a

o

r—
a.
a>
G
G
G
G
F
F
G
G
G
.a
•r*
•^
-Q

N
•i-.
^f
t~
tj
TJ
C

4J
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
•o
•a
0)
•r-
3
cr
a)
£_

O)
C
•1—
c
•r—
<0
i.
1—
PC6
1
1-7
1-7
PC
1-14
1-14
1-2
1-21
(A
0)
0)
U (A

C
o
(A "O
•P -P
U
0)

2 +
2
2
(A
O
U

c
o
•r-
•P
TO
t-
Ol
Q.
O
^
-
+
+ 1 >3
1
+ 4
4
h
2
1 +
2 +
2
1
1 +
-
+
+
-
—


^.
) *
•r-
>
urm
4->

(A
C
i/)
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

aNumbers refer to Table

bG = Good
6.1





d +
-

= relatively
= relatively

expensive


inexpensive



F = Fair
 + = equilibration necessary
 - = equilibration not necessary
                                     PC = experience with pure cultures
                                     needed

-------
                                 92


     Because time  for discussion was  limited,  seven criteria were
selected for evaluating  these  systems.   These criteria are listed on
the horizontal  axis of Table  6.7.   The following conclusions were
reached:

     1.    Replicability.   Most of the systems were judged to be fairly
          replicable, although replicability is essentially a function
          of the parameter being measured.  Gross parameters, such as
          total  primary   productivity,  are  more similar  between
          replicate microcosms than population-level  measurements.  It
          was also  observed  that variations in some properties over
          time may be out of phase between replicates;  replication can
          still  be  considered good if  replicate  systems  behave  the
          same even though fluctuations are out of phase.

     2.    Interlaboratory transfer.   All  of the  systems  considered
          could  be  built  and operated  at different laboratories
          without difficulty.

     3.    Training required.   All of the systems are fairly easy to
          set  up and to  operate.  Estimates  of  the  time needed  to
          train  an  inexperienced technician  to  use these  systems
          ranged from 1 day to 3 weeks.   The synthetic  systems require
          expertise  in  maintaining  pure  stock  cultures.   The
          measurement  of ecosystem  properties would be  the most
          difficult  aspect  of these tests.  The  amount  of training
          required  would  therefore depend  on  which  parameters  were
          being measured.

     4.    Time required.   The  time required  to  conduct tests with
          model  ecosystems is  a  function of experimental objectives
          and  measured responses.   Some  of the  systems require  an
          equilibration  time after set  up to allow conditions  to
          stabilize  before  beginning an  experiment.   Acute effects
          might  be  measurable  in as  little as 6  h;  chronic effects
          could be observed for 3 months or longer.

     5.    Cost of testing.   None of  the  systems are  particularly
          expensive to set up  or operate.   Taub's gnotobiotic systems
          are  probably   more   expensive  than  most  of  the
          naturally-derived   systems   considered,  because  the
          gnotobiotic systems  require  maintenance of stock cultures.
          The  salt  marsh  models  of Kitchens and the 3-phase sediment
          cores  of  Medine and Porcella include some simple plumbing,
          which would increase their costs.  For all  of the tests, the
          major  expenses  are  chemical  analyses  and  other costs  of
          measuring ecosystem  responses.  As with any chemical testing
          system, some expenses  may  be  incurred  in protecting workers
          from exposure to potentially harmful materials.

-------
                                 93
     6.    Sensitivity.    The  sensitivity  of  these  systems  was
          considered to  be  dependent on  the  response parameters
          measured rather than on the test systems themselves.   It  is
          not yet known which responses are most sensitive to chemical
          stress; this  is an area where more basic research is needed.

     7.    Generalizability.    Extrapolating  from laboratory tests to
          natural systems was recognized as the major problem in model
          ecosystem research.  To some extent,  the generalizability of
          model  ecosystem  results depends  on  the responses  being
          measured.   Two basic strategies  for  making ecosystem-level
          tests  "representative"  emerged from  the discussion.   One
          approach is to construct a generic ecosystem (i.e.,  a system
          exhibiting important ecosystem properties but not mimicking
          any particular natural  ecosystem).   Such  a system could be
          used to rank chemicals  in  order of toxicity, in the early
          stages of  hazard assessment.  A  second approach is  to  model
          a selected natural  ecosystem as closely as  possible, so that
          microcosm results  could be  taken as  indicative of probable
          effects in the natural ecosystems; the problem then becomes
          one  of generalizing from one  natural  ecosystem to other
          natural ecosystems.   A predictive,  or mimicking,  model
          ecosystem would probably be  most useful  in later stages of
          hazard assessment.

     (2)   Lotic  Working Group.   The  10 general  categories  of model
ecosystems discussed in Working Session I were evaluated according to
13 criteria  important to a hazard assessment process.  The results of
this evaluation  are  summarized  in  Table 6.8.    The  criteria were
defined as follows:

     1.    Replicability.    The  Lotic   Working   Group   interpreted
          "replicability11 to mean  ease  of  setting   up  replicate
          systems.    Smaller  systems are  more  replicable, by this
          definition, than larger systems.   The question of similarity
          between replicates  was  not discussed.

     2.    Interlaboratory transfer.   The methodology of smaller  model
          systems is  more easily  transferred between  laboratories than
          that for larger,  more complex systems.

     3.    Sensitivity.   Small systems are  probably more sensitive to
          chemical  stress than larger  systems.   However,  sensitivity
          is primarily  a function of the responses measured.

     4.    Generalizabi1ity.   The  ability  to relate  model  ecosystem
          results to natural ecosystems was judged  to be the most
          important  criterion  for  evaluating  model   ecosystems  as
          chemical  testing tools.  Small,  closed systems were rated
          poor in this regard; only  larger,  open systems are enough
          like natural  streams to permit  reliable predictions.   Even

-------
                  94
TABLE 6.8.   EVALUATION  OF TEST SYSTEMS
         (Lotic Working Group)
Criteria

Danl 4 faH-i 1 < *•»/

potential ror inter iao.
transfer
Sensitivity to chemical
stress
uenera i i zaoi i i ty to
other aquatic ecosystems
Linearity
Unequivocal ity of results
statistical oasis tor
interpreting results
Existence of standards
for rejecting results
(test failure)
Frequency of test
failure
Level of training and
expertise required
Time required
Cost per chemical
Cause-effect
Interpretation
H = High G = Good
N = Medium F = Fair
L = Low P = Poor
Closed Partially
systems reclrculating Open systems
Closed reclrculating
tubes



G


U
G



U

L

L
L
H




a
M
fc



G


U
G



U

L

L
L
H




((•circulating trough
Lab channel
Lab channel
G/* /»

b u
G G G


U U U
G G G



U U U

L M M

L M M
L M M
H M M




b
x s i i
• « S i ^
- u *- 3 o
we i—
tl O HI H- 01
* ° 5 . -5
*» -o M 3 u
§1 a 2 !*
M £ 3 *> 01
01 -a c o> i/> a
x o  C «0
S u «/> N* — '



F F F F F


U U U U U
G G G G G



U U U U U

M H H H H

M H H H H
M H H H H
N L L L L




U - Unknown

-------
                                 95
          with larger model  streams,  doubts about ecological realism
          remain.

     5.   Linearity.  This criterion refers to the effects of scale on
          the properties  of  model  streams.   To what extent can model
          ecosystem  results  be  "scaled  up" to  full-sized natural
          streams?   This  question cannot be answered  for any model
          ecosystem at present.

     6.   Unequivocalityof Results.   The  group  interpreted  this
          criterion  as  "faith in the  results".   The conclusion was
          that  any  test   system could  be  designed  to  provide
          unambiguous responses.   However,  the ability to  interpret
          experimental results will depend  on  an  improvement  in  our
          current  knowledge  of the complex interactions occurring in
          ecosystems.

     7.   Statistical Basis for Interpretation.  Statistical analysis
          of  results  is  easiest  with  small systems.  The  inherent
          variability of  larger  systems  means  that more  samples  are
          needed  to achieve  a given  level  of  confidence  in  the
          measurements,  and that temporal trends are more difficult to
          detect.  The difficulty  of  replicating larger systems also
          detracts  from  the  ability  to  detect statistically
          significant effects.

     8.   Standards for rejection.  Simple standards for rejecting the
          results of any particular test might be possible for smaller
          model systems but less likely for larger ones.

     9.   Frequency of test failure.  The frequency of test failure is
          unknown  for any  model  stream,  mainly  because failures  are
          rarely reported in the literature.

     10.  Training required, time required, and cost.   Small,  recir-
          culating systems require  less  training,  less  time, and  less
          money  to operate than  larger  systems.  The  large,  open
          systems received the worst ratings by these criteria.

     11.  Cause-effect interpretation.    The  complexity of  a large,
          open  system makes   interpretation  of chemical  effects
          difficult.  Direct  toxic  effects  are not easily  untangled
          from the web of secondary effects and interactions occurring
          in  a  complex  system.   Cause and effect are most easily
          distinguished in small, simple systems.

     An  interesting generality  that  emerged   from  this evaluation
exercise was  that systems meeting the  operational  criteria for a
screening test (replicability, potential  for interlaboratory transfer,
statistical interpretation,  low  cost,  short time, and  low level  of
expertise required)  are the same  systems  that  are  least generalizable

-------
                                 96
to  natural  ecosystems.   This  echoes  the conclusion  of the Lentic
Working  Group  that two  types  of ecosystem  test systems  are
desirable—one for screening, the other for prediction.   Rapid, simple
screening tests  cannot be  designed  without sacrificing ecological
realism.  Model  ecosystems  designed  with ecological realism as their
objective are  most appropriate  at later stages  in the assessment
process.

6.2.3  Protocol Development

     The protocol  development  exercise  served two functions.  First,
outlines of  three possible  ecosystem-level  effects tests based on
three widely-used  model  ecosystem types were produced.   Second, the
protocols constituted focal  points for  discussions  of common problems
encountered in  system-level  testing,  and strategies for dealing with
them.

     There were interesting differences in the approaches taken by the
working  groups.    The  Lentic Working Group  chose to develop  two
protocols,  one  involving sediment communities  (freshwater or marine),
and one including primarily pelagic organisms.  The sediment protocol,
adapted from methods of Medine (freshwater) and  Pritchard  (marine),
provides for small-scale,  simplified  simulation of specific aquatic
environments.    The pelagic protocol  is  essentially  the mixed  flask
culture method  of  Beyers,  Leffler, and others; the experimental unit
is  a  highly-simplified,  naturally-derived community that simulates no
specific natural   ecosystem,  but exhibits  system-level properties
common  to all  ecosystems.   Both of these protocols were developed by
selecting familiar model ecosystem designs  that seemed most amenable
to  routine toxicity screening.   The Lotic Working Group approached the
task  differently.   They  began  by selecting  a small  number  of
system-level  responses  that  were  considered  most  ecologically
meaningful, and then  designed a  model  ecosystem  that would reflect
these  responses  as realistically  as  possible.   The  protocol  that
resulted from  these deliberations is  a nonrecirculating laboratory
channel that,  according to  the conclusions  reached  in Working  Session
II, does not  meet the  requirements for a screening test but could be
used  in the advanced stages of a chemical  hazard assessment.   The
Lotic Working  Group thought that model  streams simple  enough  to be
used  for screening would not represent  natural  streams  realistically.

     Each protocol  obviously contains  many unresolved  problems, and
none  of the protocols  could be  used  in hazard assessment without
extensive refinement and validation.   They are sketches of feasible
ecosystem-level  tests   as  envisioned  by a  group of experienced
scientists.   The  protocols  are presented here  as prototypes  for
further research and development.

     (1)  Sediment core effects test procedure.  This procedure tests
the  hypothesis  that a  chemical will alter the system-level  properties
(chemical matrix,  primary production, heterotrophic activity,  nutrient

-------
                                 97
cycling) of  a sediment-water system.   The test consists of cylinders
containing homogenized  sediment or intact cores, water, and  natural
biota; continuous  or semi continuous flow.  Hypolimnetic, littoral,  or
marine benthic environments are simulated.

     Cores are contained in 1- to 10-L  cylinders, with depth 5  to  6
times  the  diameter.  Cylinders  may  be  lucite  or  glass;  lucite is
recommended  for  testing metals,  but  is  unusable with some organic
materials; glass is more expensive, but deteriorates less rapidly than
plastic.   A  sediment core  or  homogenized sediment (depth equal to
cylinder diameter) is placed in  each cylinder.   Cylinders  are then
filled with  natural  water (prefiltering not recommended) or  defined
medium (preferable for mass balance calculations).  Biota are included
with  the  sediment  and/or water.   Medium exchange is continuous or
semicontinuous, with  a  residence time of 2  to  10 d.   Cylinders are
illuminated  from  above  by horizontal  Duro-Test lights (approximating
sunlight spectrum) on a 12-h photoperiod (hypolimnion can be simulated
by  running test in darkness).   Temperature  is  maintained  at 15 to
25°C, depending on environment; temperature is controlled within 0.5°C
by water jackets or by an environmental  chamber.  The water is stirred
with  sufficient  mixing  energy  to prevent  stratification without
resuspending sediment.  Aeration  is not required.

     A test  should  include  two  replicates  per treatment,  plus  two
controls (plus two carrier controls if appropriate).   Each chemical is
tested at three concentrations at least.   The chemicals are introduced
with the medium,  or added separately by  syringe  pump; introduction  of
chemicals without  a carrier is preferred, if possible.  Homogenized
cores should  be  equilibrated for 15 to  20 d before  introducing the
chemical;  no  equilibration  is  necessary with intact cores.   Measure-
ments to be made on treated and control  systems include:

     1.   Chemical  matrix  (Eh, pH, TOC,  DOC, contaminant levels).

     2.   Primary  production  and respiration  (by light/dark  bottle
          technique,  measurement  of  diurnal  dissolved  oxygen
          fluctuations,  or oxygen mass balance).

     3.    Nutrient levels, especially N03-N,  NH4-N, organic N.

     4.    Heterotrophic  activity (14C02  production  from  labelled
          compounds, algal  lysate, or detritus; or carbon balance).

     Measurements  should  be made  at  least weekly.   Two  weeks  of
exposure are  required to determine no-effect levels; three sampling
intervals are necessary  to  confirm the magnitude of effects observed.

     Treated microcosms  are compared  with controls to identify effects
of chemical  treatment.   Test  results are rejected  if  controls  or
treatment  are  lost; controls should exhibit  ecosystem  measurements
consistent with  local  environmental  conditions.   Interpretation of

-------
                                 98
results  is  arbitrary  until  comparisons  with  other microcosm
experiments  or  field studies can  be made  (high level of funding
recommended for this purpose).

     (2)  Pelagic ecosystem effects test procedure.    This procedure
tests  the  hypothesis that  a  chemical  will  alter  the system-level
properties  (chemical matrix,  primary  production,  heterotrophic
activity, nutrient  cycling) of  a generalized aquatic ecosystem.   The
test consists of bacteria, algae, and microinvertebrates maintained in
artificial growth medium.   Typical ecosystem properties are exhibited
but no particular natural ecosystem is simulated.

     Mixed aquatic  communities  are  maintained  in loosely-capped 4-L
beakers.  Samples of biota from local ecosystems are used to establish
laboratory stock cultures; the taxonomic composition of these cultures
is  not important as  long as major  functional  groups (autotrophs,
grazers,  detritivores,  and decomposers)  are present.  When  stock
cultures reach a fairly stable taxonomic composition, they are used to
inoculate  the  test  communities.  A  standard growth  medium (e.g.,
Taub's #63 or  Gerloff's) is used.   Cultures are stirred continuously
or  only  during  sampling.   Light is supplied for 12 h each day.   A
constant  temperature of  20 to  25°C is  maintained.   During the
pretreatment  period, replicates  are cross-seeded  periodically  to
increase uniformity  of composition.   Evaporative losses are replaced
with equal volumes of stock culture.

     Each  test  includes  five  controls  plus five  replicates per
treatment.   Chemicals  are  tested  at  three  treatment  levels
corresponding  to 1/10 X, IX, and 10 X  the predicted environmental
concentrations.  After  a 6-week equilibrium period,  microcosms  are
treated  once with  the test chemicals; treatments  are not repeated.
Measurements on treated and control systems include:

     1.   Chemical matrix (Eh, pH)

     2.   Primary  production  and  respiration  (3-point oxygen
          method)

     3.   Nutrient  levels  (N03-N,  NH4-N,  ortho-P,  SRP, total C,
          DOC)

     4.   Heterotrophic  activity (14C02  release from labelled
          substrate, epifluorescent  bacterial  counts, or oxygen
          changes)

     5.   Autotrophic   biomass   (chlorophyll,   phaeophytin,
          fluorescence)

     6.   Turbidity

-------
                                 99
     Measurements that  can be automated should be  made twice daily
(just before  the  lights  turn  on  and  just before they turn  off); other
parameters  should be measured weekly.   The  systems should show a
response within 2 weeks  after the chemical  is added.  System  response
should be monitored  for a period sufficient  to allow recovery, or a
maximum of 10 weeks.

     Deviations of measured parameters  from the 95% confidence  limits
of the normal  operating  range of controls are integrated over time to
provide an  index  of  effect.   This index is  "total relative stability"
(Leffler 1977); it provides  a single measure of an ecosystem's total
stress response.  This  index  can be compared with  those produced by
standard chemicals tested in  the same  systems.   Any  deviation from
controls signifies a positive response, because 95% confidence  limits
are built into the  analysis.   Test  results are rejected if the test
system fails  to  rank  four standard chemicals properly, or if the
behavior of the controls is  aberrant.   The ranking of  four standard
chemicals serves as the criterion for assessing the reproducibility of
the test  system.   Thus,  even though the  species  composition  and
proportions may vary within each batch  of microcosms, the  batches are
considered  as  the same  test  system  as  long as they rank  the four
chemicals in standard order.

     All   aspects  of  the  protocol  need much more  testing  and
development.   Methods of introducing chemicals  must be refined.  The
optimal time frame of the test has not been established.

     (3)  Model stream effects test procedure.  This  procedure tests
the hypothesis that  a chemical will  alter the system-level  properties
(primary production,  respiration, community production) of a stream
ecosystem.   The test consists of laboratory-scale, nonrecirculating
model   streams,  containing natural substrate  and naturally derived
biota.   Regional  characteristics of small stream  ecosystems  are
simulated.

     Model  streams are  assembled in  indoor troughs, 2- to 10-m long
and 30-cm wide.   A  substrate  (limestone,  gravel, rock) is placed in
the troughs,  and  well  water  is  pumped through the systems with a
current speed  of  0.01 to 0.04 m/sec.  A naturally derived  autotrophic
community (system-dependent)  and a  nondrifting  invertebrate grazer
(cosmopolitan) are the major  biota.  Overhead lighting  is  provided at
about half the normal sunlight intensity for the region.  Temperature,
pH, and DO are controlled within the normal  regional range.

     A single  test includes two  replicates  at each  of three treatment
levels, plus two  replicate controls.  The effects of the chemical are
measured after 2  to 4  weeks of  continuous exposure.   Primary
production  and respiration   are measured  on  stream   substrate
communities  placed in respiration chambers.   Net community production
is measured by destructive  sampling  and total biomass  determination
after 30 d  exposure.   Nonparametric  procedures are used to compare
treated streams with  controls.

-------
                                100
     The  protocol  must be  checked in  inter!aboratory  round-robin
tests.   The protocol  may  be validated by comparing test results with
conventional toxicity tests and any available field data.

6.3  Conclusions

     Most  ecosystem  properties  (primary  productivity,  secondary
productivity,  ecosystem respiration, nutrient cycling, total biomass,
functional  or  structural  diversity, etc.)  can  be measured in most
model ecosystems.   The  ease with which a particular property may be
measured, and the  degree  to which that measurement is representative
of  natural  ecosystems,  depends  on the laboratory  system  and the
property  being  measured.    Research is  needed  to  identify  which
properties  are  most  easily measured,  most  sensitive  to chemical
stress, most critical to  the functioning of the  ecosystem, and most
generalizable to  other systems.   This research  must  precede the
adoption of standard testing protocols.

     The model  ecosystems  that are the most replicable, inexpensive,
simple, rapid,  and  easily standardizable are also the least realistic
and most  difficult  to extrapolate to natural ecosystems.   There seem
to  be  two  potential roles for model ecosystems  in hazard assessment.
The first  role  is  a general, nonrepresentational model (i.e., mixed
flask  culture).   This type  of system exhibits  universal ecosystem
properties without mimicking any particular natural  ecosystem.   Such a
system is  easily replicated,  simple, and cost efficient, and could be
used early in  the  testing  sequence to screen  chemicals  for their
ability to disrupt ecosystem processes.  The second role involves more
detailed  representation of  specific natural  ecosystems such as ponds,
lakes, streams, or  coastal  environments.   These  systems can provide
information on  the  magnitude and direction of  ecosystem effects, as
well  as  details  about sensitive  organisms,  sensitive processes,
indirect  effects,  and ecosystem  recovery.   Because of the greater
expense  and expertise required  to use such  model  ecosystems and
because  their  results are  not necessarily  generalizable  to other
ecosystem  types, these  systems are best used in  the later stages of
hazard assessment.

-------
                                 101


6.4  References

Armitage, B.  J.   1980.   Effects of temperature  on  periphyton  biomass
     and  community  composition  in the Browns  Ferry experimental
     channels.   In:  Microcosms  in Ecological Research,  J.  P.  Giesy,
     ed.  (in press).

Brocksen, R.  W., G.  E.  Davis, and C. E. Warren.  1968.   Competition,
     food  consumption,  and  produciton  of sculpins  and trout  in
     laboratory  stream communities.  J. Wildl. Manag.  32:51-75.

Brockway, D.  L., J.  Hill, IV, J.  R.  Maudsley,  and R.  R.  Lassiter.
     1979.   Development,  replicability, and  modeling  of naturally
     derived microcosms.  Int. J. Environ. Stud. 13:149-158.

Bott, T.  L.,  J.  T. Brock, C. E. Gushing,  S.  V.  Gregory,  P.  King,  and
     R.  C.  Petersen.   1978.   A  comparison of methods  for measuring
     primary  productivity and  community  respiration  in streams.
     Hydrobiologia 60:3-12.

Cooper,  D.  C.,  and B.  J.  Copeland.    1973.   Responses  of
     continuous-series estuarine microecosystems to point-source input
     variations.  Ecol.  Monogr. 43:213-236.

Cushing, C. E.,  and F. L.  Rose.  1970.  Cycling  of  zinc 65 by  Columbia
     River periphyton in  a closed  lotic microcosm.   Limnol.  Oceanogr.
     15:762-767.

Giddings, J.  M.  ,  and G.  K.   Eddlemon.   1979.  Some  ecological  and
     experimental  properties  of  complex aquatic microcosms.   Int.  J.
     Environ. Stud. 13:119-123.

Gorden,  R.  W.,   R. J. Beyers,  E.  P.  Odum, and R.  G.   Eagon.    1969.
     Studies  of  a simple  laboratory  microecosystem:   Bacterial
     activities  in a heterotrophic  succession.   Ecology 50:86-100.

Harte,  J.,  D. Levy,  E.  Lapan,  A.  Jassby, M.  Dudzik, and J.  Rees.
     1978.   Aquatic  microcosms  for assessment of effluent  effects.
     Electrical  Power Research Institute EA-936.

Henderson, R. S. ,  S.  V.  Smith, and E. C.  Evans.  1976.   Flow-through
     microcosms  for  simulation of  marine ecosystems:   Development and
     intercomparison of open coast and bay facilities.   Naval  Undersea
     Center, San Diego,  California, NUC-TP-519.

Isensee, A.  R.,  P.  C.  Kearney, E.  A.  Woolson, G. E.  Jones,  and  V.  P.
     Williams.   1973.   Distribution  of alkyl arsenicals in  model
     ecosystems.   Environ. Sci. Technol. 7:841-845.

Kania,  H.  J., R.  L.  Knight, and  R.  J. Beyers.  1976.  Fate and
     biological  effects  of mercury introduced  into artificial  streams.
     Environmental Protection Agency,  EPA-600/3-76-060.

-------
                                 102
Kehde, P.  M.,  and J.  L.  Wilhm.   1972.  The  effects  of grazing by
     snails on  community  structure  of  periphyton  in laboratory
     streams.   Am. Midi. Nat. 87:8-24.

Kevern, N.  R.,  and R. C. Ball.  1965.  Primary productivity and energy
     relationships  in  artificial  streams.    Limnol.    Oceanogr.
     10:74-87.

Kitchens, W. M.   1979.   Development of a  salt marsh  microecosystem.
     Int. J. Environ. Stud. 13:109-118.

Leffler,  J. W.   1977.   A Microcosm  Approach  to  an Evaluation of the
     Diversity-Stability Hypothesis.  Ph. D.  dissertation, U. Georgia.

Maki, A.  W., and H. E. Johnson. 1976.  Evaluation  of a toxicant on the
     metabolism of model stream communities.   J.  Fish. Res. Board Can.
     33:2740-2746.

Manuel,  C.  Y. ,  and G. W. Marshall.  1980.  Limitations on the use of
     microcosms for  predicting algal response to  nutrient enrichment
     in  lotic systems.   In:   Microcosms  in Ecological  Research,  J.  P.
     Giesy, ed.  (in press).

McConnell,  W. J.   1962.   Productivity relations  in carboy microcosms.
     Limnol. Oceanogr. 7:335-343.

Mclntire,  C. D.,  R.  L. Garrison,  H.  K.  Phinney,  and C.  E.  Warren.
     1964.   Primary  production  in  laboratory  streams.   Limnol.
     Oceanogr.  9:92-102.

Medine,  A.  J.,  D. B.  Porcella,  and  V.  D.  Adams.  1980.   Heavy metal
     and  nutrient effects on  sediment  oxygen demand in  three-phase
     aquatic microcosms.   In:   Microcosms in Ecological  Research, J.
     P.  Giesy, ed. (in press).
    alf,  R.  L. ,  G.  H.  Sangha,  and I.  P.  Kapoor.   1971.   Model
     ecosystem  for  the  evaluation of  pesticide  biodegradability <
     ecological  magnification.   Environ.  Sci.  Technol.  5:709-71;
Neame,  P.  A.,  and C.  R.  Goldman.   1980.   Oxygen uptake and production
     in  sediment-water  microcosms.   In:  Microcosms  in  Ecological
     Research, J.  P. Giesy,  ed. (in press).

Neill,  W.  E.    1975.    Experimental  studies  of  microcrustacean
     competition,  community composition, and  efficiency  of resource
     utilization.   Ecology  56:809-826.

Nixon,  S.  W.   1969.   A synthetic  microcosm.  Limnol.  Oceanogr.
     14:142-145.

-------
                                 103
Perez, K. T.,  G.  M.  Morrison, N.  F.  Lackie,  C.  A.  Oviatt,  and S.  W.
     Nixon.  1977.  The  importance of physical and  biotic scaling to
     the  experimental  simulation  of a  coastal  marine  ecosystem.
     Helgol.  Wiss. Meeresunters. 30:144-162.

Pilson,  M.  E.  Q.,  C.  A. Oviatt,  and S.  W. Nixon.   1980.   Annual
     nutrient  cycles  in  a marine  microcosm.    In:  Microcosms  in
     Ecological Research, J. P. Giesy, ed.  (in press).

Pritchard,  P.  H. ,  A. W.  Bourquin,  H.  L.  Frederickson,  and T.  Maziarz.
     1979.  System design factors affecting environmental fate studies
     in  microcosms,  pp.  251-272.  In:   Microbial  Degradation  of
     Pollutants  in Marine  Environments,  A. W.  Bourquin and P. H.
     Pritchard, eds.  EPA-600/9-79-012. pp. 251-272.

Strickland,  J. D.  H.,  0. Holm-Hansen, R.  W.  Eppley,  and R.  J.  Linn.
     1969.  The use of a deep tank in plankton ecology.   I. Studies of
     the growth and composition of phytoplankton crops at low  nutrient
     levels.  Limnol.  Oceanogr. 14:23-34.

Taub,  F.  B.   1969.  A  biological model of  a freshwater  community:  a
     gnotobiotic ecosystem.   Limnol. Oceanogr. 14:136-142.

Thomas,  C.  L.   1978.   A Microcosm  Study of  the  Interactions  of
     Nutrients and Cadmium in  Aquatic Systems.   M.  S.  Thesis, U.
     Georgia.

-------
METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS
  ON TERRESTRIAL POPULATION INTERACTIONS
        February 26 and 27, 1980
            Glenn W. Suter, II
                Chairman

     Environmental Sciences Division
      Oak Ridge National Laboratory

-------
                                106
                             PARTICIPANTS

                       G.  W.  Suter, II, Chairman
                     Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                WORKING GROUP A:  EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS
           ON MICROBIAL INTERACTIONS IN TERRESTRIAL SYSTEMS
R. M.  Atlas (Group Leader)          R. F. Strayer
University of Louisville            Oak  Ridge  National   Laboratory

Ralph Baker
Colorado State University
               WORKING GROUP B:  EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS ON
     INTERACTIONS OF  TERRESTRIAL PLANTS AND OF  PLANTS AND MICROBES
J. L. Ruehle (Group Leader)         A. S. Heagle
Forestry Sciences Laboratory        North  Carolina State  University

Udo Blum                            D. S. Shriner
North Carolina State University     Oak  Ridge  National   Laboratory
               WORKING GROUP C:  EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS ON
                  TERRESTRIAL ARTHROPOD INTERACTIONS
John All (Group Leader)        D. C. Force
University of Georgia          California State Polytechnic University

W. J. Webb (Recorder)          M. S. McClure
Oak Ridge National             Connecticut  Agricultural  Experiment
  Laboratory                      Station

David Craig                    D. M. Nafus
University of Illinois         U.S. Department of Agriculture
                               OBSERVERS
J. V. Nabholz                       A. S. Hammons
U.S. Environmental Protection       Oak  Ridge  National  Laboratory
  Agency

-------
                                107
                                SECTION 7

               METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS
                 ON TERRESTRIAL POPULATION INTERACTIONS
7.1  Introduction

     This  workshop considered  the  availability  and  utility of
multispecies  laboratory  systems   to  display  the  responses of
terrestrial population  interactions to toxic chemicals.  The workshop
was  divided  into three  working  groups.   Working Group A discussed
interactions  between   microbe populations  and  within microbial
communities.  Working  Group B discussed  interactions  between plant
populations  and  between plants  and  microbes.   Working Group C
discussed  interactions  between  arthropod populations  and  between
arthropods  and  plants.  Each working  group participated  in three
sessions.  The  objectives  of each session were outlined as  follows:

Working Session 1:  Identification and Description of Test   Systems

     Identify laboratory systems  that  display  terrestrial  population
interactions  or community properties.   If  possible,  organize these
systems  into  categories  that are sufficiently well  defined to permit
generalization  about  their potential  utility  in the  Environmental
Protection Agency's (EPA)  Toxic  Substances  Control  Act (TSCA) hazard
assessment processes.

     List  population  and  community  properties measurable  in  each
system.

Working Session II:  Evaluation of Test Systems

     Construct  a  matrix  with test systems on the horizontal axis and
experimental  criteria  on the  vertical axis.  For  each  intersection in
the matrix, evaluate that test system in terms of that criterion.   The
criteria are:

     Replicability

     Potential for interlaboratory transfer

     Sensitivity to chemical stress

     Generalizability to other terrestrial ecosystems

     Statistical basis for interpreting results

     Existence of standards for rejecting results (test failure)

-------
                                108


     Frequency of test failure

     Level of training and expertise required

     Time required

     Cost per chemical

     Others

Working Session III:  Protocol Development

     Based on our  experience  to date, it may be possible to write  a
first-approximation protocol  for testing chemicals  for effects on
certain population  interactions.   Of  course,  many questions would
remain to be  resolved before  these protocols could be adopted by the
EPA—these  questions  should  be identified  as  they arise  in  the
protocols.  An outline for a protocol could be as follows:

  I.  Hypotheses to be tested by this protocol

 II.  System design

          Size
          Abiotic and biotic components
          Light, temperature controls
          Strategies for maximizing replicability

III.  Test Procedure

          Controls
          Replicas per treatment; treatments per chemical
          Introduction of test chemical into the system
          Measurement of effects

 IV.  Analysis of Results

          Statistical basis for identifying effects
          Criteria for rejection of test results
          Interpretation of results
          Generalization of other terrestrial ecosystems

  V.  Developmental Needs

          How to validate tests
          Major questions that need to be resolved before
             finalizing protocol

     Many  other  systems  may  seem  appropriate  for  development.
Identify the systems that seem to be most appropriate and describe  the
types  of  development  that are necessary for each  (e.g., testing of
species, development of media).

-------
                                109
     What types of  modeling or analysis would be necessary to relate
test results to the real world, to generalize the results to a variety
of  environments,  or to  relate  the parameters measured to  socially
significant parameters?

     What simpler  tests could be  confirmed  by the results of this
multispecies test?  What more complex test might confirm the results
of this multispecies test?

7.2  Results and Discussion - Microbial Populations

     The microbial  process  working group  in  the terrestrial ecosystem
properties workshop (Section 5) considered  the  soil microbiota  in
terms  of  their contribution  to ecosystem processes,  that is, as a
black  box that changes  the  chemical characteristics  of  its  substrate.
In this workshop,  Working Group A considered the internal structure of
the black box  at  two  levels.  The first  level consists of  the basic
interactions between  pairs of  populations:   predation, parasitism,
competition, antagonism,  and mutualism.   The second level  is  the
community characteristics that  are immediate products of population
interactions:   taxonomic composition,  diversity,  succession,  and
resistance to  invasion.   Each  of  these  areas is  discussed in  the
following sections.

7.2.1  Population Interactions

     The feedback mechanisms  associated with population interactions
tend to  moderate  the  effects of  changes in the soil  environment
resulting in a weak homeostasis.  Disruption of these interactions can
be  experimentally  examined.   The  potential  utility  of  these
experimental systems for testing the effects of chemicals is evaluated
in Table 7.1.

     (1)  Predation and parasitism.   Predation and  parasitism  of
bacteria can only be studied  with  reasonable  ease  in liquid cultures.
Addition  of  a clay suspension  to the  cultures  may provide  an
approximation of  conditions in the soil.  An example of such a culture
system is the  one  devised by Roper and Marshall  (1978).  This system
could  be used with  Escherichia coli  as the  host and Bdellovibrio as
the parasite or with  a protozoan as the predator.   The system should
be run in the  dark  at 25°C for 12 d.  The response parameter is the
concentration of  host  and predator or parasite cells  measured  over
time with and without the test chemical.  The purity and viability of
the cultures must be monitored.

     While the procedures for this test system are well established,
the  applicability  of  the  test  to  real world conditions is
questionable.   The  importance of  these processes  in the soil  and the
generality of responses measured in this system need to be determined.
Field validation  of this system would be difficult.

-------
no
















to
z
o
t—
u
LU
y

Z.
0
p—


=5

O
Q.
— 1
1— 1
CO
o
ce
£

ce
o
u.

00
LU
r—
to
to
1—

o
z
o
1—


	 1
^£

LU

O

^
i
i


1-4
LU
9


















in
*> S-
in re
O P—
O r—
O
•o
01 in
E >,
•r- re
t— -a
OTO f~*
C Ol Ol
•p- «- 01
e V- t.
•--30)
re o" o>
S- OJ T3
p— S- >^

0)

Ol -p-
3 re
01
fc. V
u. o

in
u

+j

11


>^
i
re
£_
Ol
C
01
u

>>
>
in
01
to

j_ ^
o o
re t-
i— t Ol
re o »-
•p- .Q in
•u re c
c r— re
01 s- s-
•U UJ *>
o -u
0- C

>,
^
JD
re
u
a.
at
ee
re
.21
'^
0
O.









in
01
H-




o o o o
0 000
«r x m CM CM



o r^ ^- CM
ro <-H «•



to to t/) to
CQ CO CQ CO







£ — i X — I





in
<: 
> > > u
1 11?
(— 1












13 z I =>









ac z x i









z or z ar




^ IT) rH C\J i— 1







TJ
C J3
10 C in
E O C E
C in •!- 01 in
o -p- +J o *p-
•t- *> -r- in O C
*> -p- *J C C O
nJ in o> o> re O)
•o re CL f J= re
01 S- E U *> +>
s. re o -I- 01 c
Q. Q. O — 1 f. «


o o o
0 00
CM CM O X
r-l


oo r^ o o
CM PO tO
A


i/> to to to
CO 00 CO CO







—I —III



c
0 0
•r- 1/1
in a  > i
01 o o i
i-T3 Z. 'Z. 1
0) C «t  =)







3 => =1 =5









X X Z X









Z =5 Z S




CM ro in in




in
"a!

ai

in
•r- C C
in o o
i— re -p- -p-
re 4J 4J in
> in re in
•t- -p- i — 0)
> 0) 3 u
s- c a. u
3 3 O 3
i/> u. a. to











































1

o
**
*"^
0)
]^
*-*
1-1

E
o
u


ai

"re
u
re
c.
o

^J
p
3
1
re
ai
t.
at

u
&
X
a>
01
+J C t-
re » o
t. 0
jc ai c o)
O)*O ^ ^ C
•p- O O C »P-
XZ_J=3 -U
re
s.
xii li=s re*








































































•o
ai

i(-
u
Ol
o.
w>


Ol

in
in
o
z.
J3

-------
                                Ill
     (2)  Competition.  While microbial competition undoubtedly occurs
in  the  soil,  it  is  very difficult to measure.   We  recommend that
competition be  tested in flow-through systems with defined  limiting
nutrients  that  model aquatic  systems  more  appropriately  than
terrestrial systems.

     (3)   Mutualism.   Some  microbial species enter  into stable
mutualistic relationships  that  perform  ecological functions that
cannot  be performed  by  the individual  symbionts.   Toxicants can
disrupt these mutualistic relationships.

     (a)   Lichens.    The  algal-fungal symbiosis  that constitutes
lichens  has  been shown  to  be sensitive  to air pollutants and to
physical  factors  that cause imbalance in growth rates of constituent
species.   Lichens are important  components of tundra  ecosystems  and
appear to  contribute  significantly to nitrogen dynamics  in coniferous
forests of the Pacific Northwest.

     The  primary  response  parameters  are  respiration, measured  as
either 02  consumption or C02  output, photosynthesis,  which may  be
measured  as 14C02 assimilation,  and  the ratio of photosynthesis  to
respiration (P/R).   In addition, N2  fixation can  be measured by
acetylene  reduction   in  lichens  that contain  N2-fixing  blue-green
algae.   Test  chemicals may be applied as  gases,  mists,  or  soaking
solutions.  Care  must be  taken to  ensure that  the  experimental
conditions are  appropriate,  that  is,  that the control thalli  remain
healthy.

     Lichens  are  particularly useful  for  measuring the effects  of
chemicals  transported in the atmosphere.  The  P/R ratio  may  be a  good
indicator  of  responses that  lead to overgrowth of one  symbiont by the
other.   The mode of  response  of lichens  to  toxicants  is poorly
understood and their  sensitivity has only been demonstrated for sulfur
oxides and gaseous oxidants.

     (b)  Methanogenesis.  Methane production can occur in chronically
wet  soils,  rice paddies, swamps,  and marshes.   The  "methanogenic
consortium" performs  interspecies H2  transfer between heterotrophic,
anaerobic  bacteria and H2-consuming methanogenic bacterial symbionts.
Methanobacteriurn strain M.O.H. and  the so-called S organism are used
in  the  test  system  described by Bryant  et  al. (1967).  This  mixed
culture  converts  ethanol to methane according to the  following
reaction.

          S Organism                        ^—  C05

     CH3CH2OH     CH3COOH  + H2-
                                ^\    /
                                                  Methanogen

-------
                                112
     The S organism  is  inhibited by its own product, H2.   But the H2
is needed by  the  methanogen,  which converts it to CH4 and thus keeps
H2 levels low enough for the S organism to continue converting ethanol
to H2 and acetate.   A chemical may disrupt this system by affecting
either the S organism or the methanogen.

     The test could  use the procedure of Miller and Wolin (1974) with
the two membered  culture growing on ethanol, under strictly anaerobic
conditions.   The  test chemicals  should be dissolved  in a prereduced
mineral  salts  solution  and  introduced  into the  culture.   Methane
production should be measured using the syringe displacement method
(Healy and Young 1979) or gas chromatography.   Exposure to any 02 will
completely stop methanogenesis.  Thus,  rates  of zero are suspect and
should be repeated.

     The test only applies to the few terrestrial  ecosystems where CH4
is naturally produced, such as landfills, swamps, bogs, rice paddies,
and flooded soils.

     (4)   Antagonism.    Some   plant  diseases  are  precluded by
antagonistic relationships between microorganisms normally associated
with the plant  and  pathogenic populations.   For example, Rhizoctonia
sol am'  is  a common  plant  pathogen having a wide  host range.   The
presence of Trichoderma spp.  in  soil associated with  the host induces
suppressiveness to  R.  solani, effectively  controlling the  disease.
Similar  suppressiveness  may  be  induced in  certain  soils  by  the
presence of  fluorescent Pseudomonas which  are antagonistic to the
Fusarium  (vascular)  wilt  pathogens.    Pseudomonas  spp.   are  also
important in plant growth responses.  We hypothesize that the addition
of a test chemical can alter  the host-pathogen-microbial interactions
characteristic of these systems.

     Soils have become  suppress!ve to  plant pathogens when crops are
grown  in monoculture.   A  model  system  that demonstrates  this
phenomenon  consists  of  repeatedly  planting  radishes  at weekly
intervals in  soil  infested with  R. solani  (Hem's et  al. 1978;  Rouse
and Baker 1978;  Hem's et al.  1979; Wijetunga  and Baker 1979).   In  a
typical  experiment containing an initially  low inoculum density, 100%
disease incidence occurs after three replants.  By the fifth replant,
however, disease  incidence  has decreased to almost zero.  Associated
with this is  the  increase in  propagule  density of  Trichoderma spp.
from an initial density of 102 propagules/g to 106 propagules/g at  the
end  of  5  weeks.   The  effects  of a  toxic substance  on  these
interactions can be  examined.

     To maximize  replicability,  certain factors  of environment and
inoculum  are  important.   The most important  environmental  factor
influencing the system is soil pH.   Trichoderma is most active  in acid
soils.  Thus,  the soil  should have  a natural  or adjusted pH  of  around
6.  Effects of  the  added chemical  on  soil  pH  would  have to  be  taken

-------
                                113


into consideration.   The  other  important  factor  is  the  size of  the  R.
solani inoculum.   When  propagules (sclerotial) of  size >  250 urn  are
used as  inoculum  in alkaline soils, suppressiveness  is not induced,
and  there is  no   influence  on  propagule density  of  Trichoderma.
However,  suppressiveness  is  readily  induced  in acid  soils  when
propagules of  size > 250  urn are  used  as  inoculum.  If  propagules of
size < 250 urn  are used,  suppressiveness  is  induced and Trichoderma
spp. increase in either alkaline or acid soils.

     (a)  Test procedure.   Ten  containers, each  with  100 g of soil  at
a matric  potential  of 0.7 bar,  are each seeded with 32 radish seeds.
These are arranged in a radiating pattern with  the aid of a vacuum
seed planter.   In  five  of the  containers, inoculum of  R.  solani  is
introduced into the center.  Five others are  left as noninoculated
controls.  After a 1-week incubation period,  a  conducive  index (CI)
can  be  determined  (described  later).   The  inoculum  is grown  in  a
chopped  potato-soil  mix  and  is composed of both large and small
propagules.   If acid soil is  available, this mixture  can be used.   If
alkaline  soil  is   used,  the large propagules  (>  250  urn)  should be
screened  out.   Containers  are  covered with  clear plastic during
incubation to maintain a relatively constant matric potential.

     The chemical  to be tested can be mixed into the soil  at different
concentrations at  the time  that  the  initial  matric  potential is
established.   One  week  after the  first seeding  and after  the  CI  is
determined,  the plants are uprooted.   All  replicates of each treatment
are combined and the soil redistributed (as before) in the containers.
Thirty-two radish  seeds  are planted again in  each container.   This
process  is repeated at  weekly intervals.   Usually  the  soil develops
suppressiveness in about 5 weeks  (replants).   At this time, fresh
inoculum can be introduced  into the center of the pot and the CI  can
be determined again.

     During the period  of the test,  ambient laboratory temperatures
are satisfactory for incubation.  Light is supplied but need not be of
high intensity because  radishes are  not grown for  more than a  week.

     Development of  suppressiveness  in the  soil  during the course of
the  test is  associated  with  increase  in  propagule density  of
Trichoderma spp.   Some  soils  in nature contain  low numbers  of  this
microorganism  (102  propagules/g  in  Fort  Collins  clay  loam).   One
naturally suppressive  soil  from  Bogata,  Columbia,  contains  8 x 10s
propagules/g.   There  are  some soils  that do not  contain Trichoderma
spp. , and, in  these,  conidia of this  fungus should be  introduced at
the beginning of the test.

     (b)   Analysis  of results.   Response  parameters  include  CI and
disease incidence  (DI) for radishes grown in  monoculture,  the inoculum
density of R.  solani,  and the propagule density  of Trichoderma spp.
during the course  of the test.

-------
                                114


     CI is determined by the following equation:
where A  is the  number of  healthy plants  in the noninoculated control
and B  is  the  number of healthy plants  in  the inoculated treatment.
The limits of  the  index are 0 to  1:0.   If the CI is 0, the soil is
completely suppressive,  and if the  CI  is  1.0,  it  is  completely
conducive.  DI is computed similarly:
     The difference in CI and DI lies in the experimental design.  The
CI  is  computed when inoculum is introduced  into  the center of  the
container and  measures not  only inoculum potential  but also the
ability of  the pathogen  to grow in  soil.  The  DI is measured when
inoculum  is distributed  randomly in soil after mixing  and measures
largely inoculum potential.  There  is no  rationale for  transformation
of  raw data accumulated  to  propagule  densities  of  R.  solani and
Trichoderma spp.  A graphic display over time is sufficient.

     In most instances,  differences (treated below)  are  so dramatic
that statistics need not  be  applied to  confirm differences.  However,
analysis of variance can be used if needed.

I.   Criteria  for rejection of test results.   When the  test is
     done   properly  and   essential  parameters   adequately
     controlled, results  in  nontreated  controls are  predictable.
     The  initial CI  is usually 0.85± in  a conducive soil.   DI
     increases in inoculated treatments and is near 1.0 after the
     third  replanting.  By the  fifth replanting,  DI  is  quite low
     and  may  be near  0.1.   The inoculum density of R.   solani
     rises  until the  third replanting,  diminishing subsequently
     to undetectable levels by the fifth week if small propagules
     are  used   initially.   Trichoderma increases  from  barely
     detectable levels to near  108 propagules/g  soil  in  the
     5-week period  in  inoculated treatments.  If  these  phenomena
     do not develop  in the controls, the  validity of the  test  is
     questionable.

2.   Interpretation of results.  The test chemical  may change
     these  interactions by modifying the CI or DI,  which would
     indicate  changes  in  the  antagonistic  interaction of R.
     solani and Trichoderma  spp.  Changes in these  interactions
     can  be precisely monitored and,  thus, readily detected.

3.   Generalization to other terrestrial  systems.  Currently,  in
     the  research  area of biological control of plant  pathogens

-------
                                115
     in  soil,  interest  is  being centered  on two  groups  of
     biocontrol agents that  apparently  contribute substantially
     to the  level of suppressiveness found  in soils.  Species of
     Trichoderma comprise one  of these  groups.   These fungi are
     microparasites and  are  representative of  this  type  of
     antagonistic  relationship among microorganisms  found  in
     soil.

     (c)  Development needs.   The test  may be validated in the field
to see if a chemical has the impact observed in the laboratory.   There
appear to be no major technical  questions requiring resolution  before
using the process.

7.2.2  Community Properties

     There are two  types of  community properties.  The first consists
of properties, such as  fungistasis  and survival, that represent the
action of the community as a unit on an indicator species.   The second
type  consists  of  properties  such  as  diversity,  succession,  and
relative population levels  that indicate  the structural  state of the
community.

     (1)  Survival  test.   After a  period  of microbial  activity in
soil, environmental  conditions become  less  conducive  for continued
growth and microorganisms produce propagules.  The length of time that
these propagules are capable of surviving is a  function of numerous
biotic and abiotic  factors.   The hypothesis of  this test  is that a
chemical may influence survival  directly, by acting on the  introduced
microorganisms, or indirectly by acting on the soil community.

     Small containers, each  containing  100 g (or less) of nonsterile
soil, can be  infested  with the test organisms.   These are  incubated
under standardized  conditions  of moderate  temperature  and  moisture.
No light is required.

     Controls with  and without the  introduced organism should ensure
that  propagule density of  the introduced  microorganism  is being
monitored and  not  the contaminants.   Five replicates should  be
sufficient.

     The elements that may  be found in a typical survival  curve are
diagrammed in Figure 7.1.

-------
                                116
Survival
(per unit)
            Increase in propagule density
            Introduction of
           ^microorganism into
            soil
Relatively rapid death of
propagules ill adapted to
the soil environment

Long-term survival
of resistant unit
                              Time                Extinction point

                 Figure 7.1.   Typical survival curve.
     When a microbial  population  is introduced into soil, propagule
density may increase because of the availability of substrates  in the
soil.  Some microorganisms  may be introduced with the  substrate on
which growth  took place,  for example, dead  tomato  stems containing
microsclerotia of VerticiIlium dahlea.   In such cases,  decay of the
substrate releases the  propagule  units so that there is an apparent
increase in density when  the individual  units are counted in assays.

     After  this  period,  there  appears to  be a  relatively  rapid
increase  in  death rate because  of  the  different capacities  for
survival  among the propagules.  A proportion  of the units may persist
for  relatively  long  periods and  are  relatively  resistant to  the
insults inflicted by the soil environment.

     Because these resistant propagules  represent long-term survival
and  are  likely to survive in soils in nature, they should be assayed
for  persistance.   Thus, after the system  has  reached equilibrium, the
test  chemicals  should  be  introduced  into  the  soil  at various
concentrations.

     Test microorganisms should be  selected that are typical members
of soil  microbial  communities.  Also,  techniques should be available
for  determining propagule  densities as aliquots of soil are assayed
over  time.  We suggest bacteria  such  as  Rhizobium and  Agrobacterium
tumefaciens as likely  candidates  because  their cell densities in soil
can  be followed quantitatively with the amino fluorescence technique.
Rapid assays, selective for Rhizoctonia  solani  (a fungus), are also
available.  In this case,  the persistence of distinct propagule types
(large and  small) can  be  followed.  The  small  propagules would be
particularly susceptible to insults.

-------
                                117


     If  the  chemical reduces survival,  it  would be detected as  an
increase  in  death rate  over time in  comparison with a nontreated
control.   The  extinction point  need  not  be  measured because
interpolations and extrapolations  may be obtained when  the  data  are
transformed by methods  described  later.  Although the  time  required
for  the test would  depend on  the  test organism,  this obviously
shortens  the  time  to a matter  of weeks rather  than months or years.

     Various  transformations  have  been  suggested.   The  semi log
transformation assumes  that propagules  die at a logarithmic rate:

                          In y = yQ + rt

     The  symbol y  equals the number of  viable  units  at a given time
(t), and y  equals the number of viable units at 0 time.  The rate (r)
is negative because it describes the rate of death.

     It may also be assumed that susceptibility of propagules to death
follows   normal  distribution  in   time.   Thus,  the  log-probit
transformation may  also be a  legitimate  candidate  for mathematical
descriptions  of survival.   In  practice, the proportion  of surviving
propagules in probit  units is  plotted  against  time on  a logarithmic
scale.

     Research  has  yet  to be  done to  establish which  of  these
transformations is better for data analysis.  One study indicated that
they were complementary.  In an analysis of data obtained from various
examples  in the literature,  the log-probit  transformation appeared to
give  a  better performance;  that  is,  it seemed  to  give TS50 (time
required  for 50% of the propagules to die) values and TS10 points much
closer to those observed in nature.

     Slopes of  transformed  curves  may be  subject to  regression
analyses  to  obtain   slope  (r)  values  for comparisons.   Test
microorganisms  can  be  selected that  are  representative  of the
microbial community.

     (2)  Fungi stasis.  Fungi stasis is  the  failure  of viable fungal
spores to germinate in soil.   Because the fungistatic activity of soil
is  removed  by sterilization of the  soil,  anti-fungal  activity is
believed  to be  related  to the  activities of other microorganisms in
the soil and is probably related to tha ability of the soil  microflora
to withstand  invasion of  alien  species.  Several mechanisms  have been
proposed, but a satisfactory explanation of fungistasis  has  yet to be
accepted.  This test  system  is designed to determine if potentially
toxic chemicals  will  alter  the  interrelationship  between  fungal
propagules and the rest of the  soil  microbial  community.

     The test should be run in  the dark at room temperature.   The test
chemical  is added to  the fungistatic soil,  which is then placed in a
Petri dish.   A  suspension of spores  from species  such as Fusarium

-------
                                118


sol am or Aspergi11 us flavus (nutrient dependent) is passed through a
0.20-jjm pore size filter  so  that the spores can  be  retained on the
filter surface.  Final  spore density should be ~2000  per  mm2.   The
filter is then  buried  in  the soil, and the  Petri  dish is covered.
Plates are incubated at room temperature  ~14 d (a time series may be
run), and  the  percent  of fungal  spores  that  have germinated  is
determined microscopically after staining the  filter with  Lactophenol
cotton blue.   At least 1000 total  spores  per filter should be counted.

     The following series of control tests should be run to elucidate
the nature of the test chemical's effects:

     Steam sterilized soil      Fungal  spores  should  germinate.
                                Potential  toxicant  may act  at
                                this level  and  prevent spore
                                germination.

     Chemically sterilized      Plus 10 to 100 ul of ethanol/g of
     soil                       soil.  All  spores should germinate.
                                (Other mixtures that may be more
                                reliable,  such as amino  acid-
                                carbohydrates,  should be tested.)

     Non-sterile soil           Concentration of the test  chemi-
                                cal  equals  zero.   No,  or  few,
                                spores should germinate.

     Soil  not  fungi static,  as evidenced by  a  high degree of spore
germination in  non-sterile soil in  the absence of the  test substance,
would cause rejection of  the test.   If fungal  spores germinate  in the
presence  of the  test  substance,   then  the natural  fungi static
properties of  the  soil  have  been adversely affected by the chemical.
Because  fungi stasis  in  a soil  is  strongly  correlated with the
activities  of  the indigenous  microflora,  the test  substance  has
interfered with the  interactions  between  these  microflora and the
invading  fungal  spores.   Fungi stasis has been found  in all  natural
soils that  have been examined.  The degree  of  fungistasis  is  limited,
however,  in  soils  high in organic  matter  such as peats and  mucks.
Neither deep subsoils nor very acidic soils are fungistatic.

     Laboratory  development,  interlaboratory  testing,  and  field
validation are  necessary.   To our knowledge the effect of  any toxicant
on  fungistasis has  yet to be  assessed  in this manner.  The  system
needs  development  to determine  adequate  spore density per  filter,
length of incubation, soil moisture  levels, etc.

     (3)  Population levels.    Relative population  levels  of  microbial
species  and taxonomic  or  functional groups could  be determined as a
measure  of  interference of toxicants with  normal  population balance
mechanisms.   Because of  the difficulty of  enumerating species,  the
following ratios are probably most  useful.

-------
                                 119
     1.   Fungus/bacteria ratio.  Enumerate bacteria and fungi by
          direct  counting  with acridine orange  epifluorescence
          counting.  This does not indicate viability.

     2.   Viable  fungal  propagule/bacteria   ratio.   Enumerate
          fungi and  bacteria  by viable  plate  count  methods.   Use
          Saboraud Medium  for  fungi;  Trypticase soy agar  for
          bacteria.

     3.   R/S ratio.    Enumerate bacteria  by direct  count or
          viable bacteria (plate count) in rhizosphere (R) and in
          root-free soil (S).

     Measure these ratios  in  soils and perform ANOVA to determine if
addition  of  toxicant significantly  alters  the  ratio.   It is not
possible  to  state the ecological significance of  these ratios,  but
they are generally believed to be important.

     (4)  Succession.  Succession  is  an important process  that can be
measured  only  at great  cost.   Significance of  deviations   of
successional processes  often  would  be  difficult or  impossible  to
evaluate.  An exception would occur with preemptive  colonization by
microorganisms,  such  as  Lactobacillus,  that  prevent further
successional events.   Preemptive colonization would be easily detected
by monitoring other processes  such as respiration.   Therefore, it does
not  appear  reasonable to examine  successional events for microbial
populations  in  soils or on  leaf  litter.   Some  early successional
stages  can   be  examined in  flow-through  systems  and  should be
considered for aquatic ecosystem testing.

     (5)  Diversity.   Diversity is  a community-level parameter that
may  be used to measure stress in microbial  communities.   Stressed
communities  often  have low diversities that can be  quantitatively
assessed by  a variety of diversity  indices  such  as  the  Shannon Index.
Almost any substance  can  cause a shift in diversity in the microbial
community.   Normally, the  diversity rapidly returns to  its original
level  following a  minor  environmental insult.    Exposure to a
persistent toxic  substance may result  in a  prolonged depression  in
microbial diversity.

     Diversity can  be assessed  using the  techniques  of numerical
taxonomy  (Kaneko  et  al.  1977) or  perhaps by direct microscopic
observation  (Staley  et al. 1980).   If  numerical taxonomy is  used,
numerous  isolates  will be needed.   Diversity  may be  used  for
monitoring the long-term major  impact of a  toxic substance.   Measured
changes  in  diversity can  potentially be applied to  all microbial
communities,  but the  consistency  of the response between communities
and its validity in the field  are unproven.

-------
                                120


7.3  Results and Discussion - Plant and Microbe Populations

     Working Group B  considered systems that  display interactions
between species  of  vascular plants and between vascular  plants  and
microbes.   These classes  of interactions  are closely related because
of the  dependence  of  the competitive ability  of a  plant on its
relation to microbial  symbionts.   Because  there are no existing test
systems for these classes of interactions, synopses of potential test
systems are presented that are derived from the research experience of
the working group participants.   Each proposed system was evaluated
and rated by consensus of Working Group B.  The results are presented
in Table 7.2.

7.3.1  Interference

     Interference between plant populations  includes competition for
space, light, water,  and  mineral  nutrients as well  as allelopathy  and
other modifications  of the medium.   The best  understood  method for
examining this process in the  laboratory is to  sow  seeds  of two plant
species into pots.   Two designs are possible.   In the additive design,
the density of one  species  is  kept constant while different densities
of a  second  species are  added resulting in a variable total density.
In the  replacement  series,  the total density  is  kept constant while
the proportions of the two species are varied.

     Before a pair of species can be used, preliminary studies must be
performed to  determine appropriate  pot  size,  nutrient levels, and
total densities.  Density selection  is based on the following model.

                        1  ••   ' in
          Yield
                    Density

      In  Phase  I,  little or no interference  occurs  and  yield  is  simply
the  product  of density and age-specific plant  weight.   In Phase  II,
yield  is constant, but individual plant weight declines because of
interference.   This  is the optimum density  range  for the test system.
In  Phase III,  yield  is constant, but  mortality  occurs.  Controls
should  include each  species  grown alone.   To  permit allelopathic
interactions,  a sandy loam soil  should be  used,  and watering should
not  leach the  pots.

      The following parameters  should be considered:

      1.   Number  of  individuals  for each species.

-------
121











o
t—l
1—
o
o:
UJ
z


r—
z
«J
1
z
1
G_

Q
I
UJ
CO
o
ce
0
t-4
I
I—
1
_J
o.

ce
o
LL.
LU

V)
^»


UJ
(—

LU
O

•z.
o
t—

g!

LU

Q






(—

ce



CM



LU
_j
CO
^
1—















5_ r—
at re
CL u
*-> E
in 0>
0 J=
U W
0)

K
1*- Ol
0 C
i — C
Ol T-
> re
01 S_
—i *->

u
c
01

or
01
Lu

























>,
C
o

re
s.
o

re
i.
01
c
H-l







































U)
<0

o

^
/-x
it?
TD
•o
1

3
cr
?!
01
3


re
V-
„_
0
in
U
^J
V)
Q
55



£
re

01
c
O)
^
•i—
•P

in
C
Ol





^
Ol
1*-
in
c
!_






4->




re
u.

..
a.
ai





.^

o

o.









4->

a>
t—




o
o
o
r^.




UD


1/1
CO






1




1


is
< CJ





re








a:













z
























rH








S
ai u
u in
C 01
ai t-
S. 1
Ol S-
t $
ai o
c "o
i—* "^f

o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o
o in o CM o .-i ID
rH PO CM i-H




00 <&• ^* rH rH rH CM
CM 00 rH CM CM CM ^~

•a ~a
CO UO I/) tO 1/1 l/> tO
oo z s: co oo co co






z> z s: — ' — ' —i — '





^ < < < *t <
> > > > > > 1
o o o o o o i
I i i ill1





U u
^C T* 1C ^ • _j s"







= 3. = 3: z a: s:













£ £ £ z 3: z z























01
ro CM CM CM CM CM CM





01
01 T3
01 Ol E O
re re 3 *>


t- i- t- I -U r— C
3 E i- t- E « r-
4->V>O OI-33Q4J
r— O U UOI'^fi-OlO
•r~ £» ore oc M re ji 4^
(-U-OS. *J O — 01 O O
01— coiuufj: i- o
«£ E UJ i UJ I 0:300:








































,3
^

O
•o

in
in
g


U)

in

1

o
0


c
0


re
u


CL
D.
re





01
a.

4->

£

•u
in
Q
D.

c
Ol O


t- 0 0
.C 01 C U
CCT3 » J<
5I3S t
Ol

^
z af -li i» re .






































































in

u

<->
u
Q

a

01
in
3

C
ai
ai
L.
o>
•o
o
o
01

m
at
in

o




























































o

lt_

u
ai
Q.


in
Ol

U
ai
Q.



fmm

Dl

•c

O
C

at

re
01
re
N

f
U

(J
































in
cu
3

r—
3
U

§
0
o
c
•^

c
3
c


E

•o
c
re
in
'JZ

re

in
01

o


•o
ai

•r~
3
o-
01
i.

in


Ol
c

c
re
c-


it-
o

01

01

JZ
Ol


5^
O
re
o
J3
ro
T
ai
c



o
,_
re
•u
c
ai

o
Q.
01
**

c
re

Ol
re


re

re

in
i
o
u
1!

E


3
U
o
c



re

u
L.
Ol



L)

t-


•""
ai


T3

3
i

Ol
c

.(3
re
a>
iE
ai

-------
                                122
     2.   Shoot  and root dry  weight; shoot  weight alone  is
          frequently adequate.

     3.   Nitrogen concentration of tissues.

     4.   Nitrogen fixation rate of legumes.

     5.   Concentration of  other nutrient  ions  (P,  K,  Ca, Fe,
          Mg).

     6.   Seed production - if time allows.

     From these  data,  species  ratios, mean weight per plant, and  mean
weight per pot should be calculated.

     The following  pairs  of plant species  are potentially useful  in
this type of system:

     1.   Unstable perennial systems

               Trifolium subterraneum - Lotium sp.
               Trifolium repens  cv  Tillman -  Festuca arundinacea
               cv Kentucky 31;

     2.   Early successional systems

               Helianthus annus - Digitaria sanguinail's
               Sorghum halepense - Bromus  sp.
               Erigeron canadensis - Aster pilosus
               Ambrosia sp.  - Amaranthus retroflexus;

     3.   Agricultural systems

               Zea mays - Sorghum halepense
               Avena sativa - Hordeum sativum
               Glycine max - Panicum sp.
               Helianthus annuus  cv Russian mammoth - Amaranthus
                  retroflexus;

     4.   Successional systems (later stages)

               Andropogon virginicus  - Pinus  taeda (seedlings
                  inoculated with mycorrhizae).

     Seed  germination  is  good  for  these species,  except for
Amaranthus,  which needs a  temperature greater than 25°C; Ambrosia,
which  needs a cold period; and Sorghum halepense (Abdul-Wahab and  Rice
1967).   It  helps to remove  "seed coats" for consistent  germination of
Helianthus.

-------
                                 123
     Experiments with these  species  can be completed within  8  to 10
weeks.    Information  regarding  the  above listed  combinations  are
available in Harper (1977) and Rice (1974 and 1977).

     The clover-fescue pair was considered the best single candidate.
Experimental  procedures   have  been  developed,  and  results   using
pollutant gases as stressors  have been published.  A synopsis of the
proposed procedures for this test is presented  below:

     Conduct the test in  a greenhouse with 2- to 2.5-L capacity
     plastic pots  and a  sandy loam-quartz sand mixture at a 3:2
     ratio  by  volume.   The temperature  range should be 23°  to
     27°C.   Water as needed  (use  tensiometer  check), but water
     all  plants   short   of   saturation.    Fertilize  with
     VPHF - 5-15-10,   a   commercially  available,  water-soluble
     fertilizer with micronutrients, or equivalent, at a rate of
     15  g/3.8   L  H20 in  a split  application -  100 mL/pot at
     seeding  and  100  mL/pot  10 d  after germination.   After
     germination thin to eight plants per pot.

     Avoid  hot  summer months.   Use supplemental  lights (mercury
     and sodium vapor) during a 14- to 16-h period to provide 70%
     full sunlight; analyze the growing medium prior to the test
     (cation exchange capacity, pH,  mechanical analysis,  organic
     matter, ion content, etc.); be sure that the N level  is not
     so  high as to suppress N-fixation by Rhizobium  (this  also
     keeps  fescue  in check); add Rhizobium inoculum prior to  the
     test  to  standardize legume  performance;  4  weeks  after
     germination, add the test compound, then harvest the tops of
     the plants 2  weeks  later; and  determine  dry  weight  of the
     total biomass for each species.

7.3.2  Mycorrhizae-Plant  Interactions

     Test  systems  are proposed  for both  of  the major classes  of
mycorrhizae-endomycorrhizae and ectomycorrhizae.

     (1)  Endomycorrhizae-grass.  This  test  incorporates effects  on
formation of the endomycorrhizal association as well as direct effects
on  cereal   crops.  A synopsis  of  the proposed  test  procedure  is
presented below:

     Several candidate grasses could be used:   sorghum (2 to 3 plants
     per pot),  millet (2  to 3 plants per pot), and corn (1 plant per
     pot).    This  test would  be  run in  the  greenhouse with  pots,
     growing medium, temperature  range,  lights and water similar  to
     those  specified for  the  plant interference test.  Fertilization
     could   also be  the  same except that  phosphorus  levels  must be
     maintained below 45  ppm.   A  multiple species mixture of Glomus
     spp. in the  form of root fragments (infected) and adhering soil
     containing fungus spores can be used as inoculum (Kormanik et al.

-------
                                 124
     1977).   Add  the  root-soil  inoculum  to  growing medium (1:10 by
     volume) prior to filling pots.

     Ten days after germination of the plants, add the test chemical.
     Twelve weeks after seeding, terminate the test, remove the roots
     and rinse them carefully;  remove 2 to 4  random root samples (5
     g/sample fresh wt.)  from  the  roots from each pot.   Clear and
     stain the roots by  the method described  in  Kormanik et al.  (in
     press).   By microscopic examination, determine  the frequency and
     degree  of  vesicular/arbuscular  colonization  in  the  selected
     feeder root  segments.

     (2)  Ectomycorrhizae-conifer.  This  system  is  well  studied  and
mycorrhizal  inoculum may  soon  be  commercially available.   A synopsis
of the proposed procedure for this  test is presented below.

     Employ  standard   tree  containers  (125  cc  capacity  each
     cavity), loblolly  pine seed, and  peat-virmiculite  growing
     medium  (1:1  by volume).   Prepare a vegetation  inoculum of
     Pi soli thus tinctorius dried to a bulk density of 350 g/L and
     mix to  a ratio of  1:15 in  the  medium.   Water as needed.
     Fertilize  at  3  to  4  week  intervals  (NPK  =  200:20:40).
     Greenhouse  temperature should be  24 to  27°C.   Supplement
     light  as needed  to give  a  14- to  16-h day.   Use  an
     uninoculated  control.  Add the  test  chemical   at seeding.
     After 1  or  2 weeks,  remove  5 to 10  seedlings  per tray and
     visually examine  the  roots  for percent ectomycorrhizal
     development.

     A growing medium for ectomycorrhizae is described in Marx  (1969),
inoculation  procedures  are  described in  Marx and Bryan  (1975), and
container production of  inoculated  seedlings is described  in  Ruehle
and Marx (1977).

7.3.3  Rhizobium-Legume Interaction

     While the clover-fescue interference test provides a test  of the
rhizobium-legume  interaction,  a  test may be  desired  that does not
include a second plant species to complicate interpretation of  results
or that simulates  a legume  row  crop.  The proposed procedure for this
test is presented below.

     Start  with   a  very  low  nitrogen soil  medium.   Rhizobium
     inoculum  should  be added  to   soil  prior  to  potting.
     Watering, growth  medium,  pot  size,  light,  and greenhouse
     temperature  can  be  the  same as  in the  interference test.
     Seed  four beans  (Bush-Blue Lake 290) and thin to one per
     pot.  The test chemical  should  be added  at  planting.   The
     test  should  be  run  with and without  N  fertilization.   Run
     the  test  for 21 d.   Measure  the  above-ground biomass
     production,  describe visible signs of injury  to  the plant,
     and visually assess  nodulation  on root  systems using  broad
     categories:  < 5%, 45%, 70%.

-------
                                 125
7.3.4  Wheat-Wheat Rust
     This system  includes a plant  (Triticum  spp.)  and  fungal pathogen
(Puccinia  graminis  var.  tritici)  that  are of  major  economic
importance.   The  procedures,  developed by the USDA Cooperative Rust
Laboratory at the University  of Minnesota  in St. Paul,  should be  used
for culturing,  inoculation,  and  grading the reaction of the wheat to
the rust  (Stakman et al.  1962).   The  combination  of  wheat and rust
varieties should  be  selected  so that control  plants give a  moderately
susceptible  response to the  rust  fungus.    The  chemical should be
applied at planting.   Changes in  the  rust reaction (size of uredia)
should be recorded 10 d after inoculation.

7.3.5  Carrot-Crown Gall

     This system  provides a  simple and  compact demonstration of
bacterial plant pathogenesis.  The NASA procedure  (Wells  and  Baker
1969; Kleinschuster et al.  1975) for crown gall is recommended.

     Cut carrot disks and place them on moistened filter paper in
     a Petri dish.   Place the bacterial  inoculum and the diluted
     test chemical on  the carrot disk.   After 21 d determine the
     fresh weight of the galls.

7.3.6  Plant-Nematode Interactions

     Nematodes  are important  components of  the  soil  biota, and the
rootknot  nematode is a  significant agricultural pest.   This  test
system would utilize the  procedure from the screening for resistance
test developed  at North Carolina  State University (Taylor and Sasser
1978).   The  test  chemical  and nematode egg  masses would be added to
the soil at the same time the tomatoes are transplanted.  After 5 or 6
weeks,  giant cell development, extent of  galling and nematode egg
production would  be  determined.    Tomato varieties that have  been
identified as moderately resistant (Sasser and Kirby 1979) should be
used.

7.3.7  Agricultural Soil Microcosm

     This system  represents competition  between agricultural and  weed
species.   The following procedure is recommended for this test.

     Collect soil  from  a field that has  been fallow for  at  least
     a year  to  avoid extremes of fertility and concentrations of
     agricultural  chemicals.   Soil pH  should be in the range 5.5
     to 6.0.   Screen the soil, and mix with seeds of clover,
     horseweed,   crabgrass,  and  fescue.   Fill  wooden  flats
     approximately 40 cm x 15 cm  x 6  cm  deep;  add  the test
     chemical;   place the flats  in  a greenhouse;  water as needed
     but do  not fertilize.   Measure rate of  emergence, survival,
     and biomass at termination (4 weeks).

-------
                                126
7.4  Results and Discussion - Arthropod Interactions

     Working Group C developed a set of "Type Arthropod Interactions"
that were considered to  have potential for evaluating the impact of
toxic  substances  on  terrestrial  population  interactions.   The
interactions were categorized as follows:

     1.    Arthropod interactions  with plants  as phytophagous
          feeders

               Sucking feeders
               Grazing (chewing) feeders

     2.    Arthropod interactions with  biotic mortality factors
          (exploiters)

               Parasiteid
               Predator
               Pathogen

     3.    Interspecific competition

     4.    Symbiotic interactions

               Interspecific symbiosis
               Intracellular symbiosis

     5.    Functional   interactions   between  sucking,  grazing
          arthropod on a single plant unit

     6.    Host plant competitive interactions  as mediated by a
          phytophagous insect.

     The best  studied  sets of species  for each of these interactions
were  identified  and  listed.   From these  lists,  species  sets  were
selected that  are either proposed for development  (Sect.  7.4.1) or
that  show some promise  but cannot be recommended at this time (Sect.
7.4.2).    Finally, a  tentative  test  protocol  is  presented  for
competition  between  Tribolium  species.   Each of  the  interactions
listed above is included in at least one of these systems.

7.4.1  Proposed Test Systems

     The  systems  described  below  were  designated as  having  the
greatest  potential for  evaluating the  effects  of chemicals on
arthropod population  interactions.  These systems  use relatively
well-studied species  and  can  include  more  than one of  the  type
interactions.   The systems  are evaluated  in  Table 7.3,  and  the
constituent interactions are ranked in Table 7.4.

-------
127













to
£
UJ
1 —


to


to
UJ
1—
a
LU

i
o
Q£
n^

LU
x
l—
u_
0
»
o
NH

^£

i
«c

UJ

o

<
(3
5
I
^

CO

r*.
UJ

S
t—
























O> «A
£ -o
10
C O>
•i- at
C I.
•i- OJ
S*
t— s^
a>
03
a,.^
3 re
U- O

in
u

^j
tn

^j
(O




£>
-p-
.J
+J
•f"
tf)
c
a>
CO

^
t.
o
.s t~
ID ai
fi- H-
O IS>
J3 C
a re
r— i.
(- -U
0)

C


*J
^
JO
re
u

f—
CL
ai
ce



c
re
ce









S
ai

(A
3?





in o
^0 VD O O  OO Csj
LD ID O^ rorO r-HOO^"
II 1 II 1 CO 00 1
CSJCSI OO^-O O Or-HiHO
 GO ro i— t CM co icvvro
VI
•°.£ . . ....
re u>\fc/>i to tot/>t/>to
to to ... i . ....
co£ xtocoi x xcacom
m


33 =3=>_l=> _J =>=23— 1




i
CD
L) O>

iniA lAinin O)C IAIA in
aia> a>oia>i ma) o>a>i o>
t— I— 1— 1— 1— i oiin t— 1— II—
II 1 1 1 1 S- J3 1 1 1 1
(—1- h- 1— 1- Q. < t-(- t-






X => — 1 £ =3 X X ££3 X













XX X X X £ X XXX X










XX XXX£ X X -1 — 1 X








r-l CM CO «*• in ID


•a
§.r-
o in
••- *> T3
ai IA o
•u re *>
0 S. -r-
§ja -F- a. re
1 O 1 t-
•*- t.ino> +J>)>>rea)
in a>3-o -i-i— r- a i—
t- o i- o lAi-v-ire
ere j=->--i-> ro S 5 T3 u
reo Ecu>re t. o o -r- in
OlC t. i- -r~ E re •— •— J=
ja uj o o i- a. ID a. JD ja a *>
ii sot— z c E iii re n-
i— r— •— tj e s s s -t- ,— —,— ,-« «
U-4-H- 01 S-(.S.t- i— l<-it-lt-t-
OIO)Q) OOOO O 0)0)0)0) r*~ C
4J4J+J C22jt2 J3 lAiAininre jt
•^•t-.|- (.UI.S.C -r- 3333<*- O
J=J=JT orererere t- 0000-— s-
S S S o uJ LU uj uj i— xxxx< m

ID l£> ID VO
in in in m
iiii
co oo co co
CM CM CM CM
l/i to l/> to
£ £ £ SI
^^ ^^ ^^ ^.

Irt l/> tO t/)
CO CO CO CO


—1 —1 —J —1


















X £X£













X X X X










X £ X X



















•o

'5 1-
<-> 0
0) a> m re
•— i— re -a
re re s- o>
u u re t-
IA in Q. Q.
i i i i
*> 0) 0) 01
C i— i— i—
i— U O U
o- 10 to to





















T3
01
re
u

•o
c

01

o>

c
o
•£
re
u
3
•o
0)

a>
^



c
o
>»
J3
0)
E
re
^j

•a
0)
.^!

re
u
01
CL
in

0)
.,_
3
er
01

in
1

in

IA

0)
a> IA i—
*J C 0) 0
re S j= o
S- O *> J=
J= 0) C U
a>-o jt j^ n- ui
•r- O O C O
X £ -J => J=
^- 0)
	 < X
x £ -i =3 re ja

-------
128








re
to
o

u
 re
a> s-




>,
£
re

01
c
01
o








c
o


u
re

a>
c
*-H





CO rH CM *S" CO rH f— 1 rH CM ^f *tf° CO rH CO CM rH


1-HrHrHCOrHCMCMl-H
rH^-rHrO rH^J'^'^'rHrOCO^- CMCVJCOrH








CO rH CM  ° 3 -"2 •!- £ r-
s- •— v>o-<-(-oo(-in t-

> xt-rere> ••-•>-•>->(- o
•r- aireEt-inmrerec •—
JD ia.airoa.(oreTJo.o ^
t- ai i c D.Z s- s- ai i -r- IE
ai>> j- >, c i i ID ro i- >> +J >>3
JZ^E Or-EEEQ-C- O.C- •- •— -1-
IH-4- >«-(-i-i-IIIO- *JlBUI«t-i—
^j oio^joi '^ aioop^oioioi 01 "001010

re '»-s»jcre t. •p-^CCjzreres s jcre3*r-
•— J= re o. u aij=rerereo.uuo o 0.001-
















w
O
u
•-
>>
•r- il
> ai

•i- 'o
W r—
c a.
01 X
in ai
•o ai
C L>
re o

^ IS
•r- fc
1 — 01
re -c
£.
ai <•-
c o
01
01 >,
^ •!-
01 >
-C 4->
1 '^
1 l/>
01 C
i— Ol
.a in
ra
(- ai
0 £
> *->
re

ai
01 •i-'
i- re
re u

rH "5
C
0 "~
c
in o
Ol •!-
C -U
•i- O
•u re
re t-
re J3

-------
                                 129


     (1)   PIant-whitefly-paras1toid.   The greenhouse  whitefly is a
sucking  herbivore  that  can use  tomatoes,  cotton,  and a variety  of
other  domestic plants,  but  beans are  recommended for  laboratory
testing.   It  is exploited  by  the parasitoid  Encarsia  formosans, which
is  available  commercially.   Both insects  have 21-d life cycles  at
20°C.  The system is documented  in Burnett (1967).

     (2)   Corn-earworm-exploiters.  The corn earworm,  a  lepidopteran,
chewing  herbivore, is an  important  pest of corn.  Earworm exploiters
that  can  be  used  in the  laboratory include  the  egg parasitoid
Trichograma,  the  pathogens   Bacillus  thuringensis  and  nuclear
polyhedrosis virus,  and the  nematode Neoapplectana carpocapsal.   The
nematode  is also the  vector for another pathogen,  Achromobacter
nematophilus.   The system  is  documented in Starks  and  McMillian 1967.

     (3)   Alfalfa-aphid-parasitoid.   The  alfalfa  aphid, Therioaphis
trifolii (T. maculata)  is  a  sucking pest of leguminous crops.  It is
exploited  by the parasitoids  Praon  exsoletum  (P.  palitans),  Trioxys
complanatus (T. utilis), and  Aphelinus asychis (A.  semiflavusT!This
system presents the possibility of testing the effects of chemicals on
competition  between  the  parasitoids  as   well   as   on  the
plant-herbivore-parasitoid food  chain.  These  insect  species are not
available  from stock cultures.   The system is described in Force and
Messenger  (1964a,  1964b, and 1965).

     (4)   Plant-brown scale-exploiters.   The brown soft  scale (Coccus
hesperidum) is  a  sucking  herbivore that  can be raised on numerous
plant genera including Coleus, Begonia, Ficus,  and Ilex.  It  has  more
than 35  hymenopterous parasitoids and several  coccinellid predators
including  Chilocorus  stigma.   Advantages  of scale insects as test
organisms  include:

     1.   Their sessile  nature   provides  for manipulation and
          quantification of many population parameters.

     2.   They  share  an   intimate   spatial   and  chemical
           relationship with  their host plant  including  a high
          sensitivity to host chemistry such as concentrations of
          nitrogen and pesticides.

     3.   They  leave a  permanent  record  of   survival  and
          parasitism.

     4.   They have  numerous  predators  and parasites  and engage
          in intense  intraspecific and interspecific competition.

     5.   They are easily  reared in the greenhouse and produce
          several  generations per year.

     The major  disadvantages  of this system include  the relatively
small amount of work that  has been done with  the system and the

-------
                                130
relatively high level of specialized training required in identifying
and manipulating the insects.

     (5)   Housefly-blowfly-parasitoid.   These  systems  include
parasitism of  the housefly (Musca  domestica) by  a wasp (Nasonia
vitripennis), competition between the  housefly and  blowfly [Phaenicia
(Lucilia) sericata  Meig.],  and competition  in  the presence of the
parasitoid.    These   systems  require   little  equipment and  have
well-defined media;   the physical  parameters  have not been studied in
detail as they  have  for Tribolium but  they are probably somewhat less
important.  Although the population system is fairly simple to run and
requires  little training,  it  would  require a fair  amount  of labor.
Differences  among fly strains used could  influence results  because
flies vary  in their sensitivity to parasite  attack and can evolve
defensive mechanisms.  Both fly  species are commercially available.
Documentation for the  fly-parasitoid  system is found  in Chabora and
Pimentel  (1970); for the fly-fly system in Pimentel et al.  (1965); and
for  the  fly-fly-parasitoid system  in  Cornell  and  Pimentel  (1978).

     (6)   Flour beetle competition.    Competition  between  Tribolium
castaneum and Tribolium confusum is one of the best studied systems in
population  ecology.   Under  certain well-defined  conditions, the
outcome of the competition is indeterminate.   Therefore, the system is
thought to be very  sensitive.  A provisional protocol  for this system
is presented in Section 7.5.   Procedures are available to rid cultures
of the  pathogen Adelina,  but  it may be intentionally  included as an
additional interaction.

7.4.2  Promising Systems

     Several arthropod interactive  systems were enumerated that have
good promise, but that are either limited by  the  unavailability of
documentation for standardization  or  present potential problems  for
implementation.  These systems are  discussed  briefly  in the  following
sections.

     (1)  PI ant-herbivore-exploiters.

     Hemlock scales.  This system  includes forest  ecosystem  organisms
rather  than  agricultural  pests.  Several  interactions are possible
involving the  insect, plant,  natural  enemy, and  competitors.   The
sessile  nature  of scales  renders  them  amenable  to  laboratory testing.
The  system is documented by McClure (1979a and 1979b).

     Gypsy moth.  This insect  is  well  documented because of  its
periodic  pest  status.   It is a forest ecosystem,  chewing herbivore.
Methods  for  culturing and manipulation  are documented, but there are
possible  quarantine  problems  (Campbell and Podgwaite  1971;  Capinera
and  Barbosa  1977; Odell  and Rollison  1966;  Hugh and  Pimentel  1978).

-------
                                 131
     Grasshopper-grass.  This system  provides  a laboratory test for
plant-chewing herbivore  interactions  from a grassland ecosystem.  The
test procedure is described in Dyer and Bokhari (1976).

     Corn rootworm-grass.  This  system provides a  laboratory test for
interactions between a plant  and a soil dwelling,  herbivorous insect.
It is also  possible to add an  insect pathogen to  the system.   This
system  is well  documented (Branson 1971; Ortman and  Branson  1976).

     Plant-Japanese beetle-pathogen.   This is  one  of  the best docu-
mented  insect-pathogen systems  and  provides  the  advantages  of a
soil-dwelling  insect.   Documentation  for  this system  is  old but
voluminous  (Fleming 1963; Hawley  1952;  Hadley and  Fleming 1952).

     Cactus   (Opuntia) - moth or  scale-exploiters.  This  system in-
cludes  arid ecosystem  organisms and  allows  several  interactions
including the  use  of both chewing and sucking insects  on the same
plant.   Possible herbivores  include Cactoblastis cactorum (Lepi-
doptera:  Phycitidae), Dactylopius  opuntiae  (Homoptera:   Dactylo-
piidae),  Archlagocheirus  funestus  (Coleoptera:  Cerambyeidae),  and
Metamasius  spinolae (Coleoptera:  Curculionidae).   Documentation of
laboratory  procedures  may be found in Gunn (1974);  Hoffman (1977);
Lindley (1978); Moran and Annecke (1978).

     (2)  Predator  competition.  This interaction  is  not included in
the proposed  tests, and  we  know of  no  documented systems.   One
possible system  would  include checkered  beetles (Cleridae) and bark
gnawing  beetles  (Ostomidae),  which  are  both  polyphagous predators
living on trees or  in the bark.   Another possible system would include
ladybird  beetles  (Coccinellidae) and green lacewings (Chrysopidae),
which both feed on aphids.

     (3)  Mutualism.   No examples  of mutualism are included  in  the
proposed  tests.   A  good example  might be  the cultivation  and
consumption  of the  fungus Fusarium by the ambrosia beetle (Xyleborus
ferrugineous) (Morris  and  Baker 1967 and 1968; Norris and Chu 1970).

     (4)  Plant  competition mediated  by insects.   This   system of  a
greenbug on  small grains includes a class of interactions not  included
in the  other  tests.   (The plant interactions   group pointed out that
herbivorous  insects can  easily  be  introduced  into plant competition
experiments  by neglecting  to  fumigate the greenhouse.)   It should be
easy  to extend this test to include other  herbivores   or  natural
enemies of the herbivores.  Procedures are described in  Windle (1979).

     (5)  Insect-pathogen.   Dermestid beetles  can be  cheaply  and
easily  reared.   The pathogen Gregornia  is known  to  have  chronic
effects  on  population  parameters such as  fecundity and longevity.

     Procedures  for this system are  described in Schwalbe et  al.
(1973a and b) and Schwalbe et al. (1974).

-------
                                132


     (6)   Interspecific competition.   Competition  between Drosophila
species  is  as well  studied  as Tripoli urn  competition and is also
probably a good  candidate  system.   However, we are not sufficiently
familiar with the  system  to  evaluate it in detail or to  propose  its
development.

7.4.3  Protocol  Development (Tribolium competition)

     (1)  Test descriptions.   The  only  system for which  a tentative
protocol  could  be  developed during  the  workshop was Tribolium
competition.   The  Tribolium experimental  model  has been  used
extensively to study competition.   The system has both competitive and
predatory interactions because adult beetles  feed  on eggs and larvae.

     A hypothesis to be tested by this protocol includes - What is the
impact  of  toxic substances  on  competitive/predatory interactions?
Though  the  system envisioned has  only two species,  the effects  of
toxic  substances  on  community diversity,  trophic structure, and
stability may be inferred from the results.

     Size must be  considered when designing  the system.  Under some
environmental conditions  competitive interactions between Tribolium
confusum and  T.  castaneum are  indeterminate.   In  other words, the
winner cannot be  predicted;  rather each species wins a given percent
of the  time.  This  has been demonstrated  in  studies  by Park (1948,
1954) and  Mertz et  al. (1976).  In standard media  (Park et al. 1965),
at 29°C, about  25% relative  humidity and  constant darkness,  the  two
species  are eventually matched.   In approximately  50% of  the  cultures
T. confusum will  win,  while  in the  remaining cultures, T. castaneum
will win.

     A  description  of the recommended test  procedure  is provided
below:

     Treatments (a)  10 T.  confusum and 10 T.  castaneum
                (b)  20 T.  confusum
                (c)  20 T.  castaneum

     Replication.  For (a) treatments, a minimum of 20 replicates
     are needed.   For  the  (b) and  (c) treatments, 10 should  be
     sufficient.  Replicability can be increased by the  use  of
     block design.

     Introduction of test chemicals.  It would be easy to add the
     test  chemical  to the flour  medium.   Since the medium  is
     usually  changed every  30 d  when a census  is taken, the
     exposure could  be short- or  long-term.   Exposures of  less
     than 30 d are also possible.

     Measurement of effects.    Censuses  of adults will be taken
     every 30 d.   Immatures  can also be speciated but with less

-------
                                133
     accuracy.   Counting   immatures   is   also   much   more
     time-consuming.

     Outcome of competition.   In  the  control  (a) treatment,  com-
     petitive  indeterminism should be  found, whereas,  in  the
     experimental  (a)  treatments, deviations  from the control
     treatment are  a measure  of the impact of the test chemical.
     For example,  one  species might win in all  of the cultures
     (determinate competition).   Time to  extinction of one com-
     petitor  could  also be a  response  criterion for  treatment
     (a).

     (2)  Analysis of results.  There  are  numerous statistical  tests
for  analyzing results by  comparing a  control  and an experimental
treatment (e.g., Dunnett's  Test  and Duncan's Test) and for comparing
several  treatments  (e.g., Tukey's Test  or  Scheffe's Test) (see Steele
and Torre 1980; Brown 1965).  The above test could be  used for the (b)
and (c) treatments, where each species is alone.

     For comparing  the  (a)  treatments, possible goodness of fit test
would be appropriate, for example,  the  G-statistic (Sokal and Rohlf).
The control  treatment could be used to generate expectations.

     If  in  control  (b) and  (c) treatments,  one  species always becomes
extinct  or  if there is  a lack of indeterminacy in the control (a)
treatment, results should be rejected.

     The Tribolium  experimental model  is a "laboratory model system."
As such, it is simpler than nature, though it is by no means simple.
The results of experiments  utilizing  the Tribolium model may be used
to indicate the possible  effects of  a  test  chemical  on  natural
communities.

     There are several major  questions  that need to be resolved.   For
example, how  quickly can you  predict the  outcome of  a  competition
culture?  By  the third  census (90 d), the  outcome can be  predicted
with perhaps  80% accuracy  by using  numerical  superiority  as the
prediction  criterion;  by  day 150,  predictions  are  perhaps 90%
accurate.  Exactly how accurate are these estimates?

     It  might be very useful  to  use  this test  system with a  test
chemical whose "effects" are  well known.   This  would  give  a better
understanding  of  the  ability  to  generalize results  to   other
terrestrial  systems.

     Numerous  review  articles are available,  several  of which  deal
specifically with competition:  Sokoloff (1972,  1975,  and 1978); King
and Dawson  (1971);  Mertz  (1972); Park (1948, 1954);  Mertz et  al.
(1976); and  Neyman et al.  (1956).

-------
                                134


7.5  Conclusions

     The potential test systems for microbial population interactions
and community properties are not highly recommended for the following
reasons:

     I.    Population interactions  and community properties  of
          terrestrial microbes are difficult  to measure because
          of interference by the  soil.   These properties can be
          far more easily measured in aquatic systems if they are
          deemed to be of interest.

     2.    The primary importance of terrestrial  microbes is their
          functional role in the ecosystem.   Functional responses
          are also more easily measured (Section 5).

     3.    Because  the  relationship   between  population  and
          community  level properties  of  soil  microbes and their
          functional  dynamics  in ecosystems  are  poorly
          understood,  the  results of these tests would  have
          little explanatory or predictive power.

     The  two  best potential  test systems for microbial population
interactions appear  to  be lichen  mutualism  and  the antagonism  between
Trichoderma and  Rhizoctonia.   These  systems are well  understood and
could be easily tested.

     Of the plant and microbe systems evaluated by Working Group  B,
the  clover-fescue interference system  received the highest  rating
because  it combines  interactions between  plant  populations  with
interactions  between  plants  and  microbial symbionts;  it  is a
well-developed  system  of  some importance  and it  appears to  be
sensitive.  The  agricultural  soil microcosm is rated  relatively low
because  it  is   untried.   The  remaining  systems that include
interactions  between  single  plant species  and their  mutualistic
symbionts or pathogens were all thought to  hold high promise.

     Working  Group C  (arthropod   interactions) concluded  that, in
general,  systems  involving Homoptera  will be more sensitive than those
involving  lepidopterous larvae.   Systems involving more  than one
interaction are  presumably  more realistic  but  may  require much more
time, cost,  development,  etc.   There is  no clear perception that  one
or  a few  particular types  of  interaction  (e.g.,  plant herbivore;
natural  enemy-prey)  is  superior  to  the  others.   The major common
parameters  for  all  interactions are  fecundity,  survival,   and
development  time.   These should be determined  for any  test to ensure
that  effects  are detected.   However, as  systems are developed it  may
occur  that one  or more parameters  are impractical.   For example,
measurement  of  fecundity and development time  for nematodes  in the
earworm-nematode-bacterium  system would  seriously complicate  use  of
the  system.

-------
                           135
Some of  the serious questions  that  were left unresolved are:

1.   What is the  most  appropriate method for applying the
     test chemical?

2.   What are the  criteria  for validating these systems in
     the field?

3.   What magnitude of effect is significant?

-------
                                136


7.6  References

Abdul-Wahab, A.  S. ,  and E. L.  Rice.  1976.   Bull. Torrey  Bot.  Club
     94:486-497.

Bransen, T.  F.  1971.   Resistance  in  the  grass  tribe  Maydeae to larvae
     of the western corn rootworm.  Ann.  Entomol. Soc. Am.  64:861-863.

Bryant, M.  P., E. A.  Wolin,  M.  J.  Wolin, and  R.  S. Wolfe.   1967.
     Menthanobaci11 us  omelianskii,  a  symbiotic  association of  two
     bacteria.   Arch. Microbiol. 59:20-31.

Burnett, T.  1967.   Aspects  of the  interaction  between  a chaleid
     parasite and its Aleurodid host.  Can. J. Zool.  45:539-578.

Campbell,  R. W.,  and J. D. Podgwaite.   1971.  The disease complex of
     the gypsy moth.    1.   Major components. J.  Invertebr.  Pathol.
     18:101-7.

Capinera,  J. L. ,  and P. Barbosa.  1977.   Influences of natural  diets
     and  density on  gypsy moth  egg  mass  characteristics.   Can.
     Entomol. 109:1313-8.

Chabora,  P.  C. , and D.  Pimentel.   1970.  Patterns  of  evolution in
     parasite-host systems.  Ann. Entomol. Soc. Am.  63:479-486.

Cornell, H. ,  and D. Pimentel.   1978.   Switching in the  parasitoid
     Nasonia vitripennis  and  its  effect  on  host competition.   Ecology
     59:297-308.

Dyer,  M.  I.,  and  U.   G.  Bokhari.  1976.  Plant-animal interactions;
     Studies of the effects  of grasshopper  grazing on blue  grama
     grass.  Ecology 57:762-772.

Fleming, W.  E.  1963.   The Japanese  beetle  in the  United States.
     USDA-, Handbook N. 236. 30 p. ill us.

Force,  D.  C. ,  and P.  S.  Messenger.  1964a.   Fecundity, reproductive
     rates  and innate  capacity for increase of  three  parasites of
     Therioaphis maculata  (Buckton).   Ecology 45:706-715.

Force,  D.  C. ,  and P.  S.  Messenger.  1964b.   Duration of development,
     generation  time,  and longevity  of  three  hymenopterous parasites
     of  Therioaphis  maculata  (Buckton)  reared at  various constant
     temperatures.  Ann.  Entomol. Soc. Am. 57:405-413.

Force,  D.  C. ,  and  P.   S.  Messenger.  1965.   Laboratory studies on
     competition  among three parasites  of the  spotted alfalfa aphid
     Therioaphis maculata  (Buckton).   Ecology  46:853-859.

-------
                                 137
Gunn, B.  H.  1974.   Laboratory  investigations  into the dispersal  of
     crawlers  of  Dactylopius  austrinus  De  Lotto  (Homoptera:
     Dactylopiidae).  Unpublished report.

Hadley, C.  H.,  and W. E.  Fleming.  1952.   The Japanese  Beetle,  pp.
     567-573. In:  USDA Yearbook of Agriculture, 1952.

Harper, J.  L.  1977.   Population Biology of  Plants.   Academic Press,
     New York.

Hawley,  I.   M.  1952.   Milky diseases  of  beetles,   pp.  394-401.
     In:  USDA Yearbook of Agriculture, 1952.

Healy,  J.  B.,  and  L. Y.  Young. 1979.  Anaerobic  biodegradation  of
     eleven  aromatic  compounds  to  methane.   Appl.  Environ.  Microbiol.
     38:84-89.

Henis,  Y. ,  A.  Ghaffar, and  R.  Baker. 1978.    Integrated  control  of
     Rhizoctorria  solani  dumping-off  of radish:   Effect of successive
     plantings,  PCNB, and  Trichoderma harzianum  on  pathogen  and
     disease.  Phytopathology 68:900-907.

Henis,  Y.,   A.  Ghaffar,   and R. Baker.  1979.   Factors  affecting
     suppressiveness  to  Rhfzoctonia solani  in soil.   Phytopathology
     69:1164-1169.

Hoffman,  J.  H. , and  V.  C.  Moran.  1977.   Pre-release studies on
     Tucumania tapiacola  Dyar  (Lepidoptera:    Pyralidae), a potential
     biocontrol  agent against jointed cactus.   J.  Entomol.  Soc.  South
     Afr. 40:205-209.

Hough,  J. A.,  and D.  Pimentel.  1978.   Influence  of  host foliage  on
     development,  survival  and  fecundity  of  the gypsy moth.   Environ.
     Entomol. 7:97-102.

Kaneko, T.,  R.   M.  Atlas, and  M.  Krichevsky.  1977.   Diversity  of
     bacterial populations  in  the Beaufort  Sea.   Nature  270:596-599.

King,  C.  E.  , and  P.  S.  Dawson. 1971.   Population biology and the
     Tribolium model. Evol.  Biol. 5:133-227.

Kleinschuster, S.  J. , B.  L. Baker, and R. Baker.  1975.   Responses of
     crown  gall  tissue  to  gravity  compensation.   Phytopathology
     65:931-935.

Kormanik, P. P., W.  C.  Bryan,  and R. C. Schultz.  1977.   Influence of
     endomycorrhizae  on growth  of sweetgum seedlings  from eight mother
     trees.   For. Sci. 23:500-506.

Kormanik, P. P., W.  C.  Bryan,  and  R. C.  Schultz.  1980  (in  press).
     Procedures  and equipment for staining large numbers  of plant  root
     samples for endomycorrhizal assay.  Can.  J. Microbio.

-------
                                 138


Marx, D.  H.  1969.   Antagonism of mycorrhizal  fungi  to root pathogenic
     fungi and soil bacteria.  Phytopathology 59:153-163.

Marx, D.  H., and  W.  C.  Bryan.  1975.  Growth  and  ectomycorrhizal
     development of loblolly pine seedlings in  fumigated  soil  infested
     with  the fungal  symbiont  Pi soli thus  tinctorius.   For.  Sci.
     22:245-254.

McClure,  M.  S.  1979a.  Spatial and  seasonal  distribution of hemlock
     scales.   Environ.  Entomol. 8(5):869-873.

McClure,  M.  S. 1979b.  Self-regulation in hemlock scale populations:
     Role of food quantity and quality.  Entomol. Soc.  Am. Misc.  Publ.
     Vol. II, No. 3, 49 pp.

Mertz,  D. M.  1972.  The  Tribolium  model and  the mathematics  of
     population growth.  Ann. Rev.  Ecol. Syst.  3:51-78.

Mertz,  D.  M., D.  A.  Cawthon, and  T.  Park.  1976.  An  experimental
     analysis of competitive indeterminacy in  Tribolium.  Proc.  Nat.
     Acad. Sci. 73:1368-1372.

Miller,   T. L., and M.  J. Wolin. 1974. A serum  bottle  modification of
     the  Hungate technique  for cultivating obligate anaerobes.  Appl.
     Microbiol. 27:985-987.

Moran, V. C., and D. P. Annecke. 1978.  Critical  reviews  of biological
     pest  control  in  South  Africa.  2.  The  Prickly  pear, Opuntia
     ficus - indica  (L.)  Miller.   J.   Entomol.  Soc.   South  Afr.
     41:161-188.

Neyman,   J.,  T. Park,  and E. L. Scott. 1956.  Struggle for existence.
     The  Tribolium model biological  and statistical  aspects.   In:
     Proc. Berkeley Symp.  Math.  Statist.  Probab. , 3rd ed., J.  Neyman,
     ed.  4:41-79. U. California Press, Berkeley.

Norris,   D.  M. , and  J. K.  Baker.  1967. Symbiosis:   Effects of  a
     mutualistic fungus  upon  growth  and reproduction of Xyleborus
     ferrungeneus.  Science 156:1120-1122.

Norris,   D. M.  and  J.   K. Baker. 1968. A minimal nutritional substrate
     required   by  Fusarium  sol am'  to  fulfill  its  mutual i stic
     relationship with Xyteborus ferrugeneus.   Ann.  Entomol.  Soc. Am.
     61:1473-1475.

Norris,   D. M., and H. M. Chu. 1970. Nutrition of  Xyloborus ferruginous
     II.   A  holidic diet for  the  asymbiotic  insect.   Ann. Entomol.
     Soc. Am. 63:1142-1145.

Odell,  T.  M.,  and  W.   D. Rollinson. 1966. A technique  for rearing the
     gypsy moth, Portheria dispar  (L) on artificial  diet.  J. Econ.
     Entomol. 59:741-742.

-------
                                 139


Ortman, E.  E.,  and  T.  F.  Branson.  1976.  Growth pouches for studies of
     host plant  resistance  to  larvae  of  corn  rootworm.   J.  Econ.  Ent.
     69:380-382.

Pimentel, P.,  E. H.  Feinberg,  P.  W.  Wood, and J.  T.  Hayes. 1968.
     Selection,  spatial  distribution  and the  coexistance of competing
     fly species.  Am. Nat.  99:97-109.

Park, T.  1948.   Experimental  studies of interspecies competition.  I.
     Competition  between populations  of  flour beetles, Tribolium
     confusum  Duval  and  Tribolium castaneum  Herbst.   Ecol. Monogr.
     18:265-308.

Park, T.  1954.  Experimental studies of  interspecies competition.  II.
     Temperature,  humidity  and  competition   in two  species  of
     Tribolium.  Physiol. Zool. 27:177-238.

Rice, E. L.  1974.  Allelopathy.  Academic  Press, New York.

Rice,  E.  L. 1979.  Allelopathy - an  update.   Bot.  Rev. 45:15-109.

Roper, M. M.,  and K.  C.  Marshall. 1978.   Effects  of  clay mineral  on
     microbial predation  and parasitism  of Escherichia coli.   Microb.
     Ecol. 4:279-289.

Rouse, D. I.,  and R.  Baker. 1978. Modeling and quantitative analysis
     of biological  control  mechanisms.   Phytopathology  68:1297-1302.

Ruchle, J.  L.,  and  D. H. Marx.  1977.  Developing  ectomycorrhizae on
     containerized pine  seedlings.  USDA Forest Service Research Note
     SE-242.   Southeast Forest Experiment Station, Asheville,  North
     Carolina.

Sasser, J.  N. , and M.  F. Kirby.  1979.  Crop cultivars  resistent  to
     root-knot nematodes, Meloidogyne species.  North  Carolina State
     University Graphics, Raleigh, North Carolina.

Schwalbe, C.  P.,  G.  M. Boush,  and W.  E. Burkholder.  1973a. Factors
     influencing  the  pathogenicity   and development  of Mattesia
     trogodermae  infecting  Trogoderma glabrum  larvae.   J.  Invertebr.
     Pathol. 21:176-182.

Schwalbe, C.  P.,  G.  M. Boush, and W.  E.  Burkholder. 1973b.  Physical
     and physiological  characteristics of.Trogoderma  glabrum infected
     with the schizogregarine  pathogen Mattesia  trogodermae.   J.
     Invertebr. Pathol. 22:153-160.

Schwalbe, C.  P.,  W.  E. Burkholder, and  G.  M.   Boush.  1974. Mattesia
     trogodermae  infection  rates  as   influenced  by  mode  of
     transmission,  dosage and  host  species.   J. Stored Prod.  Res.
     10:161-166.

-------
                                140
Sokoloff, A.  1972, 1975,  and 1978. The  Biology of Triboll urn With
     Special  Emphasis  on Genetic  Aspects (in  3 volumes).Oxford
     University Press, London.

Stakman,  E.  C.,   D.  M.  Stewart,  and  W. Q.  Loegering.  1962.
     Identification of  physiologic races of Puccini a graminis var.
     tritici.  E617. USDA,  Agricultural Research Service,  St.  Paul,
     Minnesota.

Staley, J. T., K.  C. Marshall, and U.  B.  D. Skerman. 1980.  Budding and
     prosthecate bacteria  from  freshwater habitats  of various  trophic
     states.  Microb.  Ecol. 5:245-251.

Starks, K.  J.,  and W.  W. McMillan. 1967.  Resistance in corn  to the
     corn earworm and fall  armyworm. II:  Types  of  field resistance  to
     the corn earworm.  J. Econ.  Entomol.  60:920-923.

Taylor, A.  L.,  and J.  N. Sasser.  1978.  Biology, identification and
     control  of  root-knot   nematodes  (Meloidogyne  species).   North
     Carolina  State University Graphics,  Raleigh,   North  Carolina.

Wells, T. R.,  and  R. Baker.  1969.  Gravity compensation and crown  gall
     development.   Nature 223:734-735.

Wjetunga, C.,  and  R.  Baker.  1979.  Modeling  of phenomena  associated
     with soil  suppressive  to  Rhizoctonia  solani.   Phytopathology
     69:1287-1293.

Windle, P. N., and  E.  H. Franz.  1979.  The effects of insect parasitism
     on plant  competition:   Greenbugs  and barley.  Ecology 60:521-529.

-------
      METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF

CHEMICALS ON AQUATIC POPULATION INTERACTIONS
            March 18 and 19, 1980
             Jeffrey M. Giddings

     Environmental Sciences Division
      Oak Ridge National Laboratory

-------
                                142
                             PARTICIPANTS

                       J.  M. Giddings, Chairman
                     Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                            PREDATION GROUP
Charles Ashton                      C. R. Cripe
University of West Florida          University of West Florida

G. J. Atchison                      Geraldine Cripe
Iowa State University               U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

C. C. Coutant, Group Leader         R. E. Millemann
Oak Ridge National Laboratory       Oak Ridge National Laboratory

J. F. Sullivan
EG&G Idaho, Inc.
                  COMPETITION AND MULTISPECIES GROUP
B. G. Blaylock                      Stephen Hansen
Oak Ridge National Laboratory       U.S. Environmental Protection
                                      Agency

A. S. Bradshaw                      Andrew Kindig
Environmental Sciences Division     University of Washington

J. D. Cooney                        Larry Klotz
University of Tennessee             State University of New York

Stephen Gough                       F. B. Taub, Group Leader
Oak Ridge National Laboratory       University of Washington
                               OBSERVERS
J. V. Nabholz                       A. S. Mammons
U.S. Environmental Protection       Oak Ridge National  Laboratory
  Agency

-------
                                 143


                               SECTION 8

              METHODS FOR MEASURING EFFECTS OF CHEMICALS

                  ON AQUATIC POPULATION INTERACTIONS
8.1  Introduction

     This workshop  was convened to discuss  laboratory test systems
that address  interactions  among populations of two  or more aquatic
species.  The  interactions  of  greatest  concern  were predation
(especially  among  fish) and  competition  (especially  among  algae),
because these  phenomena have received the most attention in previous
research.   Simple laboratory systems  containing algae, grazers,  and
decomposers  (referred  to hereafter as "multispecies  systems"  or as
"microcosms")  were  also discussed; there is  no  sharp distinction
between these  systems   and  the  mixed  flask  cultures  considered in
Section 6.   Other population interactions (parasitism, grazing,  and
symbiosis) have been largely neglected in environmental toxicology and
have, therefore, received little attention in this section.

     The workshop objectives  were:   (1)  to ensure that the  critical
review  conducted by  Oak Ridge National Laboratory (ORNL) of existing
and  potential  methods  for  testing chemicals for  effects  on aquatic
population interactions was as complete and comprehensive as possible;
and  (2) to gather information and  ideas on the  practical  applications
of  such research for  hazard  assessment  under  the Toxic  Substances
Control Act (TSCA) of 1976.

8.2  Results and Discussion

8.2.1  Evaluations of Test Methods

     Two  working groups were  formed,  one  to discuss predation
experiments,  and  the other  to  discuss competition experiments  and
multispecies culture  systems.   Each  group  evaluated  selected  test
methods in  terms of the criteria suggested for  hazard assessment
protocols.  These evaluations (Appendix A) aided in the preparation of
the ORNL  review  (Giddings,  1981).   Summaries of  the  evaluations  are
presented in Tables  8.1, 8.2, and 8.3.  The criteria and rating scales
were as follows:

     1.   Replicability.   How  similar are  the  results  of
          replicates from any given experimental  run?  G  = Good,
          F = Fair;  P = Poor; U = Unknown.

     2.   Reproducibility.    How well  can  an   experiment be
          repeated to give  the same results?  G =  Good; F = Fair;
          P = Poor;  U = Unknown.

-------
                                144
             TABLE 8.1.  EVALUATION OF PREDATION TESTS3

^
•,_
-(->

U)
c
0)
to
u
H
H
H
H
L
H
U
H
U
H
U
U
H
01
5
o-
(U
S-

O)

• r-
•"
D
H
W
W
D
D
D
H
D
H
D
H
H
D





i ^
in
o
CJ
H
M
M
H
L
H
L
L
M
L
L
L
L
L
in (ft

-------
                                145
             TABLE 8.2.   EVALUATION OF COMPETITION TESTS3


"^QJ
U
c
O)
£-
0)
il-
CU
o:
3
13
14
18
23
24
25
26
28
30
31
12,38
46
47
»
•f—
J3
(0
U

'o.
^
p
U
F
P
G
G
F
F
F
U
U
G
U
G
.a

u
3
•a
0
S-
Q.
O)
Q£
P
U
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
c
o
-p
to
N

•5
IB
•o
c
m
.p

p
G
P
P
G
G
P
P
G
G
P
F
G
G
•P
•^
>
•r~
•p
•r—
l/>
C
at
to
L
H
U
L
U
H
H
U
U
H
U
H
U
U
•a
0)
i.
3
CT
0)

E
•r—
1—
M
W
M
W-M
W
D
D
W
M
D
W
W
W
W




0
0
H
L
L
M
L
L
L
L
L
L
M
L
M
L


-------
                                146
        TABLE  8.3.   EVALUATION OF  MULTISPECIES  CULTURE  SYSTEMS3


_Q
u
0)
U
4-
0)
Q£
21,22
32
33
35
36,37
43
44,45
48
$
•—
P
m
u
•r—
'o.
O»
QC
P
U
P-F
U
P
G
G
U
•r—
-Q
U
3
•a
o
a.
ai
ce.
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
c
o
•r—
fO

•o
Standar
P
U
F
P
P
U
G
G

-P
•r-
>
Sensiti
L
U
U
U
U
U
H
U
•o
0)
•r—
13
cr
CD
0)
•r-
M
M
M
M
M
W-M
W-M
D



•P
U)
o
CJ
M-H
L
L
L
H
L
L
M

U) (A

It)
r—
O
t
+*
X
LU
U
U
P
U
U
F
F
P

aSee text for explanation of criteria and symbols.



bSee Section 8.4.

-------
                                147
     3.   Standardization.   How readily can  the procedure  be
          standardized  for  use  by  other laboratories?   G  = Good;
          F = Fair; P = Poor; U = Unknown.

     4.   Sensitivity.  Does  the test  system  show effects at low
          concentrations  of  chemical?   H = High (more sensitive
          than acute  LC5o);   L  = Low (less sensitive than acute
          LC5o); U = Unknown

     5.   Time required.  How long does the experiment last?  D =
          1 to 10  d;  W = m  to 8  weeks; M = 2 or more months.

     6.   Cost.  What  is  the  cost  of setting  up  one  experimental
          system? Once  the  system  is in place, what is the cost
          per chemical  tested?  H  = High;  M = Moderate; L = Low.

     7.   Special facilities and skills.   Does  the  procedure
          require any special equipment, techniques, or training?
          Y = Yes; N = No.

     8.   Extrapolation.   How  well  can the  results  of  the
          laboratory  experiments  be  used  to  predict  chemical
          effects  or  other  ecological   phenomena  in  natural
          ecosystems?  G = Good; F = Fair;  P = Poor; U =  Unknown.

     In general, predator-prey  tests appear to be more  replicable  and
more  readily  standardized  than competition  tests  or  multispecies
culture  systems  (Tables  8.1,  8.2, and  8.3).  Reproducibility is
virtually unknown  for  all systems  reviewed.   Predator-prey tests are
more  sensitive  to chemicals than  acute  single-species bioassays  in
many  cases;  the sensitivity  of competition  tests and  multispecies
cultures is largely unknown.  Predator-prey tests are  the most  rapid,
usually  lasting  from  less  than an hour to  several  days,  whereas
competition tests take weeks and most multispecies culture experiments
last for months.   Few of the test systems in any category are  rated
highly expensive, but absolute costs per test are generally not known.
All tests require  some  special  facilities or skills (see Appendixes
for details).   Extrapolation  to nature  is  still  a matter  of guesswork
for most systems, although laboratory-field comparisons have been made
in  a  few instances.   Overall,  predator-prey  systems are  in a  more
advanced stage of  development as  chemical  effects tests  than are the
other  two  categories.   It  should  be  remembered, however,  that the
different categories of tests were evaluated by different groups  of
researchers with different backgrounds  and biases.

8.2.2  Group Discussion

     Each working  group was asked to  (1)  identify  major  issues in
multispecies toxicity  testing,  (2) identify  problems  in  predicting
ecological  effects  of toxic  chemicals  from  results of  laboratory
tests, and (3) outline  research that is needed.   The two groups took

-------
                                148
rather  different  approaches.  The  Predation Group  concentrated  on
formulating guidelines for  the  design and analysis of predator-prey
experiments.   The Competition/Multispecies System Group addressed some
of the  more general problems of using complex experimental systems to
test chemicals  for  ecological  effects.   The following summaries were
adapted from  the  statements of  Dr.  Charles  Coutant,  who led the
Predation  Group,   and  Dr.   Frieda   Taub,   head  of  the
Competition/Multispecies  System Group, that were presented during the
final session of the workshop.

     (1)  Predation experiments.  The  scope  of  this session included
the relatively  simple  experiments  that have been conducted with one
predator and one  prey  species.   The more complex systems  that were
discussed by the  Competition/Multispecies System Group were excluded.
Predator-prey tests are  seen  as a step  towards  ecological  realism.
Predator-prey tests are  often  more sensitive than conventional acute
toxicity tests.    Finally, predator-prey  tests provide data for impact
assessment questions  related  to  the  survival   of  prey and  the
energetics of predator populations.

     These tests  are  not to  be  performed in  a vacuum,  but  in
conjunction with  conventional  methods.   Results must  be  related to
acute or chronic mortality.   In a sense,  predator-prey experiments are
a test  of  the application factor concept.   Predator-prey tests might
be an alternative to chronic toxicity tests, because chronic exposure
tests are  often  long  and expensive while some predation tests can be
completed in a short time.

     Where in the testing hierarchy, then, do predator-prey tests fit?
Acute LC50  tests  should  be conducted first  to  provide background
information,  particularly for predators and prey that might be used in
predation experiments.   The purposes  of  the acute tests are:   (1) to
characterize the  relative sensitivity of  species;  (2) to look  for
behavioral clues  as  to what effects might  occur  in a predator-prey
situation;  (3)  to  examine water  quality  effects  (temperature,
salinity,  turbidity,  etc.)  that are  difficult to  include  in  a
predation  test  but  that  require investigation;  (4)  to decide which
organisms to use  in a predator-prey test;  and  (5)  to determine the
necessity  for  a  predator-prey  test for  a  given  chemical.
Predator-prey tests might  be  followed  by  the  multispecies tests
discussed  in Section  8.2.2(2).   Results  could be used  for an  impact
analysis  in  terms of  the population dynamics of the  prey and the
bioenergetics of  the predator.  Ultimately, ecosystem  studies  will be
needed  for verification of predicted impacts.

     One  category of available tests  includes  single-species tests
that  are  based  on  the premise that  the observed  responses might
influence  predator-prey   interactions.    Such  responses  include:
swimming  speed   (burst  and  stamina), maneuverability,  activity,
burrowing rate,  reaction time, reaction  distance, feeding orientation,
schooling  behavior, aggressive  behavior, and  learning.  At some  point

-------
                                149
in the development  of  such tests, the effects  should be correlated
with the  presumed predator-prey effects. Another  category of tests
includes tests with  two species,  many of which are described  in  the
literature  (Appendix  A).   Usually the prey  are  stressed separately
from the predator, and  the predator and  prey are then placed together
to test the differential selection of the prey by  the predator (e.g.,
Coutant 1973).   In a few cases, simultaneous stresses are given to the
predator and the prey (e.g.,  Weltering et al. 1978).   We are not aware
of any tests in which only predators were stressed.   A third category
of test involves multiple predators and prey (e.g., Farr 1978).

     (a)  Design  of predator-prey experiments.  Criteria that should
be used in  setting  up  the optimal system for  testing predator-prey
relationships  include:   (1)  criteria for  the test  organisms; (2)
criteria for the test systems; and (3) criteria for the test protocols
themselves.

The criteria for test organisms are:

     1.    The organisms must be readily  available.  Wild  strains
          are  desirable,  although  cultured stocks  are  more
          practical  for routine testing.   The history of cultures
          should be known.

     2.    The organisms must survive under laboratory conditions.
          Wild strains  should  be  given  time to acclimate to the
          laboratory.

     3.    The predator should be a good feeder under experimental
          conditions.

     4.    Short generation  times  are desirable  for  organisms
          cultured in the laboratory.

     5.    Relatively small animals are more convenient to work
          with.

     6.    The organisms  should have ecological,  economic, or
          social  significance.

     7.    The organisms  should have a realistic  potential  for
          exposure to the chemical (t,g.  , aquatic  insects may  be
          unintended targets  of arthropod toxicants).

     8.    There should be a natural  relationship between predator
          and prey.   The  vulnerability  of  the  prey  to  the
          predator should be  known.

     9.    The natural behavior of the organisms should  be known.

-------
                                150
     10.   Responses to  selected standard  chemicals  (LC5o and
          chronic toxicity) should be known.

     11.   The  levels  of disease  and parasitism  in  the  test
          populations should be as low as  possible, unless these
          factors are to be  studied  as part of the test (Butler
          and Millemann 1971).

The criteria for test systems include:

     1.   The  system  should  be   matched  to  the  natural
          predator-prey  interaction.  The  system  must  be
          appropriate to the behavior  of the organisms in terms
          for  example,  of  shelter,  substrate,  light  regime,
          relative  sizes  of predator  and  prey,  and  ratio of
          predators to prey.

     2.   The  test  should be  applicable to a  wide range of
          chemicals.

     3.   The  system   should   be  amenable  to  a  range  of
          concentrations and exposure times.

     4.   The  dosing  system should be realistic.   Flow-through
          dosing systems are necessary for long-term tests.  The
          use of carriers for test chemicals should be minimized.

     5.   Concentrations of the test chemical and its derivatives
          should  be measured  periodically  during  the  test.
          Experience  with  many  chemicals  indicates  that
          concentrations are often not constant, especially  in
          static systems.

     6.   There  should  be  minimum  contamination of  the  untreated
          portions  of  the  system.   For  instance, treated prey
          should not contaminate  the water and  thereby  cause  the
          predator  to  be exposed  to the chemical.  This may  be
          difficult to achieve  in static systems.

     7.   The  organisms  should be  behaviorally  isolated and  free
          from outside noise and distraction.

     8.   The  system should be  replicable.

The criteria for test protocols include:

     1.   Temperature, salinity, hardness, and  other experimental
          conditions must  be controlled.  If the toxicity of a
          chemical  is  suspected  to be  greatly  dependent on
          certain  physical or  chemical  variables,  it  may be
          desirable  to  run the predation  test  under  a range of

-------
                           151
     conditions.    Water  quality  parameters  should  be
     measured throughout the test.

2.   Manipulations  of  the  test  organisms  should  be
     minimized.   Test organisms must be allowed sufficient
     time to acclimate to the experimental system.   Handling
     stress should be equalized  between predator and prey,
     if  possible.   When  it  is necessary  to  handle one
     species more  than  the  other,  there  should  be less
     handling of the  species that  has been exposed to  the
     chemical.    For  example,  if one  is  attempting  to
     quantify effects of  the chemical  on the predator, the
     predator should  be  acclimated to  the  experimental
     system  before prey  are added.   This will  minimize
     synergistic  effects  of handling and the  chemical.

3.   Internal controls  are  desirable.   The predator should
     be  allowed  to feed  on stressed and unstressed prey
     simultaneously.   This  requires  a  differential  marking
     technique,  which may be difficult with small organisms.

4.   Separate prey controls  without  predators  or chemicals
     should be  run simultaneously  to  correct for  normal
     mortality.

5.   Chemical concentrations  should  range from a no-effect
     level to one  that  produces  clear effects.   Failure to
     do  this has  been a deficiency of many papers  in  the
     literature (Coutant et al.  1979).

6.   Effects  of  satiation  of the  predator  should be
     accounted for.  The feeding regime must be standardized
     so  that the organisms  are neither overfed nor  starved.
     This has to be tailored to the organisms used.

7.   Predators and prey should not be reused in successive
     tests.  Learning and accumulation of the test  chemical
     are  two ways  in  which reusing  test animals may
     influence the results  (Ginetz and Larkin 1976). Tissue
     residue  analysis  should be  conducted  after  long
     exposure tests  where significant  accumulation could
     occur.

8.   The endpoint  of  the  test should be  more sensitive  than
     an  acute LC5oi  and no  less sensitive than  a chronic
     test, for most chemicals.

9.   Standard statistics  should be sufficient  for data
     analysis.    Controls   should  be  compared  among
     experiments to  determine the  inherent variability  of
     the predator-prey response.

-------
                                152
     (b)  Role of predator-prey tests in the hazard evaluation
sequence.   Predator-prey tests  can  be sequenced to provide the most
information to the impact analyst.  The relative sensitivities of the
organisms can be determined from LC50 tests.   The next step would be a
predator-prey test,  exposing either the prey, the predator, or both to
the chemical. The purpose  of this test would be to determine if the
predator-prey interaction is likely to be affected at levels below the
     Effects on  survivorship and mortality  of  the prey can become
inputs to population dynamics models.   Here,  the analyst must consider
possible compensatory mechanisms operating on the prey.   Some increase
in  prey vulnerability  might be offset  by other  factors  without
affecting the dynamics  of the population,  so that  the no-effect level
measured in  the  experiment would be  lower than the true no-effect
level  in  the ecosystem.   Predator-prey  switching could be another
compensatory mechanism (Farr 1978).

     Changes in  the predator's  feeding behavior could be incorporated
into  a predator  growth  and energetics model.   If the  predator is
affected, there  may also be increased survival  of prey.  A decision
must  then  be made as  to which  effects are  of  real  concern.   Some
predator-prey tests  might be performed  because  of interest in the
prey;  in other tests the predator may be of greater interest.

     Ultimately,  the validity of  predator-prey  test systems must  be
verified in  studies  on  streams,  ponds,  or other  whole ecosystems.

     (c)  Potential difficulties.  One difficulty  with  any  laboratory
test  is  determining whether  the laboratory derived no-effect level is
really  significant  in  nature.  For  example, most test systems are
designed for one predator and one prey,  but  in  reality  predators have
a suite of prey available.  Once predators eliminate one prey species,
they  can  simply  switch  to  another.   This leads  to the problem of
predicting  community  dynamics.   There  are changing levels of  prey
availability and vulnerability  in any natural system, which we are not
able to simulate in any  simple  test.

     Another difficulty  in  predator-prey systems  is accumulation  of
the  chemical in  the predator.   If a predator is perpetually selecting
the  most contaminated  prey,  its body  burden  may continually increase.
What will be the effects of the body  burden?  Clearly,  there has been
little  experience  using predator-prey systems  to  test the effects of
organic chemicals.

      (2)   Competition experiments and multispecies cultures.    This
group  addressed  the  general problem of predicting  ecological effects
from  laboratory  results.  Very simple  systems,  with relatively few
organisms,  are  amenable to  mechanistic  understanding  and are,
therefore, powerful research tools.   The limitations of simple systems
stem from their  incomplete connectiveness.  The importance of

-------
                                 153
connect!veness  in  determining  the effects  of disturbance  on  an
ecosystem,  especially  a  simple  system,  is  illustrated by  a
hypothetical example  from a  recent paper by May  et  al.  (1979).  In
this example, harvesting of one species results in the extinction of a
competing species as  a  consequence of competitive interactions at a
lower trophic  level.   The situation  is unique because  the  result
depends on  the  hypothesized  feeding and competitive  interactions of
the four  species  involved.   If a natural system  were controlled by
this kind of connectiveness and one tested a chemical on a laboratory
system with a different connectiveness, then it would be impossible to
extrapolate  from  the  laboratory  to  nature.  It was  suggested  that
natural   systems may  have  a  multitude  of  possible connective
relationships and that  natural  systems may be more  like one another
than are  simplified systems.   This problem, although  an important one
in the long run, is not easy to deal with.

     (a)  Complexity.    Comparisons  of  simple and complex laboratory
systems with natural  systems  are major research priorities.   If
simpler systems are amenable  to mechanistic understanding,  clear-cut
demonstrations of this fact are needed.  For example, there  are only a
few examples in the  literature of reversals of competitive  dominance
due to  selective toxicants  (Fielding  and Russell  1976;  Fisher et al.
1974).   If these simple  systems are sensitive  to  chemicals, data are
needed to prove it.

     Ecological complexity in  laboratory systems  might be achieved in
two ways.  Synthetic (or gnotobiotic) systems can  be made more complex
by adding more  species.   Other systems may be complex  by virtue of
being naturally-derived.  A difficulty with naturally-derived systems,
at least  with  many  of those that have been used in the past, is that
one cannot  always  analyze or  document  the  connective relationships
within the systems.   Each of these approaches (simple and complex) has
its advantages  as  well as its disadvantages.   Simpler systems are
easier to analyze;  complex systems may be more realistic.

     (b)  Sensitivity.   The  relative  sensitivities  of different
laboratory  systems  is another  important issue for research in the
near-term.   (The  relative  sensitivity of  laboratory systems  vs.
natural  environments is the  ultimate question,  but not one that we are
ready to  approach yet.) It is  important to recognize  that sensitivity
is partially a  function of  the experimental  conditions;  this must be
taken  into   account  when comparisons  are  made   among  different
laboratory  systems.   Moreover,  there are a variety of parameters that
can be  measured in  a  multispecies system.   Many  researchers measure
photosynthesis  and  respiration and  examine production/respiration
ratios;  others enumerate  populations;  others measure nutrient uptake
rates.   The sensitivity of  the system will  be a  function of which
parameters are selected for  measurement.

     (c)  Representativeness.   The results  of a multispecies test are,
to some extent, specific  to  the organisms in  the system and to the

-------
                                154


experimental conditions.   The problem of selecting test organisms that
are representative of natural ecosystems affects the design of multi-
species systems just as  it affects the design of single-species tests.
Likewise, one must choose a temperature, pH, hardness, etc., that are
typical of  the  natural  environment of interest.  Unless a laboratory
system has  been  tested  over a range of experimental conditions, one
does not  know how situation-specific the results  of  any particular
test may be.  The effects of system design and experimental conditions
should be studied by each researcher for his or her own system.

     (d)   Chemical  exposure.    Another  important   issue   is  the
possibility of transformation of  a chemical in the test system.   For
example, the  state of the chemical may change with  Eh, pH, or oxygen.
Test chemicals may also  be transformed by organisms within the system.
This is  one  instance in which multispecies  systems  can  be  more
realistic than single-species tests.  For example,  a chemical that  is
determined  to be  quite  toxic  in a single-species test may be readily
degraded by other organisms and  produce  virtually no effects in a
natural ecosystem or a multispecies system.

     The exposure of  organisms  in a multispecies   system  to  a test
chemical can  be influenced by the  presence of other organisms  and
abiotic components.    Sediments may absorb the chemical and reduce the
exposure to the biota.  Herbivores and predators may be exposed to the
chemical through  the  food  chain.   Interactions like this between the
chemical and  the  various components of the test system contribute to
the  greater  realism  of multispecies  systems  as compared  to
single-species tests.

     (e) Replicability and  reproducibility.   According to Dr. Taub,
the ability to replicate multispecies systems within an  experiment  is
fairly good.  Occasionally  several replicates in a  group will develop
differently from  the  rest and will  be  omitted from an  experiment.
Initially,  the  systems   undergo fluctuations with  large amplitudes,
occurring synchronously  in  all  replicates.   Later  in  an experiment,
the amplitudes decrease  but replicates become asynchronous, resulting
in  high  apparent variability among  replicates.   This  is especially
true of  species  enumerations;  most chemical factors (e.g., phosphate
and pH) tend  to be fairly consistent.

     When streptomycin was tested in two separate experiments, many of
the effects were reproduced, though not necessarily on the same day in
the two tests.  For example, Anabaena was reduced by the streptomycin;
this effect was  significant from day 7  to  .day  28  in  one experiment,
and from day  11 to day 25 in the  other experiment.

     (f)  Other  issues.   Two other  subjects  discussed briefly were
interactions  among  chemicals  in ecosystems receiving pollution  from
several  sources  and  problems  associated  with carrier solvents
necessary for testing certain types of chemicals.  The carrier problem
may  be especially  serious  in systems containing  decomposers;  some

-------
                                155
observed effects  may be caused by utilization  of  the carrier as a
carbon source by the microorganisms.

     (g)  Role of multispeci'es tests in the hazard assessment
sequence.   Multispecies tests are  considered most  useful  in the
intermediate stages  of  hazard  assessment.  They should be preceded by
acute toxicity tests with single species.  Multispecies tests might be
supplements or alternatives  to some single-species chronic toxicity
tests, because the  former  are less expensive and  easier to perform.
If  chemicals  are expected to  be  transformed  in the environment, a
multispecies  test  should  precede  extensive  testing of  the
transformation products. If  a chemical  is not  highly toxic in acute
screening tests,  but produces unexpected mortalities in a microcosm,
then the formation of toxic transformation products would be suspected
and  should be investigated.  Certainly, multispecies  tests  should
precede  impact  analysis.    They  would,  therefore,  be  used in
approximately the same position as predator-prey tests.

8.3  Conclusions

     Perhaps  the major  problem  to be  resolved before predation,
competition,  and  other  population  interaction   tests  can  be
incorporated  into a hazard  assessment  process  is extrapolation or
generalization of experimental  results  to predict effects in natural
ecosystems.  To a certain extent this extrapolation can be facilitated
by  selecting  organisms and  experimental  conditions  that are
representative of the  natural  systems  of interest.   However,  the
system-specific interrelationships among populations in nature are too
complex  to  reproduce in their  entirety  in the laboratory.  The degree
to  which the necessary  simplicity of  laboratory  test  systems  may
distort  chemical  effects on  population  interactions  is not yet known.
There  is a need  for research to  (1)  compare  the sensitivity  of
simplified  laboratory  systems to  that  of natural  ecosystems,  (2)
relate the ecological complexity of laboratory systems (number of taxa
or  number  of  functional groups)  to their responses to chemicals, and
(3)  develop  models  or  other analytical  approaches to  linking
laboratory  results to  predictions  about chemical   effects in nature.

     A hazard  assessment sequence should begin with single-species
toxicity screening  tests before multispecies tests  are  undertaken.
The  screening  tests  are necessary to  identify chemicals  that  are
likely to  produce ecological  effects,  to determine the relative
sensitivities of different organisms, and to aid in the interpretation
of multispecies test results.

     The effects  of a  chemical  in an  ecosystem depend in  part on
whether  the chemical  is degraded,  transformed,  sorbed by inorganic or
organic  substrates,  bioaccumulated,  etc.   An ecologically realistic
hazard assessment is possible only in  conjunction with  a realistic
exposure assessment.   Fate and effects  of chemicals are inextricably
linked.

-------
                                156
     Laboratory systems involving predation,  competition,  and multiple
population  interactions  are  available for  development  as hazard
assessment test protocols.   Few  of these systems have been used for
chemical testing, however,  and  further experimentation is needed on
all types of tests before any particular technique can be selected for
immediate use.

-------
                                  157


8.4  References

 1.  Boyce, N. P., and S. B. Yamada.  1977.  Effects of a parasite,
     Eubothrium salve!ini (Cestoda: Pseudophyllidea), on the resistance
     of juvenile sockeye salmon, Oncorhynchus nerka, to zinc.  J. Fish.
     Res. Board Can. 34:706-709.

 2.  Butler, J. A., and R. E. Millemann.  1971.  Effect of the "salmon
     poisoning" trematode, Nanophyetus salmincola, on the swimming
     ability of juvenile salmonid fishes.  J. Parasitol. 57:860-865.

 3.  Confer, J. L.  1972.  Interrelations among plankton, attached
     algae, and the phosphorus cycle in open artificial systems.   Ecol.
     Monogr. 42:1-23.

 4.  Confer, J. L., and P. I. Blades.  1975.  Reaction distance to zoo-
     plankton by Lepomis gibbosus.  Verh. int.  Verein. Limnol. 19:
     2493-2497.

 5.  Confer, J. L., G. L. Howick, M. H. Corzette, S. L. Kramer,
     S.  Fitzgibbon, and R. Landesberg.  1978.  Visual predation by
     planktivores.  Oikos 31:27-37.

 6.  Coutant, C. C.  1973.  Effect of thermal shock on vulnerability
     of juvenile salmonids to predation.  J. Fish. Res. Board Can.
     30:965-973.

 7.  Coutant, C. C., H. M. Ducharme, Jr., and J.  R. Fisher.   1974.
     Effects of cold shock on vulnerability of juvenile channel catfish
     (Ictalurus punctatus) and largemouth bass (Micropterus  salmoides)
     to predation.  J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 31:351-354.

 8.  Coutant, C. C., R. B. McLean, and D. L. DeAngelis.  1979.  Influences
     of physical and chemical alterations on predator-prey interactions.
     IN H. Clepper (ed.), Predator-Prey Systems in Fisheries Management,
     Washington, D.C.: Sport Fishing Inst.  pp. 57-68.

 9.  Draggan, S. J.  1977.  Interactive effect of chromium compounds
     and a fungal parasite on carp eggs.  Bull. Environ. Contam.  Toxicol.
     17:653-659.

10.  Farr, J. A.  1977.  Impairment of antipredator behavior in
     Palaemonetes pugio by exposure to sublethal  doses of Parathion.
     Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 106:287-290.

11.  Farr, J. A.  1978.  The effect of methyl parathion on predator
     choice of two estuarine prey species.  Trans. Am. Fish. Soc.
     107:87-91.

12.  Fielding, A. H., and G. Russell.  1976.  The effect of copper on
     competition between marine algae.  J. Ecol.  64:871-876.

-------
                                  158
13.   Fisher, N.  S., E. J. Carpenter, C.  C.  Remsen, and C.  F.  Wurster.
     1974.  Effects of PCB on interspecific competition in natural  and
     gnotobiotic phytoplankton communities  in continuous and  batch
     cultures.   Microb.  Ecol. 1:39-50.

14.   Frank, P.  W.  1957.   Coactions in  laboratory populations of two
     species of Daphnia.   Ecol. 38:510-519.

15.   Giddings,  J. M.  1981.  Chemical  effects on aquatic population
     interactions and ecosystem properties.  IN A. S.  Mammons (ed.),
     Methods for Ecological Toxicology:  A Critical Review of  Laboratory
     Multispecies Tests.   ORNL-5708; EPA 560/11-80-026, Oak Ridge
     National Laboratory, Oak Ridge, Tennessee.

16.   Ginetz, R.  M., and P. A. Larkin.   1975.  Factors  affecting rainbow
     trout (Salmo gairdneri)  on migrant fry of sockeye salmon (Onco-
     rhynchus nerkaTiJ. Fish. Res. Board  Can. 33:19-24.

17.   Goodyear,  C. P.  1972.  A simple technique for detecting effects
     of toxicants or other stresses on  a predator-prey interaction.
     Trans. Am.  Fish. Soc. 101:367-370.

18.   Goulden, C. E., and L. L. Hornig.   1980.  Population oscillations
     and energy reserves in planktonic  Cladocera and their consequences
     to competition.  Proc. Nat. Acad.  Sci. (in press).

19.   Hatfield,  C. T., and J.  M. Anderson.  1972.  Effects of  two insectv
     cides on the vulnerability of Atlantic salmon (Salmo salar) prey
     to brook trout  (Salvelinus fontinalis) predation.  J. Fish. Res.
     Board Can.  29:27-29.

20.   Kania, H.  J., and J. O'Hara.  1974.  Behavioral alterations in a
     simple predator-prey system due to sublethal exposure to mercury.
     Trans. Am.  Fish. Soc. 103:134-136.

21.   Kersting,  K.  1975.  The use of microsystems for the evaluation of
     the effects of  toxicants.  Hydrobiol.  Bull. 9:102-108.

22.   Kersting,  K.  1978.  Experiments with dichlobenil in a micro-
     ecosystem.  Proc. EWRS 5th Symp. on Aquatic Weeds.

23.   Kindig, A.  1979.   Investigations for streptomycin-induced algal
     competitive dominance reversals.  Experimental Rept. ME25,
     FDA Contract No. 223-76-8348, University of Washington.

24.   Klotz, R.  L., J. R. Cain, and F. R. Trainor.  1976.  Algal
     competition in  an epilithic flora.  J. Phycol. 12:363-368.

25.   Kricher, J. C.,  C.  L. Bayer, and D. A. Martin.   1979.   Effects of
     two Aroclor fractions on  the productivity and diversity of algae
     from  two lentic ecosystems.   Int. J.  Environ. Stud.  13:159-167.

-------
                                  159


26.  Lange, W.  1974.  Competitive exclusion among three planktom'c
     blue-green algal species.  J. Phycol.  10:411-414.

27.  Li, J. L., and H. W. Li.  1979.  Species-specific factors affecting
     predator-prey interactions of the copepod Acanthocyclops vernal is
     with its natural prey.  Limnol. Oceanogr. 24:613-626.

28.  Marshall, J. S.  1969.  Competition between Daphnia pulex and £.
     magna as modified by radiation stress.  Ecol. Soc. Amer. Annual
     Meeting, University of Vermont, August 17-22, 1969.

29.  May, R. M., J. R. Beddington, C. W. Clark, S. J.  Holt, and R. M.
     Laws.  1979.  Management of multispecies fisheries.  Science 205:
     267-276.

30.  Mosser, J. L., N. S. Fisher, and C. F. Wurster.   1972.  Poly-
     chlorinated biphenyls and DDT alter species composition in mixed
     cultures of algae.  Science 176:533-535.

31.  Muller, W. A., and J. J. Lee.  1977.  Biological  interactions and
     the realized niche of Euplotes vannus  from the salt marsh aufwuchs.
     J. Protozool. 24:523-527.

32.  Neill, W. E.  1975.  Experimental studies of microcrustacean com-
     petition, community composition, and efficiency of resource
     utilization.  Ecol. 56:809-826.

33.  Nixon, S. W.  1969.  A synthetic microcosm.  Limnol. Oceanogr.
     14:142-145.

34.  Pippy, 0. H. C., and G.  M. Hare.  1969.  Relationship  of river
     pollution to bacterial infection in salmon (Salmo salar) and
     suckers (Catastomus commersoni).  Trans. Am.  Fish. Soc. 98:685-690.

35.  Reed, C. C.  1976.  Species diversity  in aquatic  microecosysterns.
     Ph.D. dissertation, U. Northern Colorado.

36.  Ringelberg, J.  1977.  Properties of an aquatic microecosystern.
     II. Steady-state phenomena in the autotrophic subsystem.  Helgol.
     Wiss. Meersunters. 30:134-143.

37.  Ringelberg, J., and K. Kersting.  1978.  Properties of an aquatic
     microecosystern.  I. General introduction to the prototypes.  Arch.
     Hydrobiol. 83:47-68.

38.  Russell, G., and A. H. Fielding.  1974.  The competitive properties
     of marine algae in culture.  J. Ecol.  62:689-698.

-------
                                   160
39.  Sullivan, J.  F., and G.  J. Atchison.   1978.  Predator-prey behavior
     of fathead minnows, Pimepnales promelas. and largemouth bass,
     Micropterus salmoides, in a model ecosystem.  J.  Fish.  Biol.
     13:249-253.

40.  Sylvester, J. R.  1972.   Effect of thermal stress on predator
     avoidance in  sockeye salmon.  J. Fish. Res. Board Can.  29:601-603.

41.  Sylvester, J. R.  1973.   Effect of light and heat stress on vulner-
     ability of sockeye salmon to predation by coho salmon.   Trans.  Am.
     Fish. Soc. 102:139-142.

42.  Tagatz, M. W.  1976.  Effect of Mi rex on predator-prey  interactions
     in an experimental estuarine ecosystem.  Trans.  Am.  Fish.  Soc.
     105:546-549.

43.  Taub, F. B.  1969.  A biological model of a freshwater  community: A
     gnotobiotic ecosystem.  Limnol. Oceanogr. 14:136-142.

44.  Taub, F. B.,  and M. E. Crow.  1978.  Loss of a critical species in
     a model (laboratory) ecosystem.  Verh. int. Verein.  Limnol. 20:
     1270-1276.

45.  Taub, F. B.,  and M. E. Crow.  1980.  Synthesizing aquatic microcosms.
     IN J. P. Giesy (ed.), Microcosms in Ecological Research (in press).

46.  Tilman, D.  1977.  Resource competition between planktonic algae:
     An experimental and theoretical approach.  Ecol.  58:338-348.

47.  Titman, D.  1976.  Ecological competition between algae: Experimental
     confirmation  of resource-based competition theory.  Science 192:
     463-465.

48.  Tsuchiya, H.  M., J. F. Drake, J. L. Jost, and A.  G.  Frederickson.
     1972.  Predator-prey interactions of Dictyostelium discoideum and
     Escherichia coli in continuous culture.  J. Bacteriol.  110:1147-1153.

49.  Vinyard, G. L., and W. J. O'Brien.  1975.  Dorsal light response as
     an index of prey preference in bluegill  (Lepomis macrochirus).
     J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 32:1860-1863.

50.  Vinyard, G. L., and W. J. O'Brien.  1976.  Effects of light and
     turbidity on the reactive distance of bluegill (Lepomis macrochirus).
     J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 33:2845-2849.

51.  Weltering, D. M., J. L.  Hedtke, and L. J. Weber.   1978.  Predator-
     prey interactions of fishes under the influence of ammonia.  Trans.
     Am. Fish. Soc. 107:500-504.

-------
                   161
                APPENDIX A






     EVALUATIONS OF SELECTED TESTS FOR



EFFECTS ON AQUATIC POPULATION INTERACTIONS

-------
                                 163



                               APPENDIX A


A.I  Predation Tests

A.1.1  Butler and Millemann 1971

     Effect of parasites on swimming ability of salmonids.  Single-
species of test with implications for predation.

     Replicability:  Very good.  Standardization:  Very good.  Sensi-
tivity:  Unknown.  Time required:  One to several days.  Cost:  $6000
to $10,000 (set up); $200 to $400 per chemical tested.  Special
facilities:  Swimming tube.  Extrapolation:  Very good if the host-
parasite system is natural.  Comments:  This approach determines the
effects of a dual stress, one of which is natural (parasite or
disease) and the other of human origin (a chemical) or an animal
(vertebrate or invertebrate).  The results can show synergism,
antagonism, or additive effects between two stresses, e.g., activation
of a latent infection by the chemical (Pippy and Hare 1969); increased
susceptibility to the chemical by an existing infection (Boyce and
Yamada 1977); or protection against the parasite by low concentrations
of the chemical (Draggan 1977).  In the case of swimming ability
tests, the criterion of effect is impairment of swimming ability with
susceptibility to predation enhanced.

A.1.2  Coutant 1973; Coutant et al.   1974, 1979

     Effect of temperature stress on susceptibility of fish to un-
stressed predators.

     Replicability:  Good.  Standardization:  Good; has been used for
both heat shock and cold shock with some variation.  Sensitivity:
Better than acute LC50.  Time required:  For chemicals, time will be
determined by predator satiation; several weeks to train predators to
feed in laboratory; actual test takes minutes or hours.  Cost:  Mainly
for tank set up, which will depend on predator and prey used.  Cost
per chemical depends on manpower and organism rearing.  Special
facilities:  Holding and exposure tanks for fish.  Special
skills:  Fish care.  Extrapolation:   Good for cases where only prey
are likely to be exposed to chemical; artificial when both predator
and prey are likely to be exposed together.  Comments:  This method
has certain disadvantages: (1) low dosages can cause stimulation and
thus enhanced survivorship of prey;  and (2) some behaviors are protec-
tive; stressed fish sink out of sight and escape predation.  Either of
these phenomena can confuse the interpretation of results.

A.1.3  Farr 1977

     Effects of chemicals on susceptibility of grass shrimp to kiHi-
fi sh predation.

-------
                                 164
     Replicability:  Good.   18 to 20 replicates per concentration per
compound.  Standardization:   Probably not high because of time.
Sensitivity:   High because of high arthropod sensitivity to organo-
phosphorus compounds used in test.  Time required:  High because of
number of replicates needed.  Cost:  Moderately high cost per chemical
because of time required.  Extrapolation:  No shelter was provided for
the prey.  Comments:  The same predators were used throughout the
test.  With many compounds that accumulate this could cause a problem.
By dumping the shrimp into the tank the possible added toxicant stress
may produce a synergism resulting in behavior that could not be
properly eliminated with the control.  The necessary number of repli-
cates to avoid the predator affecting the outcome increases the time
and cost factor.  Using marked prey (treated and control) in the same
tank might improve this.  The effects of the toxicant on the fish
cannot be determined.  Farr makes a good point that this test may have
limited significance with stenophagic predators—they will eat the
shrimp they need whether they have been affected by dosing or not.
His follow-up, two-prey study addressed the implications with oppor-
tunistic feeders (see Farr 1978).

A.1.4  Farr 1978

     Effects of chemicals on predator choice between two prey species.

     Replicability:  Good.   Standardization:  Easy.  Sensitivity:
Better than acute LC50.   Time required:  Large amount of time and
effort.  Cost:  High.  Special facilities:  Enough space for 26
55-gal. tanks. Extrapolation:  Demonstrates predator switching to
behaviorally impaired prey.   Good correlation to natural systems.
Comments:  Very good test to show predator switching.  Demonstrated
sublethal effects on most sensitive prey.  Too much work involved for
a standardized test.  Fish-fish predation tests are interesting, but
both predator and prey may be affected by toxicants at the same con-
centration.  Freshwater predation tests should be developed with the
more sensitive crustaceans as prey.

A.1.5  Goodyear 1972

     Effects of stress on susceptibility of fish to predation; refuge
provided for prey.

     Replicability:  Good.   Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Good.  Time required:  7~d acclimation; 10~d test.  Cost:  Low.
Special facilities:  Holding and exposure tanks.  Special
skills:  Fish care.  Extrapolation:  The absolute refuge concept cannot
be extrapolated to a natural environment.  Once off the shelf, prey
were consumed very quickly.  Comments:  Mosquito fish are easily
obtained and reared.  Largemouth bass are easily obtained and trained
as predators.  Test  geared specifically to strong shelter-seeking
behavior of the prey.  The basic concept is sound but this study dealt
with only quantitative data (i.e., percent survival); alterations in

-------
                                 165
behavior responsible for the increased prey vulnerability were not
dealt with.  Quick, inexpensive.  Intraspecific interactions between
prey organisms were not discussed; for example, does the treatment
and/or crowding cause the prey to leave the refuge?

A.1.6  Hatfield and Anderson 1972

     Effect of chemicals on susceptibility of fish to predation.

     Replicability:  Possible.  Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Effects at same level as LC50-  Time required:  24-h exposure; 24-h
clean holding water; 24-h predation test.  Cost:  Higher than
Goodyear1s because of size. Extrapolation:  (1) Natural light regime
used.  (2) Natural temperature regime for time of test.  (3) The use
of the same predator throughout the series of tests raises the
question of how "natural" the response of the predator becomes after
more than one trial.  (4) In the field, the predator may not often be
completely prohibited from pursuing the prey.  (5) Prey were
frequently caught by being forced against the side of the pond.
Comments:  Same concept as Goodyear1s, but the system does not offer
any advantages and the cost is higher.  Behavioral alterations are not
well discussed.  The test with the compound Sumithion® did not indi-
cate a more sensitive effect than the 96-h LC50.  However, it still
may be of value in that those fish left at the LC50 concentration will
themselves be more susceptible to predation than clean fish.  Note:
Although there is only a weak correlation, a swimming stamina test
with the same compound indicated a 35% decrease in critical swimming
speed of the brook trout at a similar concentration (0.5 ppm).  The
comparison of these two types of tests may be of some value.

A.1.7  Kania and O'Hara 1974

     Effect of chemicals on susceptibility of fish to predation;
refuge for prey.

     Replicability:  Possible.  Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Increased prey vulnerability at sublethal exposure concentrations.
Time required:  24-h treatment to prey; 24-h acclimation; 60-h test.
Cost:  Low.  Extrapolation:  see Goodyear 1972.

A.1.8  Li and Li  1979 (and others dealing with zooplankton predation)

     Survival of zooplankton prey in the presence of a zooplankton
predator.

     Replicability:  Unknown.   Standardization:  Should be possible.
Sensitivity:   Unknown, but if species are differentially sensitive to
a toxicant then this system may be sensitive to effects.   Time
required:  Short  because interactions are rapid.  Cost:  Very inexpen-
sive.  Special skills:   Species identification.  Extrapolation:
Unclear.   Comments:  An area that deserves work but for which little

-------
                                 166
background work has been completed.   Perhaps a late level screening
tool as opposed to a quick first level screen.

A.1.9  Sullivan and Atchison 1978

     Effect of chemicals on susceptibility of fish to predation.

     Replicability:  Good.  Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Exposure levels investigated down to the "no effect" level.  Time
required:  48-h exposure (acute) or 21-d exposure (chronic), 48-h
acclimation, 168-h test.  Cost:  Initial set up low, labor high
because of behavioral observations made.  Comments:  Statistics used
to analyze the data seem to accurately deal with the probability that
the next fish eaten will be a treated fish, given the absolute density
at the time.  Much more appropriate than the standard Chi-square for
this type of data.

A.1.10  Sylvester 1972, 1973

     Effect of stress on susceptibility of fish to predation.

     Replicability:  Good.  Standardization:  Good.  Time required:
Short acclimation, exposure less than 1 min.  Cost:  Very low.
Comments:  Predators were preacclimated while prey were not.
Predators were starved  for 7 d before testing—this is unrealistic.
No cover was provided for prey—also unrealistic.  Survival time of
prey was measured  in seconds; this does not reflect behavioral effects
of the thermal stress on the prey, but stress from initially being
dumped into the tank.

A.1.11  Tagatz 1976

     Effect of chemicals on susceptibility of grass shrimp to
predation.

     Replicability:  Fair.  Standardization:  Good potential except
for possible variability of plant survival.   Perhaps artificial plants
would be better.   Sensitivity:  Based on an invertebrate, which
probably had a lower LC50 than the fish.  This compound  (Mirex®) often
produces delayed mortality necessitating a  longer testing time.
Time required:  Moderate amount of setup time because of necessary
replication.  Cost:  Relatively low setup and cost per chemical.

     Extrapolation:  Good in terms of availability of toxicant  to prey
through  plants, water,  sediment—analyses of  all these components were
performed.  See comments.  Comments:  The test was designed  to  observe
the effects on the prey and not on the  predator.  Because  no chronic
or  acute data were included on grass  shrimp sensitivity, it  is  diffi-
cult to  determine  the  overall  sensitivity compared with  a  standard
test, except that  essentially  sublethal  levels were tested.

-------
                                 167
A.1.12  Vinyard and O'Brien 1975

     "Tilt box" to measure predator's interest in potential prey  item.

     Replicability:  High.  Standardization:  High.  Sensitivity:
Unknown. Time required:  Seconds.  Cost:  Relatively inexpensive.
Extrapolation:  Unclear.  A very simple system that may be useful for
early screening.

A.1.13  Vinyard and O'Brien 1976; Confer et al.  1978; Confer and
        Blades 1975

     Measurement of reactive distance in fish (distance between prey
and predator at the point where predator first orients towards prey).

     Replicability:  Results to date indicate quite good replicability
if controlled for prey size and predator size.  Standardization:
Easy.  Sensitivity:  Unknown.  Time required:  Relatively rapid.
Cost:  Low.  Extrapolation:  Unclear, although reactive distance
controls search volume, which is clearly of significance under low
prey densities.  Comments:  Although this test has not been used  in
toxicity testing, it has been used with light intensity and turbidity
as experimental variables.  Atchison is currently beginning to examine
the impact of copper on reactive distance of bluegill to mosquito
larvae.
A.1.14  Weltering et al. 1978
     Effect of chemicals on fish predator-prey system with both
predator and prey exposed.

     Replicability:  Good.  Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Significant impacts at sublethal levels of ammonia.  Time required:
10-d exposure.  Extrapolation:  See comments.  Comments:  The feature
of simultaneously and continuously exposing both the predator and prey
makes sense from an ecological perspective.  In this experiment, the
bass was actually more sensitive than the Gambusia, and a density
dependent impact was also assessed.  This approach likely makes more
sense than exposing only the prey, especially in the case of toxic
compounds rather than thermal stress.

A.2  Competition Tests

A.2.1  Confer 1972

     Competition between phytoplankton and attached algae in con-
tinuous flow aquaria.

     Replicability:  Poor.  Reproducibility:  Low.   Standardization:
Very low; standard species not used.   Sensitivity:   Low.  Time
required:  5 to 9 months.   Cost:   Fairly high setup cost; extremely

-------
                                 168
high cost per chemical  because of length of experiment, number of
parameters measured.   Special facilities:   Greenhouse or other large
area with plumbing.   Special skills:   Radiotracer technique, taxonomic
expertise.  Extrapolation:   Examines relation of attached algae and
open water phosphorus concentration to phytoplankton.  Similar to
shallow ecosystems with heavy bottom growth.   Tracer studies could
indicate alteration of energy flow because of toxic stress.  Extrapo-
lation depends on similarity to natural system (e.g., surface to
volume ratio).

A.2.2  Fisher et al.  1974

     Effect of chemical on algal competition in two-species batch and
continuous cultures.

     Replicability:   Not examined (no replicates run); should be
fairly good.   Standardization:  High.  Sensitivity:  Good—competition
effects in continuous culture observed with PCB at 0.1 ppb (close to
ambient in some rivers).  Time required:  2-3 weeks.  Cost:  Low.
Special facilities:   Constant temperature area; microscope.  Special
skills:  Algal culture.  Extrapolation:  No data; systems very
simplified.

A.2.3  Frank  1957

     Competition between two Daphnia species.

     Replicability:  Began with 8 to 14 replicates; contamination
problem over  18-month experiment.  Standardization:  Complicated.
Time required:  70 d.   Cost:  Low, comparatively.  Extrapolation:
Species naturally occur in  similar habitats but seemingly do not occur
together; extrapolation "only at considerable risk of proving wrong,"
according to  the author.  Comments:  Evaluating the effects of a toxic
substance on  a multispecies  test system seems to be  needlessly compli-
cated  by  introducing the factor of competition between two closely
related (congeneric) species.

A.2.4  Goulden and Hornig 1980

     Competition between two zooplankton species.

     Replicability:  Low; static system varied with  change of media;
low food  every 2 d,  high food every  4  d.  Standardization:  Low;
oscillations  between replicates very high with different conclusion
drawn  as  to best competitor over time.  Sensitivity:   Low?  Time
required:  1  to 3 months.   Cost:  Moderate (mainly personnel costs).
Special skills:  Familiarity with cladoceran  life  history.  Extrapola-
tion:  Difficult to  assess  because variability is  high; however, the
energy reserves may  be  important when  the food (algae) are  diminished
either by grazing or toxicants.  Comments:   Variation  between repli-
cates  was large—population densities  of Daphnia were  twice as  high  in
one sample as in a replicate.

-------
                                 169
A.2.5  Kindig 1979

     Algal competition in batch culture.

     Replicability:  Sufficient to show significant effects with
ANOVA.  Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:  Unknown.  Time
required:  Test runs 7 weeks, but effects observable within 2 weeks.
Cost:  Very low.  Special facilities:  Constant temperature room.
Special skills:  Algal culture.  Extrapolation:  Unknown (see
comments).  Comments:  (1) Results verified predictions from single
species assays to the resistance of Scenedesmus.  (2) Test indicated
competitive ability of Scenedesmus relative to other species tested
and demonstrated competitive reversal.  (3) Results from this experi-
ment predicted Scenedesmus increases  in complex microcosms with strep-
tomycin treatments correctly.  It did not indicate that dominance
would occur late in microcosm development (7 weeks).  Extrapolation to
more complex (i.e., natural) systems  is open to speculation.  Probably
could only be used with extreme caution.

A.2.6  Klotz et al. 1976

     Algal competition in batch cultures.

     Replicability:  Good.  Standardi zati on:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Lowest concentration of sewage tested (20%) gave results.  Time
required:  5 to 7 d.  Cost:  Low.  Special  facilities:  Side-arm
shaker.  Extrapolation:  Field biomass data verified laboratory
findings.  Other rivers receiving municipal sewage in the northeast
have similar situations with Chlorella occurring in the effluent
plume, diatoms outside the plume.  Comments:  (1) It is necessary to
shake the cultures so the diatom does not attach to the side of the
flask.   (2) The diatom must be placed in a  blender to disperse clumps
for accurate cell counts.

A.2.7  Kricher et al. 1979

     Effects of chemicals on productivity and diversity in natural
algal communities.

     Replicability:  Fair.  Standardization:  Poor (inoculum from
natural ecosystem).  Sensitivity:  Good; 1  ppm significantly reduced
carbon fixation and decreased the total number of organisms.  Time
required:  24 h.  Cost:  Low.  Special facilities:  14C.  Special"
skills:  Algal taxonomy.   Extrapolation:  Possible.

A. 2.8  Lange 1974

     Algal competition in batch cultures.

     Replicability:  Fair.  Time required:  15 d or less.  Cost:  Low.
Extrapolation:  Possible.  Comments:  Quantification of blue-green

-------
                                 170
filaments is difficult.  The accuracy with which this is done may
limit usefulness.

A.2.9  Marshall 1969

     Competition among zooplankton species.

     Replicability:  Fair.  Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Unknown for chemicals.  Time required:  100 weeks.  Cost:  Low.
Extrapolation:  Possible.  Comments:  System would need to be tested
with a chemical before consideration as a test system.

A.2.10  Mosser et al. 1972.

     Effect of chemicals on algal competition in batch cultures.

     Replicability:  Unknown. Standardization:  Should be good.
Sensitivity:  Better than single-species tests.  Time required:  4 d.
Cost:  Low.  Special facilities:  Coulter counter.  Special skills:
Algal culture. Extrapolation:  Unknown; simple systems may vary with
grazing and sediment.

A.2.11  Muller and Lee 1977

     Competition among a ciliate, a foramaniferan, and a nematode (all
herbivores).

     Replicability:  Unknown. Standardization:  The organisms' habitat
seems too ephemeral to promote standardization.  Sensitivity:
Demonstrated for nutrient quantity.  Time required:  42 d.  Cost:
Moderate?  Special skills:  Sophisticated culturing techniques.
Extrapolation:  Authors emphasize they have limited their approach to
nutrient factor and population growth results.

A.2.12  Russell and Fielding 1974;  Fielding and Russell 1976

     Algal competition in batch cultures.

     Replicability:  Good.  Standardization:  Moderate. Sensitivity:
More sensitive to  copper  in dual culture than unialgal; changes  in
competition detected from 10 to 500 ppb Cu.  Time  required:   35  d.
Cost:  Low.  Special facilities:  Constant temperature room.
Extrapolation:  Was not done, but suggest  it would be possible in case
of  accidental  industrial  spillage.  Comments:  (1) Quantification of
growth of  filaments  (as  used here)  is more difficult  than that of uni-
cellular algae.  (2) This method compares the performance of  a species
against one competitor with the performance of the species against
another competitor.  By  this triangular method you obtain more infor-
mation than by just  studying performance of species alone vs. per-
formance against one competitor.

-------
                                 171
A.2.13  Tilman 1977

     Effect of nutrient regimes on algal competition in semi-
continuous cultures.

     Replicability:  Unknown. Standardization:  Good. Sensitivity:
Unknown.  Time required:  30-40 d.  Cost:  Moderate.  Special skills:
Bacteria-free algal culture.  Extrapolation:  Apparently good.  Data
inserted into Monod model accounted for 70% of the variance of two
species along a natural silicate/phosphate gradient in Lake Michigan
(even though the cells used were cloned from a different lake).
Comments:  The fact that the clones used in the test, even though not
from Lake Michigan, accounted for much of the variability in the
abundance of those species is indicative of the extrapolative appeal
of this approach.  It remains to be demonstrated whether changes  in
resource utilization with toxicant exposure will extrapolate as well.

A.2.14  Titman 1976

     Effects of nutrient regimes on algal competition in continuous
cultures.

     Replicability:  Appears good.  Standardization:  High.  Sensi-
tivity:  Unknown.  Time required:  3 weeks.  Cost:  Minimal.  Special
facilities:  Temperature control area.  Special skills:  Algal
culture.  Extrapolation:  Resource utilization analysis appears to
predict boundaries of coexistence quite well.  Intuitively, it seems
that imposed stresses should alter the competitive balance between
species and become evident with this testing approach.  Comments:
Establishment of new nutrient gradient boundaries allowing coexistence
of species in the presence of a toxicant could be valuable in pre-
dicting the outcome in natural systems where nutrient concentrations
are known.

A.3  Algae-Grazer-Decomposer Systems

A.3.1  Harrass and Taub (FDA Contract #223-76-8348)

     Mixed culture; algae, grazers, protozoa, fish.

     Replicability:  Tested; good.  Standardization:  Fair; used
filtered lake water, enriched with nutrients, inoculated with
organisms—other lake waters may be different.  Sensitivity: Yes, at
low doses; high doses were more similar to control.  Time required:  1
to 3 months.   Cost:  $10 per replicate, not counting cost of main-
taining stock cultures.   Special skills:  14C, chlorophyll extrac-
tion.  Extrapolation:   Would yield bioaccumulation and consequences;
species diversity shifts; may not predict which species in a natural
community would predominate.

-------
                                 172
A.3.2  Kersting 1975, 1978

     Compartmentalized autotroph, grazer, decomposer system.

     Replicabili'ty:  Appears poor.  Standardization:  Poor because of
complexity.  Sensitivity:  Effects observed appear identical to those
achieved with single species assays, or even less sensitive in some
trials.  Time required:  8 to 9 weeks.  Cost:  Initial cost high;
moderate thereafter.  Special skills:  Algal culturing.  Extrapola-
tion:  see Ringelberg 1977, 1978.  Comments:  This system appears less
vulnerable to species invasion than the system detailed by Ringelberg
but it is still highly complex.

A.3.3  Kindig (FDA Contract #223-76-8348)

     One or two algal species grazed by zooplankton.

     Replicability:  High.  Standardization:  Good.  Sensitivity:
Unknown—established for baseline feeding preference only.  Time
required:  24 h.  Cost:  Low.  Special facilities:  Coulter counter.
Special skills:  Algal culture.  Extrapolation:   Low, unless species
very similar to these are found in the natural system.  Would have to
work by "ecological analogy."  See comments.  Comments:  The utility
of this experiment in toxicity testing is difficult to assess.  The
fact that the presence of preferred food species  increases feeding on
the nonpreferred food species by Daphnia magna was a surprise, but
this,  in itself, was sufficient to allow extrapolation of results.
Attempts at extrapolation would require knowledge of the competitive
relationship of preferred and nonpreferred algal  species.

A.3.4  Neill 1975

     Mixed culture of microorganisms, naturally derived.

     Replicability:  Unknown.  Sensitivity:  Not  tested.  Time
required: Months.  Cost:  Low.  Extrapolation:  Possible.  Comments:
Good potential for combining ecological effects and fate, except that
the fish (which is admitted to the microcosm for  brief feeding
periods) could remove the toxicant.

A.3.5  Nixon 1969

     Mixed culture including algae, bacteria, and grazer (marine).

     Replicability:  Moderate for bacteria and algae, poor for grazer.
Standardization:  Moderate.  Sensitivity:  Not tested.  Time required:
Steady state after 2 months, experiment ran for 5 months.  Cost:  Low.
Special skills:  Bacterial and algal culture.  Extrapolation:  Low, no
grazers survived.  Comments:  Bacteria and algae  stabilized after 50 d
but all attempts at maintaining a grazer population failed.  This
suggests some modification of the system would be desirable before
further testing.

-------
                                 173
A.3.6  Reed 1976

     Mixed cultures with algae, bacteria, and grazers.
                               Standardization:
     Replicability:  Unknown.  	
Unknown.   Time required:  20 weeks.  Cost:  Low.    	
Taxonomic.  Extrapolation:  Possible.  Comments:  Systems were not
used to test toxicants.
Poor.   Sensitivity:
 Special skills:
A.3.7  Ringelberg 1977; Ringelberg and Kersting 1978

     Compartmentalized autotroph-grazer-decomposer system.

     Replicability:  Probably low.  Standardization:  Potential for
invading species high.  Expect difficulties in standardizing decom-
poser chamber flowrates.  Sensitivity:  Unknown—see comments.  Time
required:  Systems were set up with intent to examine stability; ran 3
years.  Time required for a chemical test unknown.  Cost:  Initial
costs high.  Cost per chemical depends on length of run required,
difficulty of cleaning system from previous run, and reestablishing or
reexamining baseline performance.  Special skills: Bacterial and algal
culture.  Extrapolation:  See comments.  Comments:  (1) These systems
are unique because they enable separate evaluation of autotrophy/
heterotrophy/ decomposer units.  This obviously increases ease of
sampling and establishment of chemical fate or manipulation of the
system.  (2)  Increased complexity of the system and its vulnerability
to species invasion makes replication and reproducibility quite diffi-
cult to achieve, as well as expensive to attempt.  (3) Use of toxi-
cants in system is feasible, but reuse of systems afterwards would be
questionable.  (4) The value of this system is for investigations of
nutrient enrichment or nutrient ratio studies on the herbivore-
autotroph-decomposer relationship.

A. 3.8  Taub 1969

     Mixed culture including alga, grazer, bacteria; gnotobiotic.

     Replicability:  Very good.  Standardization:  Should be
excellent, but not tested.   Sensitivity:   Not tested.  Time required:
1 to 6 months.   Cost:   Low.   Special skills:  Sterile technique.
Extrapolation:   Can extrapolate major trophic level effects to the
extent that these organisms are typical of natural organisms; i.e.,
about the same problems as single species bioassays.  Comments:
Should be most able to be standardized among laboratories because
contaminant organisms are excluded.   This test is limited to a few
organisms that can be cultured in bacteria free culture or with
defined bacterial flora.  Could combine chemical fate and ecological
effects in one test.

-------
                                 174
A.3.9  Taub and Crow 1978 and 1980 (in press)

     Mixed culture, including algae, grazers, protozoa, and bacteria.

     Replicability:  Usually good agreement among 4 to 6 replicates.
Standardization:  High.  Sensitivity:  Fairly good.  Time required:  1
to 3 months.  Cost:  Less than $10 per replicate, excluding cost of
maintaining stock cultures.   Special skills:  Culture techniques, 14C,
taxonomic.  Extrapolation:   Can predict trophic level interactions
(e.g., effect on primary producers, or change in dominance); probably
cannot predict which species would become dominant in a specific
natural system.  Comments:   Especially useful for chemicals that are
transformed by some organisms to metabolites that have lesser or
greater toxicities, or that become more available via bioaccumulation.
Also useful for showing indirect effects such as algal blooms if
grazer trophic level is destroyed, or altered grazer relationships  if
algal community is altered.   Most "ecosystem level" variables can be
measured  (e.g., P/R ratio,  chlorophyll a, species abundance, species
diversity).

A.3.10  Tsuchiya et al. 1972

     Grazing by protozoa on bacteria in continuous culture.

     Replicability:  Unknown.  Standardization:  High.  Sensitivity:
Unknown.  Time required:  Days.  Cost:  Several $100 initial costs.
Special skills: Sterile technique.  Extrapolation:  Difficult.
Comments:  Could be used in conjunction with mathematical models to
predict effects.

-------
             175
           APPENDIX B



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF PARTICIPANTS

-------
                                 177



                              APPENDIX B

                   ALPHABETICAL LIST OF PARTICIPANTS
S. M. Adams
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
R.  T.  Belly
Eastman Kodak Company
Research Labs - Building 82
Rochester, New York  14607
John All
Department of Entomology
University of Georgia
Athens, Georgia  30602
B. G.  Blaylock
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
R. V. Anderson
Department of Biological Sciences
Western Illinois University
Macomb, Illinois  61455
Udo Blum
Department of Botany
North Carolina State University
Raleigh, North Carolina  27607
Charles Ashton
University of West Florida
c/o U.S. Environmental
  Protection Agency
Sabine  Island
Gulf Breeze, Florida  32561


G. J. Atchison
Department of Animal Ecology
Iowa State University
Ames, Iowa  50011


R. M. Atlas
Department of Biology
University of Louisville
Louisville, Kentucky  40208


Ralph Baker
Department of Botany and Plant
  Pathology
Colorado State University
Fort Collins, Colorado  80522


L. W. Barnthouse
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O.  Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
John Bowling
Savannah River Ecology Laboratory
Drawer E
Aiken, South Carolina  29801


A. S. Bradshaw
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


Willard Chappell
Environmental Trace Substance
  Program
Department of Colorado
Boulder, Colorado  80309

J. D. Cooney
Graduate Program in Ecology
University of Tennessee
Knoxville, Tennessee  37916


C. F. Cooper
Biology Department
San Diego State University
San Diego, California  92182

-------
                                 178
C. C. Coutant
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830

David Craig
Department of Biomedical Science
P.O. Box 4348
University of Illinois
Chicago Circle
Chicago, Illinois  60680

C. R. Cripe
University of West Florida
c/o U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency
Sabine Island
Gulf Breeze, Florida  32561

Geraldine Cripe
U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency
Sabine Island
Gulf Breeze, Florida  32561

D. L. DeAngelis
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830

Sidney Draggan
Division of Policy Research and
  Analysis
National Science Foundation
1800 G Street, NW
Washington, D.C.  20550

N. T. Edwards
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
J. W. Elwood
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


W. R. Emanuel
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


Farley Fisher
National Science Foundation
1800 G Street, SW
Room 1130 D
Washington, D.C.  20550


D. C. Force
Department of Biology
California State Polytechnic
  University
Pomona, California  91768


R. H. Gardner
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


J. M. Giddings
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


J. D. Gile
Terrestrial Ecology Branch
EPA, Corvallis Environmental
  Research Laboratory
Corvallis, Oregon  97330

-------
                                 179
J. W. Gillett
Terrestrial Ecology Branch
Corvallis Environmental Research
  Laboratory
200 SW 35th Street
Corvallis, Oregon  97330


Daniel Goodman
A-024
Scripps Institute of Oceanography
La Jolla, California  92093
D.  R.  Jackson
Ecology and Ecosystems Analysis
  Section
Battelle Columbus Laboratories
Columbus, Ohio  43201


D.  W.  Johnson
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
Stephen Gough
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
Eugene Kenaga
9008 Building
Health and Environmental Sciences
Dow Chemical Company
Midland, Michigan  48640
T. G. Hal lam
Department of Mathematics
University of Tennessee
Knoxville, Tennessee  37916
Andrew Kindig
College of Fisheries WH-10
University of Washington
Seattle, Washington  98195
A. S. Hammons
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
D. A. Klein
Department of Microbiology
Colorado State University
Fort Collins, Colorado  80523
Stephen Hansen
U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency
200 SW 35th Street
Corvallis, Oregon  97330
Larry Klotz
Department of Biological
  Sciences
State University of New York
Cortland, New York  13045
A. S. Heagle
Department of Plant Pathology
North Carolina State University
P.O. Box 5397
Raleigh, North Carolina  27650

James Hill
U.S.E.P.A. Environmental
  Research Laboratory
College Station Road
Athens, Georgia  30605
J. W. Leffler
Department of Biology
Ferrum College
Ferrum, Virginia  24088

Richard Levins
Department of Population Sciences
Harvard School of Public Health
Boston, Massachusetts  02100

-------
                                 180
Donald Levy
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
University of California
Berkeley, California  94720

Marc Lorenzen
Tetra Tech, Inc.
1900 116th Avenue, N.E.
Suite 200
Bellvue, Washington  98004


Alan Maki
Environmental Safety Department
Ivorydale Technical Center
Proctor and Gamble
Cincinnati, Ohio  45217


M. S. McClure
Department of Entomology
Connecticut Agricultural
  Experiment Station
P.O. Box 1106
New Haven, Connecticut  06504


Allen Medine
Department of Civil and
  Environmental Engineering U-37
University of Connecticut
Storrs, Connecticut  06268


R. E. Millemann
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


P. J. Mulholland
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


R. J. Mulholland
School of Electrical Engineering
Engineering South 202
Oklahoma State  University
Stillwater, Oklahoma  74074
J. V. Nabholz
Office of Toxic Substances
U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency
401 M Street, S.W.
Washington, D.C.  20460


D. M. Nafus
United States Department of
  Agriculture
Building  177A
BARC-East
Beltsville, Maryland  70705


J. D. Newbold
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


R. V. O'Neill
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


Richard Park
Center for Ecological Modeling
MRC-238
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Troy, New York  12181


Hap Pritchard
U.S. Environmental Protection
  Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory
Sabine Island
Gulf Breeze, Florida  32561


J. C. Randolph
Indiana University
The Poplars Building
Room 433
400 East 7th Street
Bloomington, Indiana  47405

-------
                                 181
J. E. Richey
Fisheries Research Institute
College of Fisheries
University of Washington
Seattle, Washington  98195
R. F. Strayer
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O.  Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
John Rodgers
Institute of Applied Science
North Texas State University
N. T. Box 13078
Denton, Texas  76203


J. L. Ruehle
Institute of Mycorrhizal
  Research and Development
Forestry Sciences Laboratory
Carl ton Street
Athens, Georgia  30602


B. W. Rust
Computer Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


F. S. Sanders
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


D. S. Shriner
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830

H. H. Shugart
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O. Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
J. F. Sullivan
EG&G Idaho, Inc.
Idaho Falls, Idaho
83401
G. L. Swartzman
Center for Quantitative Science
College of Fisheries
University of Washington
Seattle, Washington  98195


F. B. Taub
College of Fisheries WH-10
University of Washington
Seattle, Washington  98195


Peter Van Voris
Ecology and Ecosystems Analysis
  Section
Battene Columbus Laboratories
Columbus, Ohio  43201


J. B. Waide
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O.  Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830


W. J. Webb
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O.  Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830
B. P. Spalding
Environmental Sciences Division
Oak Ridge National Laboratory
P.O.  Box X
Oak Ridge, Tennessee  37830

-------
                                            183
                                   TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
                            (f 'lease read Instructions on the reverse before completing)
1. REPORT NO.
   EPA-560/6-81-004
                                                            ^RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
   Ecotoxicological Test Systems:   Proceedings of a
   Series  of Workshops
                                     5. REPORT DATE
                                      June  1981
                                                            6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
7. AUTHOR(S)
   A. S.  Mammons (editor)
                                     8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO

                                        ORNL-5709
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
   Environmental  Sciences Division
   Oak Ridge National Laboratory
   Oak Ridge, Tennessee 37830
                                     10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.

                                       B2BL2S
                                     11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
                                                               IAG No. EPA-78-D-X0387
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
   Office  of Toxic Substances
   U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency
   Washington, D.C. 20460
                                     13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
                                       Final
                                     14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
  Six workshops, held from November 1979 through March 1980, at  Oak Ridge, Tennessee,
  were  designed to  identify  laboratory methods and  data  evaluation  techniques  for
  predicting  the   environmental   effects   of   chemical   substances.    Participants
  discussed  assessment   and  policy  requirements   of multispecies  toxicology  test
  procedures, mathematical models  useful  in  hazard and risk assessments, and methods
  for   measuring   effects   of  chemicals   on  terrestrial   and   aquatic  population
  interactions and ecosystem properties.

  Methods were  evaluated  for  their potential  for standardization  and  for use  in the
  ecological hazard  and risk  assessment processes  under the Toxic Substances Control
  Act.   Results from  the  workshops  were  used  in preparing  a  critical  review  of
  Methods for Ecological  Toxicology  (EPA 560/11-80-026;  ORNL  5708).   The workshops
  were   primarily  used  as  a  mechanism  to  collect  information  about  research  in
  progress by bringing together  investigators  presently working with laboratory test
  systems and data evaluation techniques.
                                KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
                  DESCRIPTORS
                                               b. IDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS  C.  COSATI I icId/Group
    Aquatic  ecology
    Aquatic  organisms
    Assessment
    Biological systems
    Ecology
    Environnental tests
    Environments
    Hazard]
Invertebrates
Laboratory tot*
Hethododogy
Plants(Botany)
Terrestrial Ecology
Test methods
Toxicology
Vertebrates
Water
Aquatic  microcosms
Community  structur*
Ecosystea  function
Ecotoxicology
Interspecific
    interaction
Model  ecosystem
Terrestrial microcosms
Testing  protocols
06/T
18. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT
  Release unlimited
                       19. SECURITY CLASS (This Report)
                          Unclassified
                         11. NO. OF PAGES

                                196
                                               20 SECURITY CLASS 'Thtspafcl
                                              •    Unclassified
                                                                          22. PRICE
SPA Form 22W-1 ,'«,> 4-"'',
                                I T ION IS OBSOLETE
                                                   4U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1981-740-062/120

-------
I
u
CD
O
0)'

-n
0
on c
8 i
pr •
0
m
CO
tn
DO
m > TJ n
T3 (D ^ 3
>CD ° <
w •-* ~
; , 2 to -i
S^ o o o
CO ^ iJ. 3
01 03
3 CB
3
Q)

/**""""
1
Ok

-------